JP5747210B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a display device for production, and this display device displays a video image that is most noticed when a player plays a game (Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-71035 A

  By the way, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is a limit in improving the interest of the game.

  In view of the above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of games.

The invention described in claim 1
In a gaming machine comprising: a game control device that manages the progress of a game; and a display control device that can produce an effect by controlling display means based on a command from the game control device.
The display control device includes:
Arithmetic processing means; program storage means connected to the arithmetic processing means for storing a program executed by the arithmetic processing means; and image data storage means for storing screen information for display on the display means. Have
Screen information for displaying the initial screen is not stored in the image data storage means, but is stored in the program storage means,
When power is supplied to the display control device and the display control device is activated, screen information for displaying the initial screen stored in the program storage means is used without waiting for a command from the game control device. Display the initial screen on the display means,
When a command from the game control device is received, display corresponding to the command is started using screen information stored in the image data storage means.

  Here, the “initial screen” may be, for example, a startup screen for notifying that the startup process is being performed, a startup screen for displaying a color bar, or an error screen indicating an error occurrence and the type of error that has occurred.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of games.

It is a front side perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a game control device. It is a block diagram of an effect control device. It is a block diagram of VDP in the production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an input process. It is a flowchart which shows a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows an output process. It is a flowchart which shows a command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect control command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows production control command output processing. It is a flowchart which shows a command data output process. It is a flowchart which shows payout command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart which shows a winning opening switch / error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows an error check process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a count switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation symbol start process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a stop symbol information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a latter half fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1). It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 2). It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure display middle process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process transfer setting process 2 (at the time-short end). It is a flowchart which shows the fanfare / interval process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows a process transition setting process during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows a fanfare / interval process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a usual game process. It is a flowchart which shows a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart which shows a process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart which shows a process transfer setting process during a normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a general electric power residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows an end process shift setting process per common figure. It is a flowchart which shows an end process per common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific information signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows CPU specific information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows a start port signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol determination frequency signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart which shows distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on reset process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows command reception interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows a received command range check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern corresponding symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process 1 by received command. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process 1 by received command. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process 1 by received command. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process 1 by received command. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 1 hold information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process 2 classified by received command. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process 2 classified by received command. It is a flowchart which shows a stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern classification | category process. It is a flowchart which shows the random number lottery process A. It is a flowchart which shows the random number lottery process B. It is a flowchart which shows the random number lottery process C. It is a flowchart which shows the notification effect setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the notification effect setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the notification effect setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission start process between sub. It is a flowchart which shows a reception task process between sub. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission data edit process between sub. It is a flowchart which shows inter sub ack response task processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production setting process between sub. It is a flowchart which shows an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a customer waiting display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a background edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a background information update determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a moving image index setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a background moving image data edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a background still image data edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a background off data edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a background preview edit process. It is a flowchart which shows notice information update determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows notice information update determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a notice display data edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol information expansion | deployment process. It is a flowchart which shows the present symbol display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the next symbol display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the preview edit process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding edit process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 hold display edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding display pattern edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the preview edit process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows inter-subordinate interlocking preview edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reduction symbol edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a 4th symbol edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a 4th symbol edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit round edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation parameter update process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation parameter update process. It is a flowchart which shows a sound control process. It is a flowchart which shows a sound output process. It is a flowchart which shows a sound effect output process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process between sub. It is a flowchart which shows a received packet analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a received packet analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission interruption process between sub. It is a figure which shows the packet structural example of communication between sub. It is a flowchart which shows a starting screen display process. It is a timing chart explaining operation | movement of the effect between game machines. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of the effect between game machines. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of the effect between game machines. It is a timing chart explaining adjustment of the production timing between game machines. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of the effect between game machines at the time of power activation. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of the effect between game machines at the time of power activation. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of the production | presentation between the game machines in a game. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of the production | presentation between the game machines of Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a starting screen. It is a figure which shows the structure of the electrical connection part between a game board and a game frame. It is a top view of a connector etc. which constitutes an electrical connection between a game board and a game frame.

Hereinafter, as a first embodiment of the present invention, a configuration example when applied to a pachinko machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 1 of this example.
The pachinko machine 1 has a machine frame 2 fixed to an island where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is pivotally supported by the machine frame 2 at a hinge portion 3 so that the machine frame 2 can be pivoted. And a front frame 4 that can be freely opened and closed. A game board 20 (shown in FIG. 2) is attached to the front frame 4.

A glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the upper front side. Note that a game area 22 (to be described later) of the game board 20 can be viewed from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be omitted) held by the glass frame 5. The glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be opened and closed.
Here, the front frame 4 is referred to as a game frame, and the glass frame 5 is sometimes referred to as a front frame. In the present embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are described.
An operation panel 6 is provided below the glass frame 5.
Normally, the pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a CR unit (card type ball lending control unit) as a game medium lending device, but the illustration is omitted here. However, in FIG. 4, the CR unit is illustrated as a card unit 551, and the card unit connection board 54 that relays transmission of signals and the like to and from the card unit 551 is also illustrated in FIG. 4.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 has game nails planted on the front surface of a plate-like base material (so-called veneer). 22 is formed. The game area 22 is an area where a game ball that has been thrown in is dropped from above and a determination of whether it is out or safe (determination of whether or not a prize has been won) is made. Is configured such that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to an upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 (that is, discharged as a prize ball).
Further, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) for the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed at the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the front frame 4.

Moreover, the upper plate 7 provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5 temporarily holds a game ball before being discharged as a prize ball or a rental ball. The upper plate 7 is provided with a push button type effect button 9 operated by the player.
Further, the operation panel 6 is provided with a lower plate 10 that can move a game ball on the upper plate 7 by a player's operation, and a launch operation handle 11 that performs a launch operation of the game ball.
In addition, what is indicated by reference numerals 12a and 12b in FIG. 1 are speakers that output sound effects and the like. Of these, reference numeral 12 a denotes upper speakers provided on both the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5. Reference numeral 12b denotes a lower speaker provided at the left end of the operation panel 6 (left side of the lower plate 10).

In FIG. 1, reference numeral 13 denotes a decorative lamp having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the front surface of the glass frame 5 as a light source, and reference numeral 14 denotes the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5. It is a moving light provided on the front. Although not shown, the moving light 14 includes an LED as a light emission source and a motor as a drive source. Here, the decorative lamp 13 and the moving light 14 constitute a decorative LED 301 shown in FIG.
Further, if the decoration mechanism is divided by the concept of the board and frame of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration lamp 13 and the moving light 14 correspond to the frame side effect mechanism, and constitute the frame decoration device 43 shown in FIG. The moving light 14 also constitutes a frame effect device 45 shown in FIG.

B. 2. In FIG. 2, reference numeral 21 denotes a guide rail of the game board 20. As described above, a game area 22 is formed by surrounding a substantially circular area on the front face of the game board with the guide rail 21. ing.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game area 22 includes an out ball inlet 23, a center case 24, a first start winning port 25, a second starting winning port 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power), and a variable winning device. 27, general winning openings 28 to 31, a normal start gate 32, a number of game nails (not shown), and the like are provided. A collective display device 35 is provided outside the game area 22 of the game board 20. The game nails flow down while hitting the game balls that have entered the upper part of the game area 22, and a plurality of game nails are planted in the game area excluding the attachment portion such as the center case.

The center case 24 is a member that surrounds the front periphery of the display unit 41a (shown in FIG. 2) of the display device 41 (shown in FIG. 4) attached to the back side of the game board 20. Although not shown in the figure, the center case 24 includes lamps that use LEDs for production or decoration as light sources, and electric accessories that enhance production effects in cooperation with production display on the display device 41 (for example, An accessory having a movable part that is operated by a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid).
Note that lamps for effect or decoration are also provided in portions other than the center case 24 of the game board 20 (may be outside the game area 22). It should be noted that lamps for performance or decoration provided on the game board 20 (including the center case 24) correspond to the board-side effect mechanism, and the board decoration device 42 (shown in FIG. 6) and the center case 24 The provided electric accessory corresponds to a board-side production mechanism, and constitutes a board production device 44 (shown in FIG. 6). It should be noted that the electric accessory constituting the board effect device 44 may be provided at a place other than the center case 24 of the game board 20.

The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is usually referred to as a variable display device. In addition, as a name of the display device 41, for example, a special symbol display device, a special symbol display device, a symbol variation device, a variable symbol display device, an identification information variation device, and an identification information variation display device are used as names of members having similar functions. There are various types, but those with the same function are in the same category.
The display device 41 has a display unit 41a (screen) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special figure) such as numbers and characters, and can display a plurality of special figures. For example, special charts are displayed in three vertical columns on the left, center, and right, and special figures consisting of numbers, letters, etc. in each column are displayed in a stopped state (stop display), or in a fluctuating state (for example, vertically) Display in a scrolling state) (that is, a variable display).
In addition to the special figure, the display unit can display an image for presentation or information notification such as a background image or a character image, or an image corresponding to a so-called ordinary figure. Note that the special figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the common figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the common figure (not the big hit). .

The start winning ports 25 and 26 are winning ports that function as start winning ports for special drawings as will be described later. In this example, they are arranged side by side as shown in FIG. The upper first start winning opening 25 is always open. The lower second start winning opening 26 has opening / closing members 26a on both left and right sides, and when these opening / closing members 26a are opened in a reverse C shape, a winning can be made. As shown in FIG. It is impossible to win if it is closed. The start winning ports 25 and 26 are disposed below the center portion of the center case 24.
The second start winning opening 26 is also called an ordinary electric accessory (general power), and corresponds to an ordinary variable winning device.
The variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 27b. This special winning opening 27a is opened on condition that a big hit, which will be described later, is made, and game balls can be won.

As described above, the display unit 41a (screen) of the display device 41 displays an image of a normal map in addition to the special image. The general game will be described as follows. Therefore, the display device 41 corresponds to a normal symbol variable display device.
When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 32, the normal map variable display game by the variable display of the normal map on the display unit 41a or the like (an independent general map display device may be arranged separately from the display device 41). (Hereinafter, referred to as a normal map display game) is performed, and if the stopped general map is in a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a privilege called per map is granted.
When a normal hit is reached, a game is held in which the pair of opening and closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 are opened in a reverse C shape, and are temporarily held for a predetermined opening time, and the game ball is started. It becomes easier to win, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases and the possibility of winning a big game increases.
Also, during the above-mentioned variable display game, when a game ball wins further to the general chart start gate 32, the general chart start memory is suspended and displayed on the display of the collective display device 35 to be described later. Are stored, and after the usual variable display game is completed, the usual variable display game is repeated based on the stored memory. In addition, if the probability of the usual figure is set to a high probability, it becomes easier to hit the ordinary figure.
In addition, the hold display of the common figure start memory displayed by the indicator of the collective display device 35 is the normal figure start memory. In addition to the collective display device 35, a unique general map start memory display for displaying the decorative general map start memory may be arranged in the game area 22. Here, the time reduction will be described as follows. Is something.
Abbreviation of time is an abbreviation of “time reduction”. After the big hit, the special figure and the usual figure change time is shortened more than usual, the time efficiency is increased, and the probability per ordinary figure is increased. The number of executions of a variable display game with a certain special figure by supporting the winning at the starting gate by opening the (second starting winning gate 26) (including extending the opening time of the electric train longer than usual) It is a function to change the special figure efficiently without reducing the number of balls (number of balls).

Next, the collective display device 35 displays a so-called ordinary figure display, special figure display, a special figure or general figure start-up memory hold display (sometimes referred to as a special figure hold display, a general figure hold display), a game, Display of status, for example, a plurality of indicators using LED as a light source (for example, a display composed of one small lamp, or a 7-segment display capable of displaying numbers as a special figure) Instrument). Note that the start memory hold display (in some cases, simply referred to as the start memory display) is a display for informing the number of start memories that are held in a state in which the variable display game is not executed, and generally Is displayed by lighting a lamp or the like for each start memory. In other words, if there are three start memories, the three lamps are turned on or three figures are displayed.
Note that what is displayed by the indicator of the collective display device 35 is the special figure or the ordinary figure (formal special figure or ordinary figure), whereas the above-described display unit of the variable display device 41 or the like. The special map and the general map display to be performed are dummy displays for effects for the player. For this reason, the special display and the general figure as viewed from the player indicate the dummy display. In the following, when emphasizing this dummy display, for example, “decorative drawing” is described.
Thus, the collective display device 35 is not intended for the player but is used for inspection of the game board 20 and the like. For example, the display of the special figure start memory for the player (special figure hold display) is performed by, for example, the display unit of the variable display device 41 or a plurality of lamps (light emitting units) provided on the game board 20.

C. Next, FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment.
The main components of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 1 include a storage tank 51, a guide path 52a, a payout unit 53, a card unit connection board 54, an external information terminal board 55, a payout control device 200, a game control device 100, and an effect control device. 300, power supply device 500, and the like.

The storage tank 51 stores in advance the balls before being dispensed, and an insufficient number of balls in the storage tank 51 is detected by a replenishment sensor (not shown). Balls are replenished from the equipment. The balls in the storage tank 51 are guided by the guide path 52a and discharged to the upper plate 7 by a payout unit (not shown) incorporating a payout motor 222 (shown in FIG. 4). Note that the payout unit can discharge, for example, a number of game balls corresponding to the amount of rotation of the payout motor 222, and the payout unit detects a payout ball detection switch 215 (see FIG. 4).
The external information terminal board 55 has a function as a relay terminal board (external terminal board) when various information (including a unique ID) of the pachinko machine 1 is sent to the hall management device 140.
The unique ID is a concept representing individual identification information (main board unique ID) that can identify the gaming microcomputer 101 and individual identification information (paid unique ID) that can identify the payout microcomputer 201, as will be described later. The reason why these are output to the outside of the gaming machine is to check the unique ID outside to determine the legitimacy of the gaming machine. The management device 140 corresponds to an external device of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), and has a function of externally determining the legitimacy of the pachinko machine 1 based on the unique ID.
Note that the external device having the function of determining the legitimacy of the gaming machine is not limited to the management apparatus 140, and for example, the card unit 551 (see FIG. 4) has a function of judging the legitimacy of the gaming machine. Also good. In that case, the unique ID of the pachinko machine 1 is sent from the external information terminal board 55 to the card unit 551.
In addition, the determination of the legitimacy of the gaming machine may be any of a form performed only by the management apparatus 140, a form performed by both the management apparatus 140 and the card unit 551, or a form performed only by the card unit 551.

Here, the above-mentioned unique ID corresponds to individual identification information that can individually (uniquely) identify an arithmetic processing device (game microcomputer 101 described later) in the game control device 100, but in the payout control device 200. In the arithmetic processing device (the payout microcomputer 201 described later), individual identification information that can individually (uniquely) identify the arithmetic processing device is also stored.
Therefore, in the first embodiment, the individual identification information that can identify the gaming microcomputer 101 is appropriately distinguished from the unique identification information, and the individual identification information that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 is appropriately distinguished from the payout unique ID as necessary. .
In addition, individual identification information that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 is referred to as payout individual identification information as a concept that distinguishes the individual identification information that can identify the gaming microcomputer 101 from the individual identification information. The same applies to other examples described later.
It should be noted that without distinction, when simply referred to as a unique ID, it refers to a main board unique ID.
Further, in the inventive concept, the unique ID is referred to as “individual identification information”. However, in general cases such as a normal site level, the individual identification information is often referred to as a unique ID. In Example 1, the individual identification information is described as a unique ID, and the description and drawings may be described and illustrated as unique information or unique identification information in balance with the unique ID.

The payout control device 200 performs control necessary for paying out game balls (both prize ball payout and rental ball payout), and is configured by storing a circuit board that realizes this control function in a predetermined case. Yes. As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control device 200 performs a prize ball payout control for discharging a predetermined number of game balls to the upper plate 7 as prize balls based on a payout control command transmitted from the game control device 100. In addition, the payout control device 200 controls the payout for paying out the ball so that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to the upper plate 7 as a loan based on the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal from the card unit 551 (see FIG. 4).
The game control device 100 controls a solenoid or the like disposed on the game board 20 and sends control information (commands) to other control devices to comprehensively manage and control the progress of the game ( A substrate on which a circuit including a microcomputer that performs these controls is formed is housed in a predetermined case.

The production control device 300 controls the above-described variable display device, decoration lamp, production device, and speakers 12a and 12b based on the command transmitted from the game control device 100, and this control function is provided in a predetermined case. The circuit board to be realized is housed and configured.
The card unit connection board 54 (see FIG. 3 and also shown in FIG. 4) is a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the CR unit (card unit 551, the same applies hereinafter) side that lends a ball. is there. If the wiring connection is not made on the card unit connection board 54, the pachinko machine 1 is controlled so that it is impossible to launch a game ball.

  In general, when changing the model of a pachinko machine, replace the entire pachinko machine except the CR unit, or leave the pachinko machine frame side (including the payout control device) and the game board side (game board and game control). In some cases, only major control devices such as devices are exchanged. However, in the case of a rental ball of 4 yen, a 4-yen ball is used. For example, in the case of a 1-ball rental stand, the game board side and the frame side are exclusively for 1 yen rental. It is assumed that.

D. Configuration of Control System Next, the control system of the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch. Further, in the drawings, when the name of the member is long, it is difficult to show the illustration, and therefore, the drawing may be appropriately shortened (illustrated).
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 100, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a launch control device 400, and a power supply device 500 as main components of the control system.

(Game control device related)
First, the configuration of the game control device 100 of the pachinko machine 1 and the devices connected to the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
Of the signals indicated by the arrows in FIG. 4, “main ID” is a main board unique ID, “external information” is a gaming machine status signal, and “prize ball signal” is a prize ball from the payout controller. Ball number signal to be paid out, “discharge command” is a discharge command command from the game control device, “various signals” are payout abnormality status signals, chute ball switch signal, overflow switch signal, glass frame from the payout control device An open switch signal, a front frame open switch signal, and the like are shown.
Further, “external information” and “prize ball signal” are collectively referred to as “external / prize ball”.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 101 and an inspection device connection terminal 102. Details of the gaming microcomputer 101 will be described later.
The game control device 100 corresponds to a control device.
The gaming microcomputer 101 functions as a gaming arithmetic processing device (arithmetic processing device), and corresponds to the first arithmetic processing device of the present invention.
The inspection device connection terminal 102 includes, for example, a photocoupler, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the game microcomputer 101 to the inspection device is connected.

The game control device 100 includes a first start port switch 120 (start port 1SW in FIG. 4), a second start port switch 121 (start port 2SW in FIG. 4), a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a count switch 124, Detection signals from the magnetic sensor switch 125, the vibration sensor switch 126, the glass frame open detection switch 211 (glass frame open detection SW), and the front frame open detection switch 212 (front frame open detection SW) are input.
Here, the first start port switch 120 is a sensor for detecting winning balls one by one for detecting the game balls won in the first start winning port 25, and the second start port switch 121 is the second start winning port. This is a sensor for detecting a winning ball, which detects one gaming ball that has won a prize 26.
The count switch 124 is a similar sensor that detects a game ball that has won a big winning opening of the variable winning device 27. Further, the winning port switch 123 is a similar sensor provided for the general winning ports 28 to 31, and when there are n general winning ports, one is provided for each and n is provided as a whole. Instead of providing one sensor for each general winning opening, one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. The gate switch 122 is a sensor for detecting one game ball passing through the usual starting gate 32 one by one.
Each of the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, and 124 for detecting these game balls is a proximity switch in this example, and outputs a negative logic detection signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V. It is configured.

The magnetic sensor switch 125 and the vibration sensor switch 126 are sensors that are provided on the back surface of the game board 20 or the like and detect fraud by magnetism or vibration.
Further, the glass frame open detection switch 211 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine is open. The front frame open detection switch 212 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 to which the glass frame 5 is attached is open.
The game control device 100 is provided with a proximity I / F that processes signals from the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, and 126. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. To do.

Here, the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids 132 and 133 to be described later driven by the game control device 100 have a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 500. Supplied and enabled.
The power supply device 500 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 501, a backup power supply unit 502 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the gaming microcomputer 101 in the event of a power failure, a power failure monitoring signal that has a power failure monitoring circuit and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure A control signal generation unit 503 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal, and a RAM clear switch 504 that initializes an internal RAM or the like of the gaming microcomputer 101 are provided.

  In the first embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, You may comprise so that it may provide on a main board | substrate. Since the game board 20 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 500 or the main board in this way. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement when changing the model.

  The backup power supply unit 502 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 101 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control apparatus 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the control signal generation unit 503 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 501, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less, and changes the power failure monitoring signal (in this example, it is turned on). ) And a reset signal after a predetermined time. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

An initialization switch signal is output from the RAM clear switch 504. The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 is turned on. Information stored in a RAM area such as a work RAM and a similar RAM area in the payout control apparatus 200 is initialized.
In this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 101 and the payout microcomputer 201. The reset signal causes the entire control system to be reset.

Next, the game control device 100 includes a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a test firing test device 131 (connected during a test at a test engine), a general electric solenoid 132, a prize winning solenoid 133, and a collective display device 35. It is connected.
The game control device 100 manages the unique ID of the game control device 100 via the external information terminal board 55, specifically, individual identification information (main board unique ID) that can identify the game microcomputer 101 and external information as external devices. It is output to the device 140.
The external information terminal board 55 is connected to the game control device 100 with a cable, and relays when transmitting external information and the unique ID (main board unique ID) of the game control device 100 to the management device 140 as an external device. .
The management device 140 collects information (for example, external information) from a large number of pachinko machines installed in the amusement store, and performs processing such as calculation processing and tabulation display of information necessary for business.

Here, as the external information, for example, a signal that informs the signal input to the game control device 100 to the outside, a jackpot signal that informs the jackpot that occurs in the course of the game, a starting port that is a condition for rotating the symbol A start signal indicating the winning of a symbol, a symbol starting to rotate, or a symbol determining number signal notifying the symbol rotation when the symbol stops rotating, and the gaming state being in a state advantageous to the player (so-called probability variation state) , A privilege state signal indicating a short time state) and the like, and signals that are notified to the outside, and these are collectively referred to as a gaming machine state signal.
Since the privilege state signal is generated after the end of the big hit state, it is a signal output during the “big hit state + a state advantageous to the player” period.
Further, data (for example, a payout command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 by parallel communication. On the other hand, a payout abnormality status signal, a shot ball out switch signal, and an overflow switch signal are output from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100. The contents of each signal will be described later.

Next, the test firing test apparatus 131 connected to the game control apparatus 100 will be described.
The test firing test apparatus 131 is used by an authorized organization to perform a test firing test of a gaming machine. The general electric solenoid 132 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member of the second start winning port 26, the large winning port solenoid 133 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening / closing member of the variable winning device 27, and the collective display device 35 is a so-called general purpose as described above. Display, special figure display, and also, special chart and usual chart start memory hold display and game state display.
Further, the game control device 100 is configured to transmit data (for example, an effect command) to the effect control device 300 through parallel communication.

(Production control device related)
Next, a configuration of the effect control device 300 and devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer, a video control microcomputer that performs video control exclusively under the control of the main control microcomputer, a VDP as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41, Although it has a sound source LSI that controls the output of various melody and sound effects, the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 analyzes the control command (8-bit data signal) from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, determines the contents of the effect and controls the content of the output video of the display device 41, or the sound source LSI. The reproduction sound is instructed and the speakers 12a and 12b are driven to produce sound effects, and the process such as the drive control of the decoration LED 301 described above is executed. Further, when receiving the error notification instruction from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 outputs a signal to the error notification LED 302 to turn it on.
Here, in addition to a single command (for example, a stop command), the command transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300 does not start the presentation alone, and exhibits the effect in pairs. This is, for example, “variation pattern command + design designation command” at the start of special figure variation, and details of the type of command will be described later. The command communication may be a parallel communication method or a serial communication method. In this embodiment, a parallel communication system is adopted as command communication.

(Discharge control device related)
Next, the configuration of the payout control apparatus 200 and devices connected to the payout control apparatus 200 will be described.
The payout control device 200 includes a payout microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a payout microcomputer) 201 for controlling payout of game balls (award ball payout or rental payout), an error number display 202, an error release switch 203, an inspection device. A connection terminal 204 is provided. Details of the payout microcomputer 201 will be described later.
The payout microcomputer 201 functions as a payout arithmetic processing device (arithmetic processing device), and corresponds to the second arithmetic processing device of the present invention.
The inspection device connection terminal 204 includes, for example, a photocoupler, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various types of information related to payout obtained from the payout microcomputer 201 to the inspection device is connected. When there is an error in the payout control process, the error number indicator 202 lights a specific number according to the content of the error. The error cancel switch 203 outputs a signal for canceling the error when operated, for example, when the processing is stopped due to an error in the payout control process.

Devices connected to the input side of the payout control device 200 include an overflow switch 213, a radio wave detection sensor 214, a payout ball detection switch 215, and a chute ball break switch 216.
The overflow switch 213 is a switch for detecting that the number of game balls in the lower plate 10 is excessive, the radio wave detection sensor 214 is a sensor for detecting abnormal radio waves such as fraud, and the payout ball detection switch 215 is by a payout unit 53 (FIG. 3). A switch for detecting game balls (award balls or rental balls) to be paid out toward the upper plate 7 one by one, a chute ball cut switch 216 detects that there is no game ball on the chute for supplying the game balls to the storage tank 51. Switch.

As devices connected to the output side of the payout control device 200, there are a payout motor 222, a card unit connection board 54, a firing control device 400, and an external information terminal board 55.
The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 222 of the payout unit 53 in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 100, and performs control for paying out a prize ball. Also, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 222 based on a BRQ signal (lending request signal) or the like from the card unit (CR unit) 551 connected to the card unit connection board 54, and pays out a rental ball. Control to make it happen.
An operation panel board 552 is connected to the card unit connection board 54, and the operation panel board 552 is provided with a ball lending LED, a balance indicator, a ball lending switch, a return switch (all of which are provided in the pachinko machine 1). Etc.) are connected. The operation panel board 552 receives signals such as a ball lending LED and a balance indicator from the card unit (CR unit) 551, and sends operation signals from the ball lending switch and return switch to the card unit (CR unit) 551 for lending. Control necessary for paying out the ball is performed.
Although not shown, backup power is also supplied from the power supply device 500 to the RAM area of the payout control device 200 in the event of a power failure.

The payout control device 200 sends a prize ball signal (ball number information paid out as a prize ball) created based on the payout command received from the game control device 100 to the management device 140 as an external device via the external information terminal board 55. At the same time, the unique ID of the payout control device 200, specifically, individual identification information (payout unique ID) that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 is output to the management device 140 via the external information terminal board 55.
When the card unit 551 determines the validity of the payout unique ID, the payout unique ID is output to the card unit 551 via the external information terminal board 55.
The external information terminal board 55 is connected to the payout control device 200 with a cable, and performs relay when transmitting the prize ball signal and the unique ID (payout unique ID) of the payout control device 200 to the management device 140 as an external device. .

  The launch control device 400 is supplied with necessary power from the payout control device 200 and receives a launch permission signal and a power failure detection signal. The launch control device 400 controls the launch motor 401 that launches the game ball according to the operation of the launch operation handle 11, and signals from the touch switch 402 and the launch stop switch 403 are input to the launch control device 400. The touch switch 402 detects whether or not the player is touching the launch operation handle 11, and the launch stop switch 403 temporarily stops the launch of the game ball and is operated by the player. It is.

Next, a detailed configuration of the game control apparatus 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control device 100 is a main control device that controls the game in an integrated manner, corresponds to a main substrate (that is, a circuit formed on the main substrate), and specifically includes a circuit shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control apparatus 100 includes a CPU unit 150 having a gaming microcomputer 101 (that is, a gaming microcomputer) 101, an input unit 151 having an input port, an output unit 152 having an output port, The data bus 153 connects the CPU unit 150, the input unit 151, and the output unit 152.

The CPU 150 includes a game microcomputer 101 called an amusement chip (IC) and an inverter that logically inverts a signal (start winning detection signal) from a proximity I / F 163 described later and inputs it to the game microcomputer 101. An inverting circuit 112 and an oscillator such as a crystal resonator are included, and an oscillation circuit 113 that generates a clock serving as a reference for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit, and the like.
The gaming microcomputer 101 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 101A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 101B, and a RAM (random access memory) 101C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 101B stores non-changeable information (program, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 101C stores the work area of the CPU 101A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 101B or the RAM 101C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

The CPU 101A executes a game control program in the ROM 101B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and drive signals for solenoids 72 and 73 and a collective display device 35 described later. Or the entire pachinko machine 1 is controlled.
Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 101 performs a hard hit determination random number for the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a hit determination random number for the normal figure variation display game, etc. A random number generation circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 101A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for providing update timing of the random number generation circuit A clock generator.

Here, the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids 72 and 73 described later driven by the game control device 100 have a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, and DC 5 V generated by the power supply device 500. Supplied and enabled.
The power supply device 500 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 501, backup power supply unit 502 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of game microcomputer 101 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch to inform game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of power failure A control signal generation unit 503 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. However, since the game board 20 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 500 or the main board in this way. By providing it, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement when changing the model.

  The backup power supply unit 502 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 101 (particularly, the built-in RAM 101C) of the game control apparatus 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the control signal generation unit 503 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 501, and when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less, the control signal generation unit 503 changes (for example, turns on) the power failure monitoring signal as detecting the occurrence of power failure. At the same time, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) is turned on, and is stored in the RAM 101C in the gaming microcomputer 101 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is forcibly initialized. In this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 101. The reset signal causes the entire control system to be reset.

Next, the input unit 151 of the game control apparatus 100 is provided with a first input port 161 and a second input port 162 as input ports. The input unit 151 includes a first start port switch 120, a second start port switch 121, a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a count switch 124, a magnetic sensor switch 125, a vibration sensor switch 126, and a glass frame open detection switch 127. The detection signal from the front frame opening detection switch 128 is input.
The input unit 151 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 163 that converts detection signals input from these switches 120 to 124 into positive logic signals of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 163 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wires of the proximity switches (the above switches 120 to 124) are improperly shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, An abnormal state such as being disconnected and floating can be detected, and when such an abnormal state is detected, an abnormality detection signal is output. In addition, in order to enable the signal level conversion function as described above, the proximity I / F 163 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. ing.

Here, all the outputs of the proximity I / F 163 (excluding the abnormality detection signal) are supplied to the second input port 162 and read into the game microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153 and relayed from the game control device 100 as the main board. The test firing test apparatus 131 is supplied via the substrate 170.
Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, detection signals of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 are input to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the inverting circuit 112 in addition to the second input port 162. It is configured as follows. The inversion circuit 112 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 is assumed to receive a signal from a micro switch or the like, and is detected with negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

  In addition, detection signals from the magnetic sensor switch 125 and the vibration sensor switch 126 are also input to the second input port 162. The data held in the second input port 162 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE1 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 101 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 162. (Other ports can do the same). The enable signal of the first input port 161 is CE2.

  On the other hand, a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 127 and the front frame opening detection switch 128 and a signal from the dispensing control device 200 are input to the first input port 161. These signals are supplied from the first input port 161 to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. The signals from the payout control device 200 include a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 10 (full).

  Further, the input section 151 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit 164 for inputting a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, a reset signal and the like from the power supply device 500 to the gaming microcomputer 101 and the like. Reference numeral 164 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 500, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once input to the first input port 161 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 101 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 164 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 101 and each port of the output unit 152 (ports 171, 172, 175, which will be described later). 176, 177). Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 170 without passing through the output unit 152, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 170 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows.
Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 170. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the input ports 161 and 162 of the input unit 151. The data set to each port of the output unit 152 by the gaming microcomputer 101 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RST is input, each data of the input unit 151 is reset. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 101 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 101 is reset.

Next, the output unit 152 of the game control device 100 uses the first port 171, the second port 172, the third port 175, the fourth port 176, and the fifth port 177 as output ports connected to the data bus 153. Prepare. Note that data is transmitted from the technique control device 100 to the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 through the ports 171 and 172 by parallel communication.
The first port 171 includes a 4-bit data signal to be output to the payout control device 200 (for example, a prize ball payout command or data), a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating validity / invalidity of the data signal, and a buffer A data strobe signal SSTB to be output to the effect control apparatus 300 via 173 is generated.
Second port 172 generates an 8-bit data signal to be output to effect control device 300.
The buffer 173 prevents the signal from being input to the game control apparatus 100 from the side of the effect control apparatus 300, that is, in order to secure one-way communication, the data strobe signal SSTB and the first output from the first port 171. This is a unidirectional buffer that outputs an 8-bit data signal from the 2-port 172. A similar buffer may be provided for a signal output from the first port 171 to the payout control device 200.

The third port 175 includes opening / closing data of a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 72 for opening / closing the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27 and a solenoid (general power solenoid) 73 for opening / closing the opening / closing member 26a of the second start winning port 26. This is an output port for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 35 is connected.
The fourth port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 35.
The fifth port 177 is an output port for outputting information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal (external information shown in FIG. 4). Note that the information output from the external information terminal board 55 is supplied to, for example, an information collection terminal or management device 140 installed in a game store. Further, the external information terminal board 55 has a built-in photo relay 55a through which the external information, the unique ID of the game control device 100 (main board unique ID), and the unique ID of the payout control device 200 ( The payout unique ID) is transmitted to the management device 140 as an external device. Note that since the photocoupler has polarity, it is necessary to pay attention to the connection. However, if the photorelay 55a is used as described above, there is an advantage that the polarity is unnecessary and it is convenient.
When the card unit 551 determines the validity of the payout unique ID, the payout unique ID is output to the card unit 551 via the external information terminal board 55.

  The output unit 152 is connected to the data bus 153 and outputs data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability status of the jackpot, etc. via the relay board 170. The buffer 174 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 174 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device 100 (main board) of the pachinko machine 1 as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in the game store. Note that the detection signal of the switch that does not need to be processed such as the start port SW output from the proximity I / F 163 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay substrate 170 without passing through the buffer 174.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 125 and the vibration sensor switch 126 that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that control is not possible is supplied from the data bus 153 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 174 and the relay board 170. The relay board 170 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 174 and supplies the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 101 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 170, and the signal of the port that is selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  The output unit 152 includes a plurality of drive circuits (first driver 178a to fourth driver 178d). The first driver 178a receives the opening / closing data signals of the special prize opening solenoid 72 and the general power solenoid 73 output from the third port 175, and generates and outputs respective solenoid driving signals. The second driver 178 b outputs an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 35 output from the third port 175. The third driver 178 c outputs an on / off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 35 output from the fourth port 176. The fourth driver 178d outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth port 177 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 55.

  The first driver 178a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 500 as a power supply voltage so that the solenoids 72 and 73 operating at 32V can be driven. The third driver 178c for driving the segment line is supplied with DC12V. Further, since the second driver 178b for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V. The collective display device 35 has a third driver 178c that outputs 12V, a current is supplied to the anode terminal of the predetermined LED via the segment line, and a cathode terminal of the predetermined LED that is output by the second driver 178b that outputs the ground potential. As a result, current is drawn through the segment line, so that the power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic drive method, and the predetermined LED is turned on. The fourth driver 178d is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.

  Further, the output unit 152 is provided with a photocoupler 179 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 180. The photocoupler 179 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 101 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 180 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, and therefore, ports such as the input ports 161 and 162 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
In the present embodiment, the production control device 300 constitutes default value setting means, production control means, and rewriting means.
The effect control device 300 is a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) in the same manner as the game microcomputer 101, and image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the 1st CPU 311. VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the above and a sound source LSI 313 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 12a and 12b.
Here, in addition to the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311, a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1stCPU 311 is provided, and two CPUs are provided. The VDP receives commands from the 2ndCPU 312. In addition, a configuration in which image processing for video display on the display device 41 is performed in accordance with the data, but in this embodiment, only the 1st CPU 311 with high performance is provided, which is advantageous in terms of arrangement space and cost.
A configuration in which two main control microcomputers (1st CPU) and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1st CPU may be employed.

The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 is connected to a PROM (programmable read only memory) 321 storing a program executed by the CPU and an RTC (real time clock) 325 and a VDP 312.
The RTC 325 is a clock element that clocks time, and can be set to the actual time by setting. The clock signal is sent to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 uses a signal from the RTC 325, for example, Production control related to time, such as event announcements and special productions at amusement stores, is possible.
On the other hand, an image ROM 322 storing character images and video data is connected to the VDP 312, and an audio ROM 323 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 313.
The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the control command (8-bit data signal output from the second port 172) from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control apparatus 100, determines the contents of the effect, and determines the contents of the display device 41. The contents of the output video are instructed, the reproduction sound is instructed to the sound source LSI 313, and the above-described processes such as the drive control of the decoration devices 42 and 43 and the rendering devices 44 and 45 are executed.

For example, when a variation display game is executed, a command (for example, a variation pattern command to be described later) including stop combination (result mode) data and reach system (or variation time) data from the game control device 100. Is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the main control microcomputer 311 that has received this selects the change mode that satisfies the stop mode and the change time, and displays the display device 41 via the VDP 312. It is configured to control a special figure variation display game in which a predetermined special figure is variably displayed and finally a specific symbol combination (result mode) is derived and displayed.
It should be noted that aspects such as special display variation display actually implemented by the control of the effect control device 300 may be uniquely determined by a command from the game control device 100, but the conditions given by the above command In the range, the main control microcomputer 311 of the production control device 300 finally selects a mode by random number extraction or the like (a configuration in which a certain amount of discretion is given to select the mode also in the production control device 300). Yes.

Here, the RAM 311a that provides a work area for the main control microcomputer 311 is provided inside the chip. The RAM 311a that provides the work area may be provided outside the chip.
Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 313 in a serial manner, and data between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 is obtained in a parallel manner. Are transmitted and received. In general, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission by transmitting and receiving data in parallel.
The VDP 312 includes an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) 312a used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 322, and a scaler for enlarging and reducing images. 312b, a signal conversion circuit 312c that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) system, and the like are provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the lamps provided on the glass frame 5 and the game board 20. In addition, the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive an interrupt signal INT0-n and a command or data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT for notification is input. Also, between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 313, a call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged in order to transmit and receive commands and data by the handshake method.

In addition, the effect control device 300 has an interface chip (command I / F) that receives a command (8-bit data signal output from the second port 172) transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100. 331 is provided. Via this command I / F 331, control commands from the gaming microcomputer 101, such as decoration special figure holding number command, special figure type / design information command, variation pattern random number command, customer waiting demonstration command, variation pattern command, and The main control microcomputer 311 receives a fanfare command or the like.
Note that the command transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 is stored in the RAM 311a which is built in the main control microcomputer 311 and provides a work area as necessary.
In this case, the command is stored in an area such as a command storage area of the RAM 311a. Specifically, for example, when a variation pattern command and a symbol command to be paired are sequentially transmitted among the commands sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, these commands are command storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 311a. Are sequentially stored and read from the command storage area when the set is established, and the main control microcomputer 311 executes the effect process. The command storage area may be divided into a first command storage area and a second command storage area.
In addition, when the variation pattern command sent first is received, the effect control device 300 sets the storage area related to the effect in the RAM 311a of the main control microcomputer 311 to a default value (for example, the symbol stopped state with the off symbol). Is to be done.
The “storage area related to the effect” is an area for setting a default value and is separate from the command storage area.
Since the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 42, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling the LEDs of the frame decoration device 43, and the panel. A board effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a motor and a solenoid of the effect device 44, and a frame effect motor control circuit 335 for driving and controlling a motor (for example, a motor for operating the moving light 14) of the frame effect device 45 described above. Is provided. These control circuits 332 to 335 are connected to a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a light emission source other than the LED may be used as the light emission source of the panel decoration device 42 or the frame decoration device 43.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, the effect button SW46 built in the effect button 9 provided on the glass frame 5 and the on / off state of the effect motor SW47 that detects the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44 are displayed. SW input circuit 336 for detecting the signal and inputting a detection signal to main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311; amplifier circuit 337a including an audio power amplifier for driving upper speaker 12a provided on glass frame 5; An amplifier circuit 337b for driving the provided lower speaker 12b is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 501 of the power supply device 500 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled thereby, in order to drive a motor and a solenoid. In addition to DC12V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V serving as the power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, DC18V for driving the LED and the speakers 12a and 12b, and direct current voltages thereof. It is configured so as to generate a voltage of NDC 24V that is used to turn on the power monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311, DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V is generated based on DC 5 V. The DC-DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 501.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312, the tone generator LSI 313, the control circuits 332 to 335, and the amplifier circuits 337 a and 337 b, and these are reset. To. In this embodiment, the general-purpose port of the main control microcomputer 311 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 312. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 is provided with a wireless module 360, and the wireless module 360 includes a CPU 360a, a ROM 360b, and a RAM 360c. The wireless module 360 is supplied with predetermined power from the power supply device 500.
The wireless module 360 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 and wirelessly communicates between its own gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) and another gaming machine 370 according to a command from the main control microcomputer 311 (intersub communication described later). ) And exchange information on the state of each other's gaming machine through the communication, control the transmission and exchange of images and characters, and synchronize images and characters that are mutually related to the display device of each gaming machine Or it is a communication module for performing the cooperation production displayed while synchronizing. The CPU 360a performs processing such as wireless communication control, image and character transmission, the ROM 360b stores a program executed by the CPU 360a, and the RAM 360c is used as a work area.

The setting switch 371 is arranged at a different gaming machine number (for example, one gaming island) for each gaming machine so that a transmission source or a transmission destination gaming machine can be specified when exchanging data between a plurality of gaming machines. If there are ten gaming machines, No. 1 to 10 (n is assumed to be n for n machines) in order from the left can be operated by an attendant of the gaming shop. For example, the setting switch can display the same image or character on all gaming machines arranged on the island by the above-mentioned communication between subs, or display images or characters that are related to each other while being synchronized or synchronized. It is possible by the operation of 371. Further, by using the above-mentioned gaming machine number (terminal ID), it is possible to perform the effect only between two specific gaming machines.
The gaming machine number may be defined based on, for example, the unique ID set in the wireless module. In this case, the value of the unique ID of the wireless module is almost random, so that the arrangement of gaming machines is specified. If you want to produce an effect such as a group notice flowing in order from the leftmost gaming machine on the island, it is a master gaming machine or management device to manage the location information of each gaming machine It will be necessary to provide this, which takes time.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the stage can be specified and performed by manual setting by the setting switch 371 that can simply specify the game machines on the island in order, so that anyone can easily operate the stage. Can be controlled easily.
Further, the setting switch 371 may be used not for setting location information but for setting the control contents of the wireless module 360 in a plurality of stages and switching the selection according to the business form of the amusement store.

  In the case of this example, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to the sub control board. As described above, the effect control device 300 (sub control board) that controls the display device 41 controls the speaker, the lamps, the movable part for decoration, and the like, which will be described later, constituting the game control device 100. The main board indirectly controls the movable part and the like by sending a control command to the sub-control board. For this reason, the hardware configuration such as the wiring pattern of the main board is basically the same regardless of the model, and technically, the main board is modeled by installing a game program for each model in the microcomputer 101 for gaming machines. It can be shared even if the brand is different.

Next, the configuration of a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
The VDP 312 includes a CPU I / F 601, a data transfer circuit 602, a CG bus I / F 603, a compressed data decompression circuit 604, a drawing circuit 605, a first VRAM 606, a second VRAM 607, and a display circuit 608. Necessary circuits are connected to each other via the H.611.
The VDP 312 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control apparatus 300 via the CPU I / F 601 and is connected to the image ROM 322 via the CG bus I / F 603. The VDP 312 basically generates image data for each frame to be displayed on the display device 41 in accordance with an instruction from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 and outputs the image data to the display circuit 608 and the display device 42. The first VRAM 606 is mainly used as a RAM for a frame buffer, specifically, for example, a RAM for a frame buffer or a Z buffer (in the case of three dimensions, the amount in the Z-axis direction). On the other hand, the second VRAM 607 is mainly used as a drawing material RAM for storing material data.

Data in the image ROM 322 is stored in the second VRAM 607 via the CG bus I / F 603. The compressed data is decompressed by the compressed data decompression circuit 604, stored in the second VRAM 607, and also stored in the first VRAM 606 as necessary.
The drawing circuit 605 mainly processes the drawing material stored in the second VRAM 607 (for example, processing of various effects, enlargement, reduction, etc.), and the display position and order (for example, from the back of the screen to the front). Display order, etc.), image data of one frame is created and stored in the first VRAM 606.

The display circuit 608 includes a scaler 608a and an LVDSI / F 608b.
Then, the display circuit 608 converts the image data of one frame stored in the first VRAM 606 to the LVDS specification signal level at the setting timing of the interless mode or the non-interlace mode, and outputs the RGB data to the display device 41. Note that the display area of the image data can be enlarged (for example, VGA → XGA) and displayed by the scaler 608a. For example, in the case of VGA, the image size is 640 × 480, and in the case of XGA, the image size is 1024 × 768.
The data transfer circuit 602 has data transfer functions such as between the main control microcomputer 311 and the first VRAM 606, between the main control microcomputer 311 to the drawing circuit 605, and between the CG bus I / F 603 and the first VRAM 606.

E. Outline of Game Next, an outline of a game performed in the pachinko machine 1 of this example and a flow of the game will be described.
First, at the beginning of the game (or before the start of the game), the customer is in a waiting state (during demonstration), and a command for instructing the display of the waiting screen for the customer is a buffer (for example, the same) 5 corresponds to the buffer 173 in FIG. 5), and is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a customer waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed on the display unit 41 a of the display device.

  When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 22 through the guide rail 21 wins the special winning start winning opening 25 or 26 (that is, when there is a special winning start winning), the fluctuation display of the special figure Is sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and a display (so-called variable display) in which a special figure (including numbers, characters, symbols, patterns, etc.) fluctuates (for example, scrolls) on the display unit 41a. ) Is performed, and a special figure variation display game (hereinafter referred to as a special figure variation display game) is performed.

And if the stop result mode of this variable display game (the combination of special figures derived by the variable display) is a special result mode (for example, “3, 3, 3”, etc.), a privilege called a big hit is given. It is given to the player. In terms of control, for example, a value such as a big hit random number is extracted and stored on the condition that there has been a start prize, and this extracted and stored random number value is compared with a predetermined determination value at the time of determination. Based on the comparison determination result, whether or not to make a big hit is determined in advance, and the variable display game is started in response to this determination.
Further, in the normal mode, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode of the special result mode (for example, “7, 7, 7”), it will be a big hit and after the big hit game The game state shifts from the normal mode to the probability change mode (after a special prize period to be described later). In this probability variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the special figure big hit probability). In some cases, so-called time reduction (which shortens the variable display time for special drawings or the like to increase the frequency of the variable display game and make it easier to win) is also performed.

  When the jackpot is reached and the jackpot state is reached, a fanfare period (a period in which an output of a sound effect that produces a jackpot is executed) is passed, and the jackpot of the variable prize winning device 27 is set for a predetermined time (for example, In the range not exceeding 30 seconds), for example, an opening operation (a jackpot round) that is temporarily opened for a period of up to 10 winnings is performed. This release operation is repeated for a specified number of rounds. In this big hit state, a command for instructing display of a big hit screen for producing a big hit state or informing the player of the number of big hit rounds is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, and the display unit In 41a, such a big hit display is executed.

The period in which the jackpot is in effect (the fanfare period, the period of the jackpot round in which the jackpot is open, the interval period between the jackpot round and the next jackpot round, and the ending period) are the special prize period. It corresponds to.
In addition, as the number of rounds of the big hit, for example, a big hit of 15 rounds is usually the main big hit, but a configuration that generates a 16R big hit as a premier or other configurations may be used. Further, there may be a two-round big hit or the like as a so-called abruptness (a sudden probability change in which the big hit probability changes via a big hit with few balls).

In addition, when a game ball is further won in the start winning opening 25 or 26 during the above-described special figure variable display game or big hit, the special display start memory is displayed on the display unit 41a and the like, for example, four are displayed. After the change display game or the big hit state is finished, the special display change display game is repeated or returned to the customer waiting state based on the start memory.
That is, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, the game shifts to a big hit state, and if the variable display game ends with a start and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again, and the variable display game ends with a start and no start memory is stored. If the big hit ends and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again. If the big hit ends and there is no start memory, the flow returns to the customer wait state.

In this embodiment, for example, two types of special chart start memory (special map start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display). A variation display game (a first variation display game and a second variation display game) is executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening 25 occurs, the display device 41 plays the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1. When a game ball wins the first start winning opening 25 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one first start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 1 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41 after the special figure fluctuation display game is finished.
Further, when there is a special figure start prize (second start prize) due to the game ball entering the second start prize opening 26, the display device 41 plays the second variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 2. When a game ball wins the second start winning opening 26 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one second start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 2 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the second variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 41 after the above special figure fluctuation display game ends.
When both the first start memory and the second start memory are present, either the first variation display game or the second variation display game is executed first in accordance with a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variable display game corresponding to the second start winning opening 26 is preferentially performed (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially consumed) or two types of variable display games are alternately displayed. There may be a mode to be performed.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the usual figure start gate 32 during the game, a usual figure change display game (hereinafter, referred to as a usual figure change display game) is played by the display part 41a or the like. . And if this normal map change display game result (stopped general chart) is a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a privilege called per map is granted.
At this time, a game is held in which the pair of opening / closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 is temporarily held in an open state where the pair of opening / closing members 26a is opened in a reverse C-shape. This makes it easier for the game ball to start and win, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases and the possibility of winning a big hit increases.
Further, during the above-mentioned variable display game, when a game ball is further won in the general chart start gate 32, the collective display device 35 performs a hold display of the general chart start memory and stores, for example, up to four, After the usual variable display game is over, the usual variable display game is repeated based on the memory.

Next, the external output of the unique ID will be outlined. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or the system is reset, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 (for example, stored in the HW parameter ROM) is read out. The serial communication format (or parallel communication format may be used) by the operation of the game program is relayed by the external information terminal board 55 and transmitted to the external management device 140 (or the card unit 551 may be included). . As a result, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 can be sent to the gaming store side.
The unique ID is transferred to the outside (in this case, the inspection apparatus connection terminal 102 in FIG. 4) in response to a request from the outside. Then, for example, by connecting the inspection device to the inspection device connection terminal 102, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 is read out by the inspection organization.
On the other hand, the payout unique ID (payout individual identification information) that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 of the payout control device 200 is made into a serial communication format (or a parallel communication format) by the payout control device 200 by the operation of the payout program. Then, it is relayed by the external information terminal board 55 and transmitted to the external management device 140 (or the card unit 551 may be included). As a result, the payout unique ID stored in the payout microcomputer 201 can be sent to the game store side.

Next, the commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 will be briefly described. When a variable display game is executed, the combination of stop symbols (result mode) from the game control device 100 and reach A command (for example, a variation pattern command to be described later) including system (or variation time) data is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 selects a variation mode that satisfies the stop mode and the variation time. Then, a special figure variable display game is controlled in which a predetermined special figure is displayed in a variable manner on the display device 41, and finally a specific symbol combination (result mode) is derived and displayed.
In this case, among the commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, there is a command that does not start the effect alone and exerts an effect as a set. For example, the “variation pattern command + There is a “designation command”.

At this time, if a part of the command that is paired at the start of symbol variation is missed by noise or the like, the normal symbol cannot be displayed. Therefore, when the command received first is received, Processing for setting a default value in a memory area (in this case, a storage area related to effects) related to symbol variation in the RAM 311a of the control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 is performed. Therefore, when a command is missed, a default value (for example, a symbol stop state with an outlier symbol) is adopted at the time of detection, and a corresponding effect (for example, fluctuation stop with an out symbol symbol) is performed, At the very least, it is possible to prevent unexpected troubles such as stopping at the big hit symbol, even though it is originally off.
After that, when the command set is normally transmitted to the effect control device 300 (the set is established), the command information is rewritten to regular information, and the correct effect is executed.

F. Operation of Control System Next, the control contents of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
First, it is as follows when the concept of the main structure used for description of the following flowcharts is clarified.
As described above, the special display and the normal map are displayed on the collective display device 35. The special figure in the following description of the control processing means this special figure (this special figure), and will be described in detail on the basis of the above. Note that the special drawing controlled by the production control device 300 based on the command from the game control device 100 is a special drawing for production displayed on the display device 41.
(A) Special figure display device In the following flow chart, the special figure refers to the “main special figure” displayed on the collective display device 35. Further, when referring to the dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is called "decorative drawing".
In this way, the device for displaying the special figure is the collective display device 35, but the names of the areas for displaying the special figure in the collective display device 35 include, for example, a special symbol display device and a special figure display device. In order to distinguish it from a general-purpose display device, it may be called a special symbol display device.
(B) General-purpose display device In the following flow chart, the general-purpose display refers to the “general-purpose map” displayed on the collective display device 35. Further, when referring to the direction of the dummy display for the player displayed on the display device 41, for example, it is referred to as “decorative map”.
In this way, the device for displaying the universal map is the collective display device 35, but the names of the areas for displaying the regular map in the collective display device 35 include, for example, a normal symbol display device and a universal map display device. In order to distinguish from a special figure display device, it may be called a normal symbol display device.
However, in this embodiment, the display device 41 does not display such a general-purpose display. In addition, you may provide the indicator which displays a common figure (here a decoration common figure) display. In describing a gaming machine, a device that displays a “decorative map” may be described if necessary.
(C) Fudenden A device corresponding to Fudenden is the second start winning opening 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (Fudenden).
However, there are cases where ordinary electric power is referred to as an ordinary variable winning device, and in the description of the flowchart, for example, an ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 26) may be used.
In addition, for example, at the time of high probability or when the time is short, the start winning is supported by the opening / closing member 26a of the second start winning opening 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power). There is simply a “Fujiden Support”.
(D) Special figure storage In the following flowchart, in the case of special figure hold (sometimes simply referred to as “hold”), special figure storage, or special figure start-up storage, It points towards “Figure Memory”. In addition, when referring to the dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as "decoration special figure hold" or "decoration special figure storage".
The winning winning ports that function as the starting winning ports for the special figure are the starting winning ports 25 and 26.
(E) Universal map memory In the following flowchart, the general map hold, the universal map memory, or the general chart start memory indicates the “general map memory” displayed on the collective display device 35. Further, when referring to the direction of the dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as “decoration map drawing hold” or “decoration map drawing storage”.
However, in this embodiment, such a usual start-up storage display is not displayed on the display device 41. In addition, you may provide the indicator which performs the starting memory | storage (in this case, the decoration common memory) display. In the description of the gaming machine, if necessary, it may be described including a device that displays “decorative map memory”.
(F) Variable winning device The variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 27b. The variable winning device 27 is sometimes referred to as a special variable winning device in order to be distinguished from the normal variable winning device.

[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main process of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main process starts based on the fact that the gaming microcomputer 101 is forcibly reset. That is, when a power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 500 is turned on, a reset signal is sent from the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 is turned on and then the reset signal is released, the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated. When the power is restored from a power failure, the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated after the reset signal is turned on and released. Further, when the worker wants to initialize the user work RAM or the like of the game control device 100, the power switch is turned on while turning on the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) of the power supply device 500. There is a need.

When the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated, first, a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then an interrupt vector setting process (step S2) for setting a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs. When this occurs, stack pointer setting processing (step S3) for setting the stack pointer, which is the top address of the area in which the value of the register or the like is saved, and interrupt mode setting processing (step S4) for setting the interrupt processing mode are sequentially performed. .
Next, in step S5, the process is stopped for a predetermined delay time (for example, 4 msec) in order to wait for the program of the payout board (the payout control apparatus 200) to start normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 rises first and sends the command to the payout control device 200 before the payout control device 200 starts up, thereby avoiding the payout control device 200 from losing the command. be able to.

When the delay time elapses, access to the RWM (read / write memory) is permitted, and then an off signal (a signal corresponding to a binary signal “0”: that is, a state in which there is no output) is output to all output ports. (Steps S6 and S7).
Here, in this embodiment, the RWM indicates the RAM 101C. However, the RWM is not limited to the RAM, and a read / write storage element such as an EEPROM may be used as the RWM.
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step S7 is provided here just in case. .
Subsequently, in step S8, a serial port ((port preinstalled in the gaming microcomputer 101) is not used because parallel communication is performed with the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 in this embodiment). Process to set to the state that does not.
Here, the serial port is not used because the serial port is used when the unique ID is output to the outside (for example, the management device 140). It is. In some cases, it may be necessary to perform serial communication with the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300. In this case, the serial port is set to be used in step S8.

Next, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch in the power supply device 500 is turned on (step S9). This is to determine whether or not the initialization switch is turned on according to the state of the initialization switch signal. If the initialization switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S25, and if not, the process proceeds to step S10.
The process proceeds to step S25 when the initialization switch is turned on and the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated, all of the power outage inspection area 1 and the outage inspection area 2 of the RWM are performed in steps S11 and S13, which will be described later. This is a case where it is determined that the checksum is not normal, or a case where it is determined that the checksum is not normal in step S16 which will be described later. For this reason, when the processing proceeds to step S25, processing such as initialization of data (excluding the access-prohibited area) in the RWM of the gaming microcomputer 101 is performed.

If the initialization switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S10 to check whether the value of the power outage inspection area 1 of the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data 1, and if the check result is not normal in step S11 If it judges, it will jump to Step S25. On the other hand, if the check result in step S11 is normal, it is checked in subsequent step S12 whether or not the value of the power outage inspection area 2 of the RWM is normal. If the check result is not normal in step S13, the process jumps to step S25. If the check result is normal, the process proceeds to step S14.
Thus, if the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are all normal, it is determined that the power failure has been restored and the process proceeds to step S14. On the other hand, if the values of the power outage inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are abnormal (if they are not stored normally), the routine jumps to step S25 assuming that the power is normally turned on.
The power failure inspection area check data 1 and 2 are set in step S25 described later. In these steps S10 and S12, since it is determined whether or not the power failure is restored by using the plurality of check data 1 and 2, the determination as to whether or not the power failure is restored is made with high reliability.

Next, in step S14, the RWM data checksum is calculated, and in step S15, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether or not the value is normal (match) (step S16). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the RWM data is corrupted), the process proceeds to step S25, and if the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S17.
In step S17, all the power outage inspection areas are cleared, in step S18, the checksum area is cleared, and in step S19, areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. In this way, the process (initial value setting) for power failure recovery is executed.

Next, an area for storing the gaming state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step S20). If it is determined that the probability is not high (step S20; NO), steps S21 and S22 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S23.
If it is determined in step S20 that the probability is high (step S20; YES), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area in step S21, and the high probability provided in the collective display device 35 in step S22, for example. On data of the notification LED (not shown) is saved in the segment area. As a result, the treatment corresponding to the current high probability state is performed. For example, the high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 35 is turned on to display the high probability state.
In step S23, a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) corresponding to the special figure game process number is transmitted. After step S23, the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S9, S11, S13, S16 to step S25, first, all work areas before the access prohibited area in the RWM used by the CPU are cleared (step S25), and then the contents in the RWM are cleared. All work areas after the access-prohibited area are cleared (step S26), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step S27). Then, an output timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) of external information (security signal) relating to RWM clear is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S28). Further, a process for transmitting a power-on command (power-on command) to the effect control device 300 is performed (step S29).
When the power-on command is transmitted, the other control device receives this power-on command and performs initialization such as setting the operation position of the motor of the frame effect device to the initial position in the case of the effect control device 300, for example. Then, the effect of notifying that the RWM has been cleared is started. After step S29, the process proceeds to step S24.

Now, if it progresses to step S24 from the above-mentioned step S23 or step S29, in step S24, CTC (Counter / Timer which generates the timer interruption signal and random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 101 (clock generator). Circuit) Starts the circuit.
The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 101. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113 and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 101A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S24, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S30). Specifically, the CPU 101A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Then, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number) 2) As an initial value (start value) of a random number (winning random number) for determining the hit of the usual figure, it is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S31).
This random number generation circuit generates a part of each special figure or ordinary random number in hardware. However, the initial values of these random numbers are set in software by the processing in step S33 described later. The random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as an initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. ), It is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.
Note that the random numbers related to the special figure include jackpot random numbers (random numbers for determining whether to win or not), jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), fluctuation pattern random numbers (Lee's) Random number for determining a variation pattern including presence / absence), stop symbol random number (random number for determining outlier stop symbol), and the like. In addition, examples of random numbers related to ordinary maps include random numbers per ordinary figure (random numbers for determining whether or not per ordinary figure). Among these, the random numbers (hard random numbers) targeted in steps S30 and S33 are, for example, jackpot random numbers, random numbers per common figure, and jackpot symbol random numbers 1 and 2. Note that the random numbers related to the special figure may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 when there are two types of special figures, or may be provided separately.

Next, an interrupt is permitted in step S32, and an initial value random number update process is performed in the next step S33. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the initial value of the hard random number so that it is difficult to deliberately aim for a big hit or the like by timing the game ball. This is for breaking the regularity of random numbers by updating the values of various initial value random numbers.
Note that the initial value random number update process in step S33 includes a method of performing an initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of value random number update processing, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to disable interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the initial value random number update process is not performed. If it is only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, thereby simplifying the main process. There is an advantage that
Next, in step S34, the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (for example, twice) is set, and in the next step S35, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. In step S36, if it is not turned on, the process returns to step S33. During normal operation, steps S33 to S35 are repeated.

Then, when proceeding to step S36, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of times of the check. If the result is negative, it is determined that a power failure has occurred and the process returns to step S35.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, this power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the processing being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step S37. However, with the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and momentarily due to noise even though no power failure has actually occurred since the power failure monitoring signal is checked for multiple times in step S36. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

In step S37, interrupts are prohibited, and then all outputs are turned off in the next step S38 (off data is output to all output ports). Next, power failure information setting processing is executed in steps S39 and S40. To do. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 in step S39, and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 in step S40.
After step S40, a checksum is calculated in the next step S41 when the RWM is turned off, and the checksum calculated in step S42 is saved in a predetermined checksum area.
Next, in step S43, access to the RWM is prohibited and then waiting (becomes a reset waiting state waiting for a reset signal from the control signal generation unit 503 described above).
In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure recovery inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutdown is calculated, so that whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up can be checked. This can be determined when the power is turned on again.
In addition, the power failure process of the above steps S37 to S43 is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the gaming microcomputer 101 due to the power failure.

[Checksum calculation processing]
Next, the checksum calculation process (step S41) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address in step S51, and the number of repetitions is set in step S52. The number of repetitions is set corresponding to the number of bytes of the RWM being used. Next, after setting “0” as the calculated value in step S53, the content of the calculated value + the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value in step S54. In this way, the contents of each address are added as a calculated value. Next, the calculation address is updated by “+1” in step S55, the number of repetitions is updated by “−1” in step S56, and it is checked whether the calculation is completed. In step S57, it is determined whether the calculation is completed. If the decision result in the step S57 is NO, the process returns to the step S54 to repeat the routine. When the number of repetitions is equal to the number of bytes of RWM, it is determined that the calculation has been completed, the process returns to YES from step S57, and the routine is terminated.
In this way, the checksum is calculated when the RWM is powered off.

[Initial value random number update processing]
Next, the initial value random number update process (step S33) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the hit initial value random number (step S61), a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 (step S62), a jackpot symbol A process (step S63) of incrementing (update (+1)) the initial value random number 2 is sequentially performed.
Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number 1” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number for determining the big hit stop symbol of the special figure 1 and is updated in the range of 0 to 200. The “big hit symbol initial value random number 2” is an initial value random number of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure 2 and is updated in the range of 0 to 200. is there. The “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the usual game, and is updated in the range of 0 to 250. is there. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be increased by continuing to increment the random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIG.
This timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps S24 and S32 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt cycle.

In this timer interrupt process, first, in step S71, register saving and interrupt prohibition are executed as necessary. In register saving, for example, register saving processing is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is transferred to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register.
Next, input processing is executed in step S72. In this input process, the detection signals of the above-described sensors (start port switches 120 and 121, gate switch 122, winning port switch 123, count switch 124, etc.) are read. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for the specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. When it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.

Next, in step S73, output processing for setting and outputting the output data set in each step to be described later to the corresponding output port is executed, and then in step S74, each set control device (effect control device 300, Processing for transmitting a signal (command) to the payout control device 200) (command transmission processing) is executed.
Thereafter, in steps S75 and S76, random number update processes 1 and 2 are executed, respectively. Here, the soft random number related to the special drawing and the soft random number related to the general drawing are updated. As soft random numbers related to special figures, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), variation pattern random numbers (random numbers for determining variation patterns including presence / absence of reach action), stop symbol random numbers ( Random numbers for determining outage stop symbols). Here, the update of the random number is executed by increasing the random number by, for example, “1”. Therefore, each time this timer interrupt processing routine is repeated, the random number changes, and the extracted value of the soft random number maintains at randomness.

  Note that there are three types of variation pattern random numbers in the present example: variation pattern random numbers 1-3. Among these, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the second half fluctuation (the fluctuation after the start of reach), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a detailed presentation distribution (for example, plus one frame) from the reach system. The special pattern stops or the special figure stops at minus one frame), and the variation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the first half variation (variation before the start of reach). is there. In addition, the variation pattern random number may directly determine all the variation modes, but in this example, the effect control device 300 determines a specific mode. For example, only the variation time and the reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the variation pattern random number 1, and the production control device 300 determines a specific variation mode based on the determined variation time and reach system.

  Next, in step S77, winning prize switch monitoring processing and error monitoring processing are executed. The winning opening switch monitoring process monitors the input flags (start opening switches 120 and 121, winning opening switch 123, and count switch 124 in the special figure) set as described above, for example, the input flag of the count switch 124 is set. If so, processing such as preparation for requesting the payout control device 200 to pay out 15 prize balls is executed. In addition, the error monitoring process includes an undetected error of each of the above-described sensors, an excessive error of the winning ball discharge, an open state of the glass frame 5, and an illegal winning except when the large winning opening 27a and the public power supply 26 are not open. It is a process for monitoring.

Next, in step S78, special figure game processing is performed. In the special figure game process, overall control of the special figure variable display game is performed. That is, when the change start condition (start condition of the change display game) is satisfied, the determination of the big hit random number, the process of setting the combination of the special symbol stop pattern (result mode), and the process of setting the special figure change mode (Details will be described later).
Here, when the change start condition is satisfied, when the start-up prize is received in the waiting state and the change display game is started, the change display game ends and the start display is stored and the change display game is executed again. When the game is played, there are three types when the jackpot is over, the start-up memory is stored, and the variable display game is executed again.
In this special figure game process, a process of setting various output data related to the special figure variable display game is also performed. That is, the content (command data) of a command to be transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 300 is set in accordance with the game state of the special display variable display game.

Next, in step S79, processing for the usual variable display game is performed. That is, processing for setting the content of a command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 or the like according to the state of the usual variable display game is performed.
Next, in step S80, segment LED editing processing is executed. This is the display of the special figure on the collective display device 35, such as the special figure decided in the special figure game process in step S78, the special figure decided in the common figure game process in step S79, and other information. This is a process for displaying on a display (LED, 7-segment display).
Next, in step S81, a magnet fraud monitoring process is executed. This is to check whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signals from the magnetic sensor switch 125 and the vibration sensor switch 126. For example, if the input flag of the magnetic sensor switch 125 is set, a magnetic error occurs. As a result, predetermined processing (such as transmission of an error notification command) is executed.

Next, in step S82, external information editing processing is executed. This is to edit data to be output from the game control apparatus 100 to the outside. This data is output data to the payout control device 200 and the external information terminal board 55 (including a unique ID in addition to a jackpot signal, a prize ball signal, etc.).
Thereafter, in order to resume the main routine, the timer interrupt request is cleared in step S83, the saved register is restored in step S84, the interrupt is permitted in step S85, and the process is interrupted (return). )

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input processing, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 161 is read (step S91). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (step S92).
Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S93). Thereafter, in step S94, a parameter for reading the state of the signal taken into the input port 2, that is, the second input port 162 is prepared, and then the process proceeds to the switch reading process (step S95). Here, “preparation” in this embodiment means setting a value in a register, but is not limited thereto, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

[Switch read processing]
Next, the switch reading process (step S95) in the above input process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the switch reading process, the state of the signal taken into the input port designated by the parameter prepared in the previous step S94, that is, the second input port 162 is read (step S101). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S102). Subsequently, the read state of the input port 2 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 2 in the RWM (step S103). Then, it waits for a delay time (for example, 0.1 ms) until the second reading (step S104).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the second input port 162 is performed (step S105). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S106). Subsequently, the read state of the input port 2 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 2 (step S107). Then, a bit that has changed in the first and second readings, that is, a signal is detected, and a definite bit pattern is created (step S108). Specifically, among the read states of the input port 2, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is “1” and the different bit is “0” in the first and second times.

Next, the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 (the state of the input port 2) is calculated to obtain the present definite bit (step S109). Next, an indeterminate bit pattern is created in which the same bit is “0” and the different bit is “1” in the first and second states of the input port 2 that has been read (step S110). Next, the logical product of the unconfirmed bit pattern and the finalized state at the time of the previous interrupt is calculated and used as the previous retained bit (step S111). Thereafter, the current confirmed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved in the RWM as the current confirmed state (step S112). Also, an exclusive logical sum of the current state and the previous finalized state is taken and saved as a rising edge in the RWM, and the switch reading process is terminated (step S113).
When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. Also, since the input pulse of the switch must be held for more than twice the timer interrupt cycle by simple calculation, the design of the electric circuit that extends the pulse and the speed of the game ball passing through the switch are slowed down. It is necessary to design the structure of the spherical channel.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the processable amount in the interrupt by extending the timer interrupt period by performing the switch read process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference. It is possible to achieve both the increase and the ease of structural design and avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, output processing (step S73) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the output process, all output data of the port 176 (see FIG. 5) for outputting the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 35 is first turned off (step S121). Subsequently, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 35 is updated (updated (+1) in the range of 0 to 3) (step S122), and corresponds to the value of the digit counter. LED digit line output data is loaded (step S123). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid / test terminal / digit data output port 175 (see FIG. 5) is synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the solenoid / test terminal / digit data output port 175 (step 175). S124).
Thereafter, the segment line output data is acquired from the segment data area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S125), and the acquired segment output data is output to the segment output port 176 (step S126).

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 55 is loaded and synthesized, and output to the external information output port 177 (step S127). Next, the output data 1 to 3 of the test signal output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is outputted to the test terminal output port 1 provided on the relay board 170 (step S128). Thereafter, the test signal output data 4 to 6 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 provided on the relay board 170 (step S129).
Next, the test signal output data 7 to 8 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 provided on the relay board 170 (step S130). Also, the test signal output data 9 to 10 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 provided on the relay board 170 (step S131). Further, the output data 11 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is outputted to the test terminal output port 5 provided on the relay board 170 (step S132). End the output process.

[Command transmission processing]
Next, the command transmission process (step S74) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The command transmission process includes an effect control command transmission process (step S141) for the effect control device 300 and a payout command transmission process (step S142) for the payout control device 200. Details of these will be described later.

[Direction control command transmission processing]
First, the effect control command transmission process (step S141) in the command transmission process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the production control command transmission process, first, the value of the write counter that is “+1” when the transmission command is set to RWM is compared with the value of the read counter that is “+1” when the transmission command is read from the RWM. Then, it is checked whether the command is set (step S151). Specifically, if the value of the write counter and the value of the read counter are the same, it is determined that there is no setting command. If the value of the write counter does not match the value of the read counter, an unsent command Is set (step S152).

  If it is determined in step S152 that there is no setting command (step S152; NO), the effect control command transmission process is skipped, and a command is set in step S152 (step S152; YES). If it is determined, the read counter is updated (+1) in the next step S153. Then, the command is loaded from the command transmission area (MODE (upper byte)) corresponding to the value of the read counter (step S154). Then, the area containing the acquired command is reset (step S155). Further, the command is loaded from the command transmission area (ACTION (lower byte)) corresponding to the value of the read counter (step S156). Then, the area containing the acquired command is reset (step S157). Thereafter, the process proceeds to an effect control command output process (step S158).

[Direction control command output processing]
Next, the effect control command output process (step S158) in the effect control command transmission process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the effect control command output process, first, an off time of the strobe signal indicating that the effect control command (MODE) is being output is prepared (step S161), and the command data output process (step S162) is executed. Thereafter, an effect control command (ACTION) is output (step S163), a strobe signal OFF time indicating that the effect control command (ACTION) is being output is prepared (step S164), and then a command data output process (step S165) is performed. Run.

[Command data output processing]
Next, command data output processing (steps S162 and S165) in the above-described effect control command output processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the command data output process, first, in order to prevent the state immediately before the port from being lost, the port state holding data of the output port 171 including the strobe signal of the effect control command output is loaded (step S171). Then, an effect control command is output to the output port 172 (step S172), and a signal excluding the strobe signal is held in the previous state to the output port 171, and the strobe signal in the off state (for example, low level indicating invalidity of data reading). Is output (that is, the strobe in the OFF state is output) (step S173). Then, in the next step S174, it is determined whether or not the time for turning off the strobe signal (off time: strobe OFF period) has ended. If it is determined that the off time has not ended (step S174; NO), the process returns to step S172 to repeat the above process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S174 that the off time has expired (step S174; YES), the process proceeds to step S175, where the strobe signal is turned on (for example, a high level indicating that data reading is valid) (ie, the strobe is set). Set ON time). Subsequently, an effect control command is output (step S176), and on the register holding the loaded data, the strobe signal of the output port 171 other than the strobe signal of the output port 171 is held in the previous state, and the strobe in the on state (high level). A signal is output (that is, the strobe in the ON state is output) (step S177).
Then, in the next step S178, it is determined whether or not the time for turning on the strobe signal (on time: strobe ON period) has ended. If it is determined that the on-time has not ended (step S178; NO), the process returns to step S176 and the above process is repeated. If it is determined in step S178 that the on-time has ended (step S178; YES), the process proceeds to step S179, and the signal excluding the strobe signal of the output port 171 is set to the previous state on the register holding the loaded data. The off-state strobe signal is set with the output held, and then the off-state strobe signal is output (off-state strobe output) (step S179), and the command data output processing is terminated.
The reason why the effect control command is output again in step S176 is to prevent the effect control command being output from being output after recovery from the power failure when a power failure occurs during the loop processing in steps S176 to S178. Because. It is also possible to avoid changing the command code due to noise. In addition, it is also possible to loop only each process in this step S174 and step S178.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S142) in the command transmission process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count number other than “0” in the winning number counter area provided for each winning opening (step S181). If it is determined that there is no count number (step S182; NO), the process proceeds to step S183, where the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated, and the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas are checked. Whether or not has been completed is determined (step S184). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S184; YES), the command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S184 that all checks have not been completed (step S184; NO), the process returns to step S181 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step S182 that there is a count number (step S182; YES), the process proceeds to step S185, and the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1). Thereafter, a payout command (negative logic data) corresponding to a winning number counter area, that is, a winning opening is acquired (step S186). Then, an off time (strobe OFF time) of the strobe signal indicating whether data reading is valid or invalid (for example, a time for maintaining the low level) is set (step S187). In the next step S188, the payout command (negative logic data) acquired in step S186 and the strobe signal in the off state (low level) are output to the port 171 (see FIG. 5).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the OFF time set in step S187 has elapsed (step S189). If it has not elapsed (step S189; NO), the process returns to step S188, and if it has elapsed (step S189; YES). Then, the process proceeds to step S190. In step S190, the strobe signal is set to an on state (high level) and the remaining output time of negative logic data is set.
In the next step S191, the payout command (negative logic data) is continuously output and the on-state (high level) strobe signal is output to the port 171. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the remaining output time of the negative logic data set in step S190 has elapsed (step S192). If it has not elapsed (step S192; NO), the process returns to step S191, and if it has elapsed (step S192) In step S192; YES, the process proceeds to step S193.

  In step S193, the negative logic payout command data is inverted to generate positive logic payout command data. Then, the remaining ON time (high level time) of the strobe signal is set (step S194). In the next step S195, the payout command (positive logic data) generated in step S193 and the on-state (high level) strobe signal are output to the port 171. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the on-time set in step S194 has elapsed (step S196). If it has not elapsed (step S196; NO), the process returns to step S195, and if it has elapsed (step S196; YES). Then, the process proceeds to step S197.

  In step S197, the strobe signal is set to the off state (low level) and the remaining output time of the positive logic data is set. In the next step S198, the payout command (positive logic data) is continuously output, and the off-state (low level) strobe signal is output to the port 131. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the remaining output time of the positive logic data set in step S197 has elapsed (step S199). If it has not elapsed (step S199; NO), the process returns to step S198, and if it has elapsed (step S199) In step S199; YES), the process proceeds to step S200. In step S200, the payout command data of positive logic is saved in the port status holding data area of the RWM as port status holding data, and the command transmission process is terminated.

  As described above, by outputting negative logic payout command data and then outputting positive logic payout command data, the command receiving side reads and compares negative logic payout command data and positive logic payout command data. Thus, it can be determined whether or not a correct command has been received. For example, the negative logic payout command data received earlier is logically inverted and compared with the positive logic payout command data received later. Can be received from the game control device 100 to receive an accurate command.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S75) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the jackpot symbol random number 1, the hit random number, and the jackpot symbol random number 2 that are the targets of the initial value random number update process of FIG.
In the random number update processing 1, first, the value of the soft random number status register indicating the update state of the random number is read, and it is checked whether there is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting after one round of the random number (step S211). . Here, if there is no random number waiting for initial value setting, the random number update processing 1 is terminated (step S212; NO). On the other hand, when there is a random number waiting for initial value setting, the process proceeds to step S213 (step S212; YES).

  In step S213, it is checked whether the usual hit random number is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting. Here, if not waiting for the initial value setting, the process jumps to step S217 (step S214; NO). On the other hand, when the usual hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting, the process proceeds to step S215 (step S214; YES). In step S215, the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value of the normal hit random number, and in step S216, the loaded initial value random number is set in the start value setting register corresponding to the next initial value. That is, the next initial value (per-initial value random number) of the normal hit random number is set in a register that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S217.

  In step S217, it is checked whether the jackpot symbol random number 1 is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting. Here, if not waiting for the initial value setting, the process jumps to step S221 (step S218; NO). On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting, the process proceeds to step S219 (step S218; YES). In step S219, the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number 1, and in step S220, the loaded jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is set in the start value setting register corresponding to the next initial value. To do. That is, the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number 1 (the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1) is set in the register holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S221.

In step S221, it is checked whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is a random number waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting. Here, if the initial value setting is not waited, the random number update processing 1 is terminated (step S222; NO).
On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting, the process proceeds to step S223 (step S222; YES). In step S223, the jackpot symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number 2, and in the subsequent step S224, the loaded jackpot symbol initial value random number 2 is set in the start value setting register corresponding to the next initial value. To do. That is, the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number 2 (the jackpot symbol initial value random number 2) is set in a register that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area). After step S224, the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S76) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.
In the present embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and a 2-byte random number (variable pattern random number 1) as the variable pattern random numbers. The random number update process 2 in FIG. Target and update every time an interrupt occurs. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determination random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  In the random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232). Then, the random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S233). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as an R register) used for refreshing a DRAM provided in a Z80 microcomputer used as a gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. The value of the register in which is set is read (step S234). By using the value of the R register, randomness can be given to the random number. After step S234, a mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired, and the value of the R register is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value is different in the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the R register. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number.
As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated. When the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower byte of the R register is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

Next, it is checked whether or not the random number area to be updated is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S236). If it is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S237; YES), the process proceeds to step S238, and the value remaining by masking the value of the R register with the mask value (hereinafter referred to as the masked value) is “1”. Is added value (higher order), and “0” is added value (lower order), and the process proceeds to step S240.
The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so that it is avoided.
On the other hand, if the random number area to be updated is a lower byte of the 2-byte random number or a 1-byte random number (step S237; NO), the process branches to step S239 to set “0” as an added value (upper) and set the mask value to “1”. The added value is regarded as an added value (lower order) and the process proceeds to step S240.

In the next step S240, it is checked whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is a 2-byte random number. If it is not a 2-byte random number, the process jumps to step S242 (step S241; NO). On the other hand, when the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the process proceeds to step S243 (step S241; YES). In step S242, “0” is set as a random value (upper order), and the value obtained by adding “1” to the mask value is set as the value (lower order) of the random number area to be updated, and the process proceeds to step S244.
If the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the value (2 bytes) in the random number area updated in step S243 is set as a random value, and the process proceeds to step S244.

Next, in step S244, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in steps S238 and S239 to the random value is calculated to obtain a new random value, and whether or not this random value exceeds the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233. Determination is made (step S245).
If the newly calculated random number value exceeds the upper limit determination value, the upper limit determination value is subtracted from the calculated random number value to obtain the current random number value (step S246), and then the process proceeds to step S247. On the other hand, if the newly calculated random number value does not exceed the upper limit determination value, the calculated random number value is set as the current random number value, and the process jumps to step S246 and proceeds to step S247.
In step S247, the lower order of the random number value is saved in the corresponding random number area. Here, the data is saved in either the 1-byte random number area or the lower-order area of the 2-byte random number. Subsequently, it is checked whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S248). If the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S249; YES), the higher rank of the random number value is higher in the random number area (2-byte random number (upper)) side. (Step S250). Here, the data is saved in the upper area of the 2-byte random number. After step S250, the random number update process 2 ends.
On the other hand, if the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S249; NO), the process jumps to step S250, does not perform the process, and ends the random number update process 2.

In this way, the CPU 101A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. As the variation pattern, as will be described later, a variation pattern of “no reach”, “normal reach”, “special (SP) 1-A reach”, “special (SP) 1-B reach”, “special ( Fluctuation patterns (reach) in various reach states such as “SP) 2-A reach”, “Special (SP) 2-B reach”, “Special (SP) 3-A reach”, “Special (SP) 3-B reach”, etc. Variation mode).
Therefore, the CPU 101A determines the reach variation mode for determining the reach variation mode in the reach state among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 25 and the normal variation winning device 26. It serves as a random number update means for updating random numbers for use (variation pattern random numbers).

[Prize mouth switch / error monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S77) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning opening switch / error monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not there is a signal input (signal change) from a switch provided in each of the various winning openings and for monitoring an error.

In the winning opening switch / error monitoring process, first, a fraud monitoring table of winning opening switches in the large winning opening is prepared (step S261). There is a count switch 124 as a prize opening switch in the big prize opening. Next, fraud & prize winning monitoring processing is performed (step S262). This is to monitor the winning of a regular game ball (such as at the time of a big hit) to the big winning opening 27a and to monitor the winning to an illegal big winning opening 27a other than the big win.
Next, a fraud monitoring table for the winning switch in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step S263). There is a second start port switch 121 for detecting a winning to the second start winning port 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power).
Next, a fraud & prize winning monitoring process is performed (step S264). This is to monitor the winning of a regular game ball to the second start winning opening 26 as a normal electric accessory (general power) and monitor the winning to the illegal second starting winning opening 26. Next, a prize monitoring table (for example, a list indicating switches that do not require fraud monitoring) of a prize opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (step S265). As the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, for example, there are a first starting opening switch 120 and a winning opening switch 123 provided for the general winning openings 28 to 31.
For a prize opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, since a prize detection process is performed although fraud monitoring is not performed, a prize monitoring table is prepared for the process in step S265, and the number of prizes to be updated in the next step. Counter update processing (step S266) is executed. The detailed procedure of the winning number counter updating process will be described later.

After the winning number counter updating process (step S266), an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time. Update (update “+1” in the range of 0 to 3) and prepare (step S267). Subsequently, the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 is prepared (step S268).
There are the following types of errors for monitoring the gaming machine, which correspond to a shot ball break switch, an overflow switch, an error for monitoring an abnormality of the payout control device, etc. from the payout control device 200.
(B) When 0: Switch error error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
(B) When 1: Shoot ball break error (c) 2: Overflow error (d) 3: When payout abnormality error Next, the type of error check defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 is performed (step S269). Thereafter, the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 is prepared (step S270).
The types of error monitoring defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 are as follows.
(E) When 0 or 2: Glass frame open (front frame open)
(F) When 1 and 3: Front frame open (game frame open)
Next, the error scanning counter for monitoring the opening of the front frame and the gaming frame is loaded, converted into the gaming machine error monitoring table 2, and prepared (step S271). Next, the type of error check defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 is performed (step S272), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S262, step S264) in the winning prize switch / error monitoring process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning monitoring process is a process performed on the count switch 124 of the big winning opening or the second start opening switch 121 in the ordinary electric power. Here, in addition to the detection of the winning, illegal monitoring is performed. This is because the large winning opening (special variable winning device 27) and the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable winning device 26) are likely to be fraudulently forcibly opening the opening / closing member to insert the game ball and paying out the winning ball.
In the fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the target fraud monitoring period flag is checked (step S281), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S282). If it is not during the fraud monitoring period, the process jumps to step S296, and the processes after step S296 are performed.
On the other hand, if it is during the fraud monitoring period, it is checked whether or not there is an input to the prize monitor switch subject to error monitoring (the count switch 124 of the big prize slot or the second start port switch 121 in the ordinary power system) (step S283). Here, if it is determined that there is no input (step S284; NO), the process jumps to step S298, and if it is determined that there is an input (step S284; YES), the process proceeds to step S285, and the target illegal winning number is updated (+1) ( Add) and go to step S286.

In step S286, it is checked whether the number of fraudulent winnings after the addition exceeds the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, 5). The number of judgments is five, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught by the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is because it is not determined to be illegal when winning a prize or when noise occurs in the signal, that is, it is not illegal but not easily determined as an error. If it is determined that the determination number has not been exceeded (step S287; NO), the process jumps to step S296, and if it is determined that the determination number has been exceeded (step S287; YES), the process proceeds to step S288.
In step S288, the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the fraud occurrence determination number, and in step S289, an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area. (Step S290) Further, an illegal winning flag is set as an illegal flag (Step S291).

Next, the set fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S292). If they do not match (step S293; NO), the process proceeds to step S294, and the set fraud flag is set as the target fraud flag area. After saving (step S294), command setting processing is performed in step S295, and the fraud & prize winning monitoring processing is terminated.
Therefore, if fraud has occurred as described above, a fraud notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and a fraud notification is made.
On the other hand, if YES in step S293, that is, if the set fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area, it can be determined that the state is the same as the state already taught to the production control device 300, step S294, The fraud & prize winning monitoring process ends without performing the process of step S295. This is because the command is transmitted only when the flag changes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S282 that fraud monitoring is not being performed and the process branches to step S296, or if it is determined in step S287 that the number of determinations has not been exceeded (step S287; NO) and the process branches to step S296, step S296 is performed. Then, a prize monitoring table of the prize opening switch subject to fraud monitoring (the count switch 124 of the big prize opening or the second start opening switch 121 in the ordinary electric train) is prepared. Then, after executing the process of updating the winning number counter, that is, the process S297 for counting the number of winnings as a target for discharging the winning ball, the target unauthorized winning notification timer has already timed up or (-1) timed up after updating Is checked (step S298), and the check result is determined in step S299.
If the target unauthorized prize notification timer has not expired or has expired after (-1) update, the determination in step S299 is NO, and the routine is repeated and the routine is repeated.

  If the target unauthorized prize notification timer has already timed up or has expired after (-1) update, the process proceeds to step S300, where it is determined whether it is the notification end timing (the notification end moment). If it is determined that the notification end timing is not reached (step S300; NO), the process jumps to step S302. If it is determined that the notification end timing is reached (step S300; YES), the process proceeds to step S301 to reset the target illegal winning number. The process proceeds to S302. In step S302, a target unauthorized winning cancellation command is prepared. In subsequent step S303, an unauthorized winning cancellation flag is set as an unauthorized flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S292, and thereafter, the processes in and after step S292 are executed. Accordingly, at this time, an unauthorized winning cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the unauthorized notification is canceled.

[Winner counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (step S266) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S297) in the fraud & prize winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input number counter update process, first, the number of winning-port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning-monitoring table acquired in the above-described winning-port switch / error monitoring process (step S311). Next, it is checked whether or not there is a detection signal input (more precisely, a change in input) from the prize-winning switch to be monitored (step S312). If it is determined that there is no input (S313; NO), the process jumps to step S318. If it is determined that there is an input (S313; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area is loaded in the next step S314.

Then, in step S315, the target winning number counter is updated (+1) to check whether it overflows. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S316; NO), the process proceeds to step S317 to save the updated value in the winning number counter area, and then proceeds to step S318.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S316 that a counter overflow has occurred (S316; YES), step S317 is skipped and the process jumps to step S318. The maximum storage number (for example, 255 for the 1-byte size and 65535 for the 2-byte size) is determined by the size of the winning number counter area provided, and if it exceeds that, the value returns to “0” and pays. You will lose information on the number of prize balls you should have. In order to avoid this, in step S315, the contents of the area are not updated suddenly, but the update is performed after confirming that (+1) is set to “0” outside the area.
In step S318, it is determined whether the monitoring process for all the switches has been completed. If the monitoring process has been completed (step S318; YES), the input number counter update process is terminated, and if not completed (step S318; (NO), it returns to step S312 and repeats the said process.

[Error check processing]
Next, an error check process (step S269, step S272) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the error check process, first, an error monitoring table corresponding to an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time. Is acquired (step S321).
The information defined on the prepared gaming machine error monitoring table includes the following.
(A) Address of error monitoring table (there are as many errors as there are errors to be monitored)
(B) Data for determining the switch status (c) Error notification command (d) Error notification end command (e) Error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value (f) Error release monitoring timer comparison value (g) Switch status area address ( H) Address of error monitoring timer area (Re) Address of error flag area

Next, the state of the target switch acquired this time is checked (step S322), and it is determined whether the switch is on (step S323). If the switch is on (step S323; YES), there is a possibility that an error will occur, so the process proceeds to step S324, and an error occurrence flag is set as an error flag.
For example, as one of the errors defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table, if the shooting ball is out, the shooting ball out switch 216 detects that there is no gaming ball in the chute that supplies the game ball to the storage tank 51. If it is turned on, step S323 becomes YES. If YES, an error occurrence flag is set in step S324.

Next, a target error notification command is prepared (step S325), and then a target error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S326). Next, the value of the target switch state area is compared with the current switch state (step S327), and it is determined whether or not they match (step S328).
If the result of step S328 is NO (mismatch), it is determined that there is still no need for error handling, and the current switch state is saved in the switch state area in step S329, and then the target error monitoring timer is cleared ( Step S330).
On the other hand, if the determination result in step S328 is YES (match), the target error monitoring timer is updated (incremented) by “1” in step S334 in order to determine whether or not error handling is necessary. Check if the timer comparison value (reference value that determines that error handling is necessary) has been reached. If the monitoring timer comparison value has been reached, the error monitoring timer is updated (decremented) by "-1" in step S336, and the process proceeds to step S337, where the set error flag is compared with the value of the target error flag area.
Here, when it is determined in step S335 that the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the error occurrence or cancellation state has been determined. However, there may be a situation in which error occurrence is confirmed when an error has already occurred, or error cancellation is confirmed when no error is occurring. Therefore, after the process of step S336, step S337 is performed. Then, by comparing the set error flag with the value of the target error flag area, it is checked whether or not the currently determined error state is the same as the current error flag state.

  If the determination result in step S338 is YES (the error flag is the same), the error state has not changed, so it is determined that no action is required, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S338 is NO (if the error flag is not the same), it means that the error state has changed to a new error state, so that the process proceeds to step S339 and the set error flag is set in the target error flag area. Save and proceed to step S340. That is, the value of the target error flag area is changed to that of the error state determined this time, and the process proceeds to step S340. In step S340, a command setting process is performed to set a command corresponding to the currently determined error state. As a result, a measure corresponding to the current error state is performed. For example, if the shot ball is out, an error display notifying the user is notified or the notification is canceled.

On the other hand, if the target switch acquired this time in step S323 is not turned on, there is no possibility that an error will occur, and conversely, there is a possibility that an error will be released. The process branches to step S331, and an error release flag is set as an error flag. Next, a target error notification end command is prepared (step S332), subsequently, a target error cancellation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S333), the process proceeds to step S327, and the processes after step S327 are performed. Therefore, at this time, processing corresponding to error cancellation is performed.
In this way, if an error occurs, a corresponding error flag is set and a treatment command is set. If the error is resolved, the corresponding error flag is cleared and a resolution command is set. In particular, in this error check process, not only the occurrence of an error is monitored, but also the cancellation is monitored and the process is shared.
Note that such error check processing is the same for errors such as glass frame opening and front frame opening.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the special game process (step S78) in the timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure game process, the input of the first start opening switch 120 and the second start opening switch 121 is monitored, the whole process related to the special figure change display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.
In the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring winning of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 is performed in step S351.
In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 26 that forms the start winning port 25 and the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is determined. Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance.
In step S352, a count switch monitoring process is performed. This is a process for monitoring the count number of the count switch 124 provided in the special variable winning device 27.

Next, in step S353, it is checked whether the special figure game processing timer has already expired or whether the timer has expired after -1 update of the timer. If the timer has expired, the determination in the next step S354 is YES. Then, the process proceeds to step S355, and if the time is not up, the determination in step S354 is NO and the process jumps to step S366.
The special figure game process timer is a timer value that is set to a predetermined value in each process after branching by a process number described later (steps S359 to S365: corresponding to process number = 0 to process number = 6). Yes, this special figure game processing timer is set so that it is time to execute step S359 and subsequent steps when the time is up. As a result, when it is time to execute step S355 and subsequent steps when step S353 is executed, the determination result of step S354 becomes affirmative, and step S355 and subsequent steps (including steps S366 to S369) are executed. . And when step S353 is performed and it is not the timing which should perform step S355-S365, the determination result of step S354 becomes negative and it becomes the structure by which only step S366-S369 is performed.

In steps S355 to S357, a special figure game sequence branch table is set for branching by a process number to be described later, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired, and the return after the branch process ends. Save the address in the stack area.
Next, in step S358, the process branches according to the process number. That is, with process number 0, the process goes to step S359 (special figure normal process), process number 1 to step S360 (special figure changing process), process number 2 to step S361 (special figure display process), and process number 3. Go to step S362 (fanfare / interval processing), process number 4 to step S363 (big prize opening open process), process number 5 to step S364 (big prize opening remaining ball process), process number 6 to step S365 ( Proceed to jackpot end processing. The customer waiting state (during demonstration) is process number 0.

  Then, in step S359 (special figure normal processing), when the special figure holding number (the number of special figure starting memory that is put on hold because the special figure fluctuation display game is not executed) is zero and the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed. Then, a process for displaying the waiting state on the display device 41 is performed. Further, in the special figure routine process, a process for starting the next special figure change display game (special figure change start process) is performed. In this special figure fluctuation start process, the start memory of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is monitored, and if there is any special figure start memory, the corresponding fluctuation display (first or second fluctuation display) is started. Is set (the setting of the variation pattern command transmitted to the effect control device 300, etc.) is set, the process number is set to 1, and the process returns. If the special figure hold number is zero and the next special figure variation display game is not executed, the process returns as it is (the process number remains 0).

Further, in step S360 (processing during fluctuation of special figure), processing for variably displaying the special figure is performed until the fluctuation time set in the special figure fluctuation start processing has elapsed. And if the said fluctuation | variation time passes, after performing the process which transmits the command (symbol stop command) which stops the symbol of a special figure to the production | presentation control apparatus 300, it returns with the process number set to 2. If the set fluctuation time has not elapsed, the process returns as it is (the process number remains 1).
Further, in step S361 (special drawing display processing), processing for displaying the special chart fluctuation display result for a certain time (1 to 2 seconds) is performed. When the display for a certain period of time is completed, the process number is set to 3 if it is a big hit, and the process number is set to 0 if it is off. When the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process returns as it is (the process number remains 2).

In step S362 (fanfare / inter-interval processing), fanfare processing for outputting a fanfare sound or the like from the speaker 12a or the like is executed immediately after the big hit, and an interval for realizing display of an interval period or the like in the big hit interval period. The processing is executed, and the processing number is set to 4 at the timing when the large winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is started.
Step S363 (processing during opening of the big prize opening) is a process while the big prize opening 27a of the variable prize winning device 27 is being opened. When the grand prize opening is finished, the processing number is set to 5.

Further, in step S364 (big winning opening remaining ball processing), a process of waiting for a certain period of time is performed in order to reliably count the gaming balls that have entered the big winning opening 27a just before the end of the big winning opening. After the elapse, the processing number is set to 3 when the big hit round remains, and the processing number is set to 6 when the big hit round does not remain.
Further, in step S365 (big hit end process), after the big hit ends, a process for executing the special figure normal process S359 is performed, the process number is returned to 0, and the process returns.

Next, when one of the above processes corresponding to the process number is completed, the process proceeds to step S366, and a table for controlling display on the collective display device 35 of the special figure 1 (display of the special figure 1) is prepared. In the next step S367, the control process (symbol fluctuation control process) for the fluctuation display of this special figure 1 is performed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S368, where a table for controlling display on the collective display device 35 of FIG. 2 (display of the special figure 2) is prepared. In the next step S369, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Control processing (design variation control processing) is performed, and then the process returns.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the start port switch monitoring process (step S351) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the start port switch monitoring process, first, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the start winning port 25 (first start port) (step S371), the special start port switch common process (step S372) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step S372 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step S377.

Next, it is checked whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variation winning device 26) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 26 is activated and the game ball is open. (Step S373) If it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (Step S373; YES), the process proceeds to Step S376, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S373 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step S373; NO), is the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 26 equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5)? Is checked (step S374), and a process of determining whether or not the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (step S375) is performed.
The normally variable winning device 26 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud has occurred. When there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of illegal winnings thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value).

If it is determined in step S375 that the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step S375; NO), a table for setting information on hold by the normal variation winning device 26 (start port 2) is prepared (step S376). Then, the special start port switch common process (step S377) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.
If it is determined in step S375 that the number of illegal winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determinations (step S375; YES), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the special start port switch common process (steps S372 and S377) in the start port switch monitoring process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the first start port switch 120 or the second start port switch 121.
In the special figure start port switch common process, first, of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121, whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 120). If it is determined (step S381) and it is determined that there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step S382; NO), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S382 that there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step S383; YES), after saving the start port winning flag of the monitored start port switch (step S383), The big hit random number extracted in the hard random number latch register is loaded (the big hit random number is extracted) (step S384).

Subsequently, information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 120) of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 is displayed outside the pachinko machine 1. The number of times to be output to the management device 140 (the number of times the start port signal is output) (the number of times that another output must be output) is loaded (step S385). Then, the loaded start port signal output count is updated (+1), it is checked whether the output count overflows (step S386), and if it is determined that the output count does not overflow (step S387; NO), the updated Is saved in the RWM start port signal output count area (step S388), and the process proceeds to step S389. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S387 that the output count overflows (step S387; YES), the process proceeds to step S389.
In step S389, among the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121, the update target special figure holding corresponding to the monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 120) is suspended ( It is checked whether or not the (starting memory) number is less than the upper limit value (step S389), and processing for determining whether or not the special figure holding number is less than the upper limit value (step S390) is performed.

If it is determined in step S390 that the number of special figure hold is less than the upper limit (step S390; YES), a process of updating (+1) the special figure hold number to be updated (for example, the special figure 1 hold number) ( After performing step S391), a decoration special figure hold number command (MODE) of the target starter switch is prepared (step S392), and further, a special figure reservation number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is issued. Preparation is made (step S393) and command setting processing (step S394) is performed.
Next, a process of calculating the address of the random number save area corresponding to the special figure hold number (step S395) is performed. Subsequently, the big hit random number is saved in the random number saving area of the RWM (step S396), and then the big hit symbol random number of the monitoring target start switch is loaded (the big hit symbol random number is extracted) and prepared (step S397), The corresponding jackpot symbol random number is saved in the RWM jackpot symbol random number save area, and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the register (step S398).

Next, the corresponding variation pattern random number 1 is loaded (the variation pattern random number 1 is extracted), and the loaded value is saved in the variation pattern random number 1 saving area of the RWM (step S399). Load (extract the variation pattern random number 2), save the loaded value in the variation pattern random number 2 save area of the RWM (step S400), and then load the corresponding variation pattern random number 3 (extract the variation pattern random number 3) Then, the loaded value is saved in the RWM fluctuation pattern random number 3 save area (step S401).
Here, the RWM extracts various random numbers based on the inflow of game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 25 and the normal variation winning apparatus 26, and a start storage means capable of storing the extracted various random numbers as start memories. Make.
Subsequently, a special figure hold information determination process (step S402) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S390 that the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit (step S390; NO), is the input of the start port switch according to step S382 the input of the first start port switch 120? If it is checked (step S403) and it is determined that the input is the input of the first start port switch 120 (step S404; YES), a decoration special figure hold number command (hold overflow command) is prepared (step S405), A command setting process (step S406) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S404 that the input is not the first start port switch 120 (step S404; NO), the special view start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure hold information determination process (step S402) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure hold information determination process, first, in step S411, it is checked whether or not a condition for executing the prefetch effect is satisfied. The conditions for executing the pre-reading effect are as follows.
・ Special figure 1: Regular variation winning device 26 is being supported (supporting ordinary power) and not in big hit ・ Special figure 2: No condition When this condition is met, the result related information corresponding to the start memory A prefetch process for performing the determination is performed.
The check result in step S411 is determined in step S412, and if the condition for executing the prefetch effect is not satisfied, the routine is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the condition for executing the pre-reading effect is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S413 to perform a big hit determination process. The big hit determination process determines a big hit based on whether or not the random number extracted at the timing of the start winning prize is within the big hit range. When the big hit is determined, the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag area.

Next, in step S414, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination result is a big win. Check the jackpot symbol random number and get and set the corresponding jackpot information table. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S418.
Here, the information defined on the jackpot symbol random number check table includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (represents distribution rate)
-Address of the jackpot information table corresponding to the judgment value The information defined on the jackpot information table includes the following.
・ Pattern information ・ Start opening prize design command

On the other hand, if the decision result in the step S414 is NO (not a big hit), the process branches to a step S417 to set a miss information table, and then the process proceeds to a step S418. In the loss information table, for example, a start opening prize design command is defined.
When the process proceeds from step S416 or step S417 to step S418, in step S418, symbol information is acquired from the set information table and saved in the symbol information (work) area. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S419, where a start opening winning effect symbol command is acquired from the set information table and saved in the winning effect symbol command area.
Next, of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121, after preparing the start port winning flag of the monitored start port switch (step S420), the target start port winning effect command setting table is prepared. Then (step S421), special figure information setting processing (step S422) for setting the special figure information set for the monitoring target start port is performed.
Subsequently, after performing the latter half variation pattern setting process (step S423) for setting the second half variation pattern among the variation modes in the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern setting process (step S423) for setting the variation aspect of the special figure variation display game ( Step S424) is performed.
Each of the special figure information setting process in step S422, the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process in step S423, and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S424 is a special figure information setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 (see FIG. 42). The latter half of the variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 43) and the variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 44) will be described in detail later.

Then, a start opening prize effect command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is calculated and prepared (step S425), and the second half variation number value is prepared as a start opening prize effect command (ACTION) (step S426). Command setting processing (step S427) is performed. Subsequently, the start opening winning effect command command is loaded and prepared from the winning effect symbol command area (step S428), the command setting process (step S429) is performed, and the special figure holding information determination process is terminated.
That is, the start opening prize effect command is prepared in steps S425 and S426, and the start opening prize effect symbol command is prepared in step S428, so that the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory is obtained. The effect control device 300 can be notified before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, and in particular, the display mode of the special figure hold displayed on the display device 41 is changed. The result related information can be notified to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game.

[Count switch monitoring processing]
Next, the count switch monitoring process (step S352) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the count switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not the special prize winning unit 27 of the special variable prize winning device 27 is open (step S451), and it is determined that the special prize opening is open (step S452; YES). Then, it is checked whether or not there is an input from the count switch 124 (step S453). If it is determined that there is an input from the count switch 124 (step S454; YES), the numerical value of the big prize winning counter is updated (+1). Processing (step S455) is performed.

  Subsequently, it is checked whether or not the count number of the big prize counter has reached the upper limit (step S456), and if it is determined that the big prize count has reached the upper limit (step S457; YES), A process of clearing the figure game process timer to 0 (step S458) is performed, and the count switch monitoring process is terminated.

  Whether it is determined in step S452 that the special winning opening is not open (step S452; NO), or whether it is determined in step S454 that there is no input from the count switch 124 (step S454; NO). ) Alternatively, if it is determined in step S457 that the number of winning prizes has not reached the upper limit (step S457; NO), the count switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, the details of the special figure routine process (step S359) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure routine processing, first, it is checked whether or not the second special figure holding number (second starting memory number) is 0 (step S461).
If it is determined that the second special figure hold number is 0 (step S462; YES), it is checked whether or not the first start memory number (first special figure hold number) is 0 (step S463).
If it is determined that the number of first special figure hold is 0 (step S464; YES), it is checked whether the customer waiting demo has already started (step S465), and the customer waiting demo has not started. That is, if it is determined that the process has not been started (step S466; NO), a process of saving the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area is performed (step S467).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step S468), and a command setting process (step S469) is performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S465 that the customer waiting demo has already started (step S466; YES), the customer waiting demo flag is already saved in the customer waiting demo flag area (step S467), and the customer waiting demo command is also sent. Since preparation (step S468) and command setting processing (step S469) are also executed, the processing proceeds to step S470 without performing these processing.
Next, special figure normal process transition setting process 1 is performed (step S470). This sets various data for shifting to the special figure normal processing, for example, the processing number “0” related to the special figure normal processing, the flag (large prize winning fraud monitoring information) for defining the special winning prize fraud monitoring period, and the like. Processing is performed, and then the special figure routine processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S462 that the second special figure reservation number is not 0 (step S463; NO), special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 1 (step S471) is performed. Details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process in step S471 will be described later.
Then, a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) is performed (step S470). This prepares a table (for the second special figure) for shifting to the special figure changing process, information on the process number “1” relating to the special figure changing process, and the end of the customer waiting demo. , A test signal related to the fluctuation of the second special figure, information for controlling the second special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display which is an LED segment in the collective display device 35 (for example, the special figure 2 display For example, a flag related to the fluctuation of the indicator, the initial value of the timer of the blinking period of the special figure 2 indicator), and the like. Thereafter, the special figure routine process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S464 that the first special figure hold number is not 0 (step S464; NO), special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S473) is performed. Details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 in step S473 will be described later.
Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) is performed (step S474). This prepares a table (for the first special figure) for shifting to the special figure changing process, or the process number “1” relating to the special figure changing process in the table, the information related to the end of the customer waiting demonstration. , Test signals related to the fluctuation of the first special figure, information for controlling the first special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display which is the LED segment in the collective display device 35 (for example, the special figure 1 display For example, a flag related to the fluctuation of the indicator, the initial value of the timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 indicator), and the like. Thereafter, the special figure routine process is terminated.
In this way, the second special figure reservation number in steps S461 and S462 is checked before the first special figure reservation number check in steps S463 and S464, so that the second special figure reservation number is zero. If not, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 (step S471) is executed.
That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game.

[Special figure transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S470) in the above special figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, “0” is set as the process number in step S481 (for example, a table for shifting to the special figure normal process is prepared and the process number “0” related to the special figure normal process is set in the table. "" Is set), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area in step S482.
Next, in step S483, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is reset, and in step S484, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area, and the routine ends. As a result, various data for shifting to the special figure routine process, for example, the process number “0” relating to the special figure routine process is set, and a flag (big prize entrance fraud monitoring information) for specifying the big prize mouth fraud monitoring period is set. Processing to set is performed.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 (step S473) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, first, whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. The big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the big hit flag 1 is set (step S491). Details of the big hit flag 1 setting process in step S491 will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S492) related to the setting of the first special figure stop symbol (special figure 1 stop symbol), the first special figure stop symbol number (special figure 1 stop symbol number) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step S493). The test signal corresponding to the first special figure stop symbol number (special symbol 1 stop symbol number) includes a symbol 2 data signal, and this signal is continuously output until the data value changes. The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in step S492 will be described later.
Subsequently, the symbol information set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is saved in the symbol information (work) area (step S494).

Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag is set and prepared (step S495), and the special figure 1 fluctuation flag is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area of the RWM (step S496).
Subsequently, a table (for special figure 1) for setting information regarding the variation pattern is prepared (step S497), and special figure information setting processing (step S498) for setting special figure information is performed. Subsequently, among the variation modes in the first special figure variation display game, after performing the latter half variation pattern setting process (step S499) for setting the second half variation pattern, the variation for setting the variation aspect of the first special figure variation display game. Pattern setting processing (step S500) is performed. Then, the fluctuation start information setting process (step S501) for setting the fluctuation start information of the first special figure is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.
Details of the special figure information setting process in step S498, the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process in step S499, the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S500, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process in step S501 will be described later.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (step S491) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area in step S511. This is because information on the deviation is set in advance before the big hit determination. Next, in step S512, a big hit random number is loaded from the big hit random number saving area (for special figure 1) and prepared, and in step S513, a big hit determination process is performed. This is to check whether the jackpot random number corresponding to the special figure 1 extracted this time is in the jackpot range (a value between the jackpot lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value: matching the jackpot judgment value). If it is within the range of the big hit, it can be judged as a big hit (detailed routine will be described later).

The check result in step S513 is determined in step S514. If the determination result is a big hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S515 to save the big hit flag 1 area by overwriting the big hit information, and in the subsequent step S516, the big hit random number save area. Clear (0) (for special figure 1) and return to prepare for the next determination.
On the other hand, when NO at step S514 (when it is off), the process jumps to step S515 and proceeds to step S516. Therefore, at this time, the processing ends in a state in which the shift information is saved in the jackpot flag 1, and the jackpot flag 1 is not set.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S492) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, it is checked in step S521 whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (whether the big hit information is saved). If it is determined in step S522 that the big hit is made, the process proceeds to step S523 to set the big hit symbol table in FIG. To do.
Here, the information defined on the jackpot symbol table of Special Figure 1 includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (indicating distribution rate)
Stop symbol number corresponding to the judgment value Subsequently, in step S524, the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the big hit symbol random number save area (for special figure 1), and in step S525, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired. In step S526, the acquired stop symbol number is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area.

Next, in step S527, it is determined whether or not normal power support is in progress. The general electric power support is an operation in which the opening / closing member 26a of the second starting prize opening 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power) is opened to support the start winning prize. Such support is done.
If the power transmission support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S528, and after preparing the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table at the time of high probability and time reduction, the process proceeds to step S529. On the other hand, if the power transmission is not being supported, the process branches to step S530 to prepare a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table at the low probability, and proceeds to step S529.
In step S529, a stop symbol information setting process for setting stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol 1 stop symbol (big hit symbol) is performed. The details of the stop symbol information setting process in step S529 will be described later.

Next, in step S531, a decoration special figure command table (in this table, a decoration special figure 1 command (ACTION) is defined) is set, and in step S532, a decoration special figure 1 corresponding to the symbol information is displayed. After performing the process of acquiring the command (ACTION), in step S533, the process of acquiring the decoration special figure 1 command (MODE) is performed, and these commands are saved in the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step S534). .
In step S535, the RWM jackpot symbol random number save area (for special figure 1) is cleared to 0, and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S522 that the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (NO), the processing in steps S523 to S529 is not performed, and the process branches to step S536. Then, in step S536, the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol area, the process proceeds to step S537, the symbol information at the time of disconnection is saved in the symbol information area, and then the process proceeds to step S531, and thereafter Perform the process.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 (step S471) in the special figure ordinary process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, first, whether or not the second special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit. The big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the big hit flag 2 is set (step S541). Details of the big hit flag 2 setting process in step S541 will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S542) relating to the setting of the second special figure stop symbol (special figure 2 stop symbol), the second special figure stop symbol number (special figure 2 stop symbol number) ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step S543). The test signal corresponding to the second special figure stop symbol number (special symbol 2 stop symbol number) includes a symbol 3 data signal, and this signal continues to be output until the data value changes. Details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process in step S542 will be described later.
Subsequently, the symbol information set in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is saved in the symbol information (work) area (step S544).

Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag is set and prepared (step S545), and the special figure 2 fluctuation flag is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area of the RWM (step S546).
Subsequently, a table (for special figure 2) for setting information regarding the variation pattern is prepared (step S547), and special figure information setting processing (step S548) for setting special figure information is performed. Subsequently, among the variation modes in the second special figure variation display game, after performing the latter half variation pattern setting process (step S549) for setting the latter half variation pattern, the variation for setting the variation aspect of the second special figure variation display game. Pattern setting processing (step S550) is performed. Thereafter, the fluctuation start information setting process (step S551) for setting the fluctuation start information of the second special figure is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.
Details of the special figure information setting process in step S548, the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process in step S549, the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S550, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process in step S551 will be described later.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (step S541) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area in step S561. This is because information on the deviation is set in advance before the big hit determination. Next, in step S562, a big hit random number is loaded from the big hit random number save area (for special figure 2) and prepared, and in step S563, a big hit determination process is performed. This is to check whether the jackpot random number corresponding to the special figure 2 extracted this time is in the jackpot range (a value between the jackpot lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value: matching the jackpot judgment value) If it is within the range of the big hit, it can be judged as a big hit (detailed routine will be described later).

The check result of step S563 is determined in step S564, and if the determination result is a big hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S565, where the big hit flag 2 area is overwritten and saved, and in the subsequent step S566, the big hit random number save area Clear (0) (for special figure 2) and return to prepare for the next determination.
On the other hand, when NO in step S564 (when there is a loss), the process jumps to step S565 and proceeds to step S566. Therefore, at this time, the processing ends in a state where the shift information is saved in the jackpot flag 2, and the jackpot flag 2 is not set.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S542) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, it is checked in step S571 whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (whether the big hit information is saved). If the big hit flag is determined in step S572, the process proceeds to step S573 to set the big hit symbol table in FIG. To do.
Here, the information defined on the jackpot symbol table of Special Figure 2 includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (indicating distribution rate)
Stop symbol number corresponding to the judgment value Subsequently, in step S574, the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the jackpot symbol random number save area (for special figure 2), and in step S575, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired. In step S576, the acquired stop symbol number is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area.

Next, in step S577, it is determined whether or not normal power support is in progress. If the power transmission support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S578, and after preparing the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table at the time of high probability and time reduction, the process proceeds to step S579. On the other hand, if the power transmission support is not in progress, the process branches to step S580 to prepare a special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table at the low probability, and the process proceeds to step S579.
In step S579, stop symbol information setting processing for setting stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol 2 stop symbol (big hit symbol) is performed. Details of the stop symbol information setting process in step S579 will be described later.

Next, in step S581, a decoration special command command table (decoration special figure 2 command (ACTION) is defined in this table) is set, and in step S582, the decorative special figure 2 corresponding to the symbol information is displayed. After performing the process of acquiring the command (ACTION), in step S583, the process of acquiring the decoration special figure 2 command (MODE) is performed, and these commands are saved in the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step S584). .
In step S585, the RWM jackpot symbol random number saving area (for special figure 2) is cleared to 0, and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S572 that the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (NO), the processing from step S573 to step S579 is not performed, and the process branches to step S586. In step S586, the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol area, the process proceeds to step S587, the symbol information at the time of disconnection is saved in the symbol information area, and then the process proceeds to step S581. Perform the process.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the big hit determination processing (step S513, step S563) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, processing for setting a lower limit judgment value for jackpot judgment is performed in step S591. Thereafter, in step S592, it is checked whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value, that is, the big hit random number value read in step S512 in FIG. 35 is the lower limit value of the big hit random number hit judgment value. If it is determined in step S593 that the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value, the process branches to step S594, and the determination result is set as a deviation, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value in step S593, the process proceeds to step S595, and it is determined whether the probability is high. This is to determine whether or not the jackpot probability is high due to the probability variation, that is, whether or not the probability of the hit result in the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (probability variation state). Judgment. If the probability is high, a process of setting an upper limit determination value for jackpot determination at the time of high probability is performed in step S596, and then the process proceeds to step S597.
If it is determined in step S595 that the probability is not high, the process branches to step S598, where processing for setting an upper limit determination value for jackpot determination in the case of low probability is performed, and then processing proceeds to step S597.
In this way, when the upper limit judgment value at the time of high probability and low probability is set, if the value of the target big hit random number is between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value (zone), You will be able to judge.
Therefore, in step S597, it is checked whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (exceeded the upper limit determination value), and it is determined in step S598 that the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S598). ; YES), since it can be determined that it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S594, where the determination result is set as a deviation and the process returns.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S598 that the value of the target big hit random number is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value (not exceeding the upper limit determination value) (step S598; NO), the target big hit random number value becomes the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination. In the interval between the values (zone), it is determined that the game is a big hit, and the big hit is set as the determination result in step S600 and the process returns.

[Stop symbol information setting process]
Next, details of the stop symbol information setting process (step S529) in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process and the stop symbol information setting process (step S579) in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the stop symbol information setting process, first, in step S611, symbol information corresponding to the target stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the symbol information area.
Here, when the symbol information is acquired, the income is obtained from the information defined on the prepared stop symbol information table, and the contents are as follows (the same applies to each information described later).
-Symbol information-Probability variation judgment flag-Round number upper limit value information-Opening information for special prize opening-Special effect information (for example,
・ Special production information (for example, whether or not there is a promotion production execution period after the big hit)
Here, the promotion effect is the following concept.
In the case of the present embodiment, when a normal symbol is hit, if a specific rotation speed (for example, 20, 50, 100th rotation) is reached within a short period after the end of the big hit, the normal big hit probability (normal mode) to a high probability The promotion effect of whether to be promoted to the mode is performed. This promotion effect gives the player a great sense of expectation that it may become a probable change (becomes a high probability mode due to a probability variation), and is an effect with a throbbing feeling.
However, in the pachinko machine 1, whether it is a certain change or not is determined in advance, but the player can be confident because there is only an ambiguous notification on the screen of the display device 41 that conveys the effect to an external player. There is no state. Therefore, by performing a promotion effect, the player is notified whether or not the probability change is confirmed.
In addition, the number of times of promotion promotion is also decided in advance (this information is also included in the special production information), and if it is not a positive change, the above-mentioned three times of promotion will be performed, all fail The production will end in

Next, in step S612, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the probability variation determination flag is saved in the probability variation determination flag area of the RWM.
Next, in step S613, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the round number upper limit information is saved in the round number upper limit information area of the RWM. Subsequently, in step S614, the special winning opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the special winning opening release information is saved in the special winning opening release information area of the RWM. Next, in step S615, special effect information (for setting) corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, the special effect information (for setting) is saved in the special effect information (for setting) area of the RWM, and stop symbol information setting is performed. The process ends.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (steps S498 and S548) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure information setting process, first, the prepared flag is saved in the symbol discrimination flag (work) area as a flag indicating the target special figure (step S621).
Here, the information defined on the table prepared for the special map information includes the following.
・ Special figure hold count area address ・ First half change information 1 area address ・ First half change information 2 area address ・ First half change group information area address ・ Second half change group information area address ・ Random number save area address (change pattern random number 1)
・ Random number save area address (fluctuation pattern random number 2)
-Address of the second half variable number area-Address of the random number save area (fluctuation pattern random number 3)

Next, in step S622, the target special figure holding number is loaded as the information generation parameter 1, and special effect information (for distribution) is loaded as the information generation parameter 2 in step S623. Next, in step S624, it is determined whether or not general power support is in progress (the concept of general power support is as described above). If the power transmission support is not in progress, the process branches to NO in step S624 and proceeds to step S625 to set a value of no power transmission support as the information generation parameter 3. Next, in step S626, first-half fluctuation information 1 is generated based on the information generation parameters 1 and 3, and saved in the first-half fluctuation information 1 area. Subsequently, in step S627, the first half variation information 2 is generated based on the information generation parameter 2, saved in the first half variation information 2 area, and in step S628, the symbol information (for work) is loaded as the information generation parameter 4, and further step In S629, the symbol determination flag (for work) is loaded as the information generation parameter 5.
Next, in step S630, first-half variable group information is generated based on the information generation parameters 4 and 6, and saved in the first-half variable group information area. Subsequently, in step S631, the latter half fluctuation group information is generated based on the information generation parameter 1, saved in the target latter fluctuation group information area, and in step S632, the information generation parameters 2, 4, and 5 are changed to the fluctuation group selection table point. Generate, prepare and return. Therefore, at this time, the special map information without ordinary power support is set.

On the other hand, if ordinary power support is being performed in step S624, the process branches to step S633 to determine whether there is a high probability. If NO (low probability), the process proceeds to step S634, where the information generation parameter 3 has a low probability. Then, after setting the value during normal power support, the process returns to step S626, and thereafter, the process returns from step S626 to step S632.
Therefore, at this time, low-probability and special figure information during normal power support are set.
If it is determined in step S633 that the probability is high (YES), the process branches to step S635 to check whether the first-half information generation parameter 2 is executing the special effect, and the check result is determined in step S636. When NO is NO (special effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S637 to set a high probability and a value during normal power support as the information generation parameter 3, and then to step S626, and thereafter, step S626 to step S632. Execute and return.
Therefore, at this time, high probability and special figure information during ordinary power support are set.
Further, when it is determined in step S636 that the first half information generation parameter 2 is executing the special effect (YES), the process branches to step S638, and the value at the time of executing the special effect is set as the information generation parameter 3, and then the step The process returns to S626, and thereafter, Steps S626 to S632 are executed, and the process returns.
Accordingly, at this time, the special figure information at the time of executing the special effect is set.

[Second half fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the latter half variation pattern setting process (steps S499 and S549) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the latter-half variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection table corresponding to the special figure information (for example, the first special figure) set in the special figure information setting process among the first special figure and the second special figure. Processing for calculating and preparing the address of the variation group selection table corresponding to the pointer is performed (step S641).
Note that information defined in the variation group selection address table before calculation includes the address of the variation group selection table, which is as many as the number of variation group selection table pointers.

Next, it is checked whether or not the symbol information (for work) set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is out of symbol information (step S642). In step S634, the symbol information (for work) is out of symbol. If it is determined to be information (YES), the process proceeds to step S644 to load the latter-half fluctuation group information from the target latter-half fluctuation group information area, and then, in step S645, an address corresponding to the latter-half fluctuation group information is additionally calculated. The variable group selection table is prepared and the process proceeds to step S646.
Note that the information defined on the outlier variation group selection table includes the address of the variation group selection table, but this is an additional calculation to change the table for each number of holds, The big hit does not affect the number of holds.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S634 that the symbol information (for work) is not out of the symbol information (NO), the process jumps to step S644 and step S645 and proceeds to step S646.
Therefore, when the symbol information (for work) is out of symbol information, information corresponding to the out symbol is prepared.

In step S646, a variation pattern random number 1 composed of 2 bytes (a plurality of bytes) is prepared as a determination random number for selecting the latter half variation pattern group of the special figure variation display game, and then prepared. In step S647, a 2-byte distribution process related to the specification of the latter half variation selection table is performed.
Next, after acquiring and preparing the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained by performing the 2-byte sorting process (step S648), as a determination random number for selecting the latter half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared from the target area (step S649), and a distribution process (step S650) for specifying the latter half fluctuation number is performed.
Next, a process for obtaining the latter half variation number obtained by performing the distribution process (step S651) is performed, and the latter half variation number is saved in the latter half variation number area to be the target of the RWM (step S652). The latter half variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting process (step S500, step S550) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the variation pattern setting process, first, of the first special figure and the second special figure, it corresponds to the special figure information (eg, the first special figure) set in the special figure information setting process, that is, the first half of the target. A process (step S661) of loading the first half variable group information from the variable group information area is performed.
Next, the address of the first-half variation group table corresponding to the first-half variation group information is calculated (step S662), and then the second-half variation number is loaded from the target area (step S663). An address corresponding to the variable number is calculated (step S664).

Next, whether or not the latter half variation number is a reachless variation number is checked (step S665), and if the latter half variation number is a reachless variation number (step S666; YES), the target first half variation is determined. First half variation information 1 is loaded from the information 1 area (step S667).
If it is determined in step S666 that the second half variation number is not a reachless variation number (step S666; NO), the process branches to step S669, and after loading the first half variation information 2 from the target first half variation information 2 area, The process proceeds to step S668.
Next, in step S668, the calculated table is used to calculate an address corresponding to the first-half variation information, and in step S670, the address of the first-half variation selection table is acquired from the calculated address, and preparation processing is performed. .
Subsequently, in step S671, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the target area, and in step S672, a sorting process for specifying the first half fluctuation number is performed. Next, in step S673, a process for acquiring and preparing the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution process is performed, and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting process (steps S500 and S550) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the change start information setting process, first, after clearing the RWM save area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (step S681), the first half change time corresponding to the first change number acquired in the change pattern setting process A process of acquiring a value in the value table (step S682) is performed, and subsequently, a process of acquiring a first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is performed (step S683), and further obtained in the second half variation pattern setting process. Then, processing for setting the latter half fluctuation time value table corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is performed (step S684).

Next, a process of acquiring the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number (step S685) is performed, and then a process of adding the acquired first half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value (step S686) is performed. After that, the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S687).
Subsequently, after the fluctuation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is calculated and prepared (step S688), the value of the second half fluctuation number is prepared as a fluctuation command (ACTION) (step S689), and command setting processing ( Step S690) is performed.

Next, from the RWM decoration special command area, a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern information related to the decorative special figure variation display game is loaded and prepared (step S691), and command setting processing (step S692) is performed. Do.
Subsequently, a decoration special figure 1 hold number command (MODE) corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag (that is, related to the special figure hold number displayed on the display device 41) is prepared (step S693), and the variable symbol determination flag is set. The address of the random number saving area of the first special figure of the RWM corresponding to is set (step S694).

Next, the special figure hold number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated (-1) (step S695), and a decorative special figure hold number command (ACTION) corresponding to the special figure hold number is prepared (step S696). Then, command setting processing (step S697) is performed.
Then, among the first special figure and the second special figure, the random number save area of the fluctuation target special figure corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag is shifted (step S698), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step S699). ) To complete the variation start information setting process.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
Next, details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step S474) in the special-figure normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure changing process) is set in step S711, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the special game process number area in step S712. Save. In step S713, a non-customer waiting flag is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area. In step S714, a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step S715, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. In step S716, the symbol fluctuation control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control timer area, and the routine is terminated. .
In this way, the process for shifting to the special figure changing process for the special figure 1 is performed.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step S472) in the special figure usual process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure changing process) is set in step S721, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the special game process number area in step S722. Save. In step S723, a non-customer waiting flag is saved in the customer waiting demo flag area. In step S724, a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step S725, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area, and in step S726, the symbol fluctuation control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control timer area, and the routine is terminated. .
In this way, the process for shifting to the special figure changing process with respect to the special figure 2 is performed.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step S360) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special symbol changing process, first, a symbol stop command is prepared in step S729, and then in step S730, a command setting process (described later) is executed for the symbol stop command (prepared in step S729). The symbol stop command instructs the effect control device 300 to stop displaying the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this example, the symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board (game control apparatus 100) to the sub board (production control apparatus 300) as described above, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which the time is automatically measured on the sub-board side (that is, not depending on the command from the main board) and the design is stopped (stopping the variation display of the special design). It is not always necessary to transmit a symbol stop command from the main board. However, in this case as well, a process of receiving a symbol stop command may be left as a process on the sub-board side so that it can be used at the time of inspection or the like.
Next, in step S731, it is checked whether the symbol information is out of symbol information. If YES in step S732 (the symbol information is out of symbol information), the process proceeds to step S733, and the second half variation number changes without reach. Check if the number is The check result is determined in step S734, and if YES (variation without reach), a special figure display time pointer at the time of deviation is set in step S735. In step S736, a special figure display time table is set. In step S737, a special figure display time corresponding to the special figure display time pointer is acquired. In step S738, the special figure display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. To do. Thereafter, a special figure display transition setting process is performed in step S739, and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the second half variation number is not the variation number without reach in step S734, it is determined as NO (variation with reach), branching to step S740, and after setting the special figure display time pointer at the time of reach, step S736 is performed. Proceed to, and the subsequent processing is performed.
If it is determined in step S732 that the symbol information is not the symbol information (NO), the process branches to step S741 to set a special symbol display time pointer at the time of big hit, and then proceeds to step S736 to perform the subsequent processing.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (step S739) in the special figure changing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, "2" (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure display process) is set in step S751, and the process number (here "2") is set in the special figure game process number area in step S752. Save. In step S753, a signal related to the special figure 1 variation end process is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step S754, a signal related to the special figure 2 fluctuation end process is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step S755, a control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination number signal control timer area, in step S756, a stop flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area, and in FIG. Save the stop flag in the control flag area and end the routine.
In this way, a process for shifting to the special figure display process is performed.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step S361) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the special figure display process, first, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 is loaded (step S761), and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared (step S761). Step S762) is performed.
Next, it is checked whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step S763). Then, in step S771, a signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is saved in the test signal output data area, and the process proceeds to step S772.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S764 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step S764; NO), the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded. (Step S765), a process of clearing the RWM big hit flag 1 region (Step S766) is performed.
Subsequently, it is checked whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step S767). (Step S769), and the process proceeds to step S772.
If it is determined in step S768 that there is no big hit (NO), the process proceeds to step S787 in FIG. At this time, the processing is advanced after determining whether there is a short time.

Now, after saving the test signal relating to the special figure 1 big hit in step S769 or saving the test signal relating to the special figure 2 big hit in step S771, processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step S772) is performed.
Next, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the round number upper limit value is saved in the round number upper limit area (step S773). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LED pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step S774).
Next, a probability information command at the time of low probability related to the information that sets the probability of hitting results in the normal variation display game and the special variation display game as the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step S775). Then, command setting processing (step S776) is performed.
Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information is prepared (step S777), and command setting processing (step S778) is performed.

Thereafter, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern information related to the decoration special figure variation display game is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area (step S779), and a command setting process (step S780) is performed.
Next, the signal corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state is saved in the external information output data area (step S781), and the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the winning prize opening information is set (step S782). The big hit fanfare time is saved in the special game process timer area (step S783).
Thereafter, after resetting the illegal winning number area for the special winning opening (step S784), the illegal winning period illegal monitoring period flag area is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step S785).

Then, transition setting processing 1 (step S786) for setting various data for shifting to fanfare / interval processing, specifically, process number “3” relating to fanfare / interval processing, switching of various states A process for setting information is performed, and the special figure changing process is terminated.
Here, as information for switching the various states, for example, a signal indicating that the game state for output is a special game state (big hit state) on the external information terminal board 55, a general-purpose variation display game, and a special diagram variation A test signal indicating that the probability of a winning result in the display game is a normal probability state (low probability state), information on clearing the number of winnings to the big winning opening during the big winning opening fraud monitoring period, and the special gaming state Information related to clearing the number of rounds, information to turn off the game state display LED related to the display of a high probability state, information to set the probability of a hit result in a normal fluctuation display game as a normal probability state (low probability state), power failure Information for turning off the gaming state display LED (high probability notification LED) relating to the display of the high probability state that is turned on at the time of restoration, information for controlling the special figure variation display game (for example, in the special figure variation display game) Information indicating that the probability of a hit result is a normal probability state (low probability state), and the probability of being a hit result in a normal map change display game or a special figure change display game that is output to the effect control device 300 when a power failure is restored. For example, information indicating a normal probability state (low probability state), information on clearing the number of remaining time reduction fluctuations after a big hit), and the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S768 that the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step S768; NO) as shown in FIG. 51, as shown in FIG. A process for determining whether or not the time-short operation state is set and whether the time-short state is set to extend the opening time of the normal variation winning device 26 is performed (step S787).
Here, if it is determined that the gaming state is not in the time saving state (step S787; NO), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S788) for setting various data for shifting to the special figure normal process, specifically, Then, the process for setting the process number “0” or the like related to the special figure normal process is performed in the table, and the special figure display process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S787 that the gaming state is the time-short state (step S787; YES), the number of time-varying changes (time After updating (-1) the number of shortening fluctuations (step S789), processing for determining whether or not the number of time-varying fluctuations after the update is “0” (step S790) is performed.
Here, if it is determined that the number of short-time fluctuations is not “0” (step S790; NO), the process proceeds to step S788, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S790 that the number of time-varying fluctuations is “0” (step S790; YES), that is, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time-shortening state in which the special figure fluctuation display game is in the time-shortening operation state. ) Is completed, the probability information command for ending the short-time operation state of the special figure variation display game and the normal figure variation display game and the state of extending the opening time of the normal variation prize-winning device 26 (short-time state). Is prepared (step S791), and command setting processing (step S792) is performed.
Next, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of the short period) (step S793) for setting various data for shifting to the special figure normal process when the time reduction is completed, specifically, in the table, Process number “0” related to the special figure normal process, information related to the end of the state (short time state) in which the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal figure fluctuation display game are in the short-time operation state, and the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is extended. Is set, and the special figure displaying process is terminated.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 2 (at the end of short time)]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time reduction) (step S793) in the special figure display process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “0” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure normal process) is set in step S801, and the process number (“0” in this case) is set in the special figure game process number area in step S802. Save. Next, in step S803, a signal related to the end of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S804, a signal related to the end of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area.

  Next, at step S805, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area, and at step S806, the ordinary low probability & no power support flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area. Next, in step S807, a special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area, and in step S808, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery. Next, in step S809, the variable symbol determination flag area is reset, and in step S810, the special effect information (for distribution) area is reset and the process returns.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step S786) in the special figure display process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “3” (corresponding to the processing number related to fanfare / interval processing) is set in step S821, and the processing number (here, “3”) is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S822. Save. Next, in step S823, the signal related to the start of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S824, the signal related to the end of the high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area.

  Next, in step S825, the big prize opening illegal winning number area is reset, and in step S826, the round number area is reset. Next, in step S827, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area, and in the normal game mode flag area, the normal low probability & no power support flag is saved in step S828. Next, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is reset in step S829, the high probability notification flag area is reset in step S830, the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area in step S831, and the power failure is restored in step S832. Save the probability information command (low probability) in the time transmission command area. Next, in step S833, the short time variation count area is reset, and in step S834, the special effect information (for distribution) area is reset and the process returns.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step S362) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process during the fanfare / interval, first, a process of updating (+1) the number of rounds in the special gaming state (step S841) is performed, and then the opening time of the big prize opening in each round in the special gaming state (of the variable winning device 27) In order to determine the opening time of the opening / closing member 27b (hereinafter the same as appropriate), it is checked whether or not the special prize opening information is long open.
In addition, as the opening time (opening time of the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27) in each round in the special gaming state, the short opening time (for example, 0.8 seconds) and the opening time are short. Long open (for example, 25 seconds). For this determination, for example, a special winning opening release information determination flag is set, and it is checked whether the special winning opening release information determination flag is a long opening with a long opening time of the special winning opening (for example, 25 seconds). To do so.

The check result in step S842 is determined in step S843. If YES (long release with long open time), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step S844), and command setting processing (step S845) is performed.
Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern information related to the decoration special figure variation display game is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step S846), and command setting processing (step S847) is executed. Do.
Then, a process of setting a long opening (for example, 25000 ms = 25 seconds) having a long opening time as the opening time (opening time of the big winning opening) of the opening / closing member 27b of the variable winning device 27 in each round of the special gaming state (step S848). ) Is saved in the special game process timer (step S849).
Next, a process for setting a process for opening a prize winning opening process for setting various data for shifting to a process for opening a prize winning opening (step S850), specifically, a process number “4” related to the process for opening a prize winning opening. ”, A test signal relating to the opening of the grand prize opening, a control signal (ON signal) relating to driving of the grand prize opening solenoid 133 for opening the grand prize opening, information relating to clearing the number of prizes received in the big prize opening, etc. The setting process is performed and the fanfare / interval process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S843 that the opening time of the big prize opening is not long open (NO), that is, if the opening time of the big prize opening is short opening, the process proceeds to step S851. The opening time is set to a short opening (for example, 800 ms = 0.8 seconds), and the process proceeds to step S849.
Therefore, when the number of rounds per jackpot is 15, the opening time related to the long opening is saved as the opening time of the big prize opening in the special game processing timer, and when the number of rounds per jackpot is 2, As the opening time of the winning opening, the opening time related to the short opening is saved in the special game processing timer.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process]
Next, details of the process for setting the transition to the process for setting a special winning opening during the fanfare / interval process (step S850) will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, a process number “4” (corresponding to a process number related to the special winning opening opening process) is set in step S861, and a process number (in this case, “4” is set in the special game process number area). ). Next, in step S863, a signal related to the start of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area. As a signal relating to the opening of the big prize opening, there is, for example, a signal in which the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on.
Next, in step S864, ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area, and in step S865, the special winning opening count is reset and the process returns.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step S363) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big prize opening opening process, first, it is checked whether or not the big prize opening information is a long opening with a long opening time (for example, 25 seconds) (step S871). This is determined using, for example, a special winning opening release information determination flag.
If it is determined that the opening time of the special winning opening is long open (step S872; YES), the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. Thus, processing for checking whether or not the current round has reached the upper limit value (that is, the final round) is performed (step S873).

The result of the check in step S873 is determined in step S874, and if the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step S874; NO) as a result of the determination, an interval command relating to the interval between rounds is prepared. (Step S875), command setting processing (Step S876) is performed.
Subsequently, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern information related to the decoration special figure variation display game is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step S877), and a command setting process (step S878) is executed. Do.

  Next, a big winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step S879) for setting various data for shifting to the winning prize remaining ball processing, specifically, the process number “5” related to the winning winning opening remaining ball processing. ”, Processing for setting a processing time related to the big winning opening remaining ball processing to be saved in the special game processing timer, a control signal (off signal) related to driving the big winning opening solenoid 133 for closing the big winning opening, and the like. To finish the process during opening of the special winning opening.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S874 that the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step S874; YES), an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen is prepared at the end of the special gaming state. After performing the command setting process (step S876) (step S880), the process proceeds to step S877 and the subsequent processes are performed.
That is, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern information related to the decoration special figure variation display game is loaded and prepared from the RWM decoration special figure command area (step S877), and a command setting process (step S878) is performed. After that, the big winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step S879) for setting various data for shifting to the winning prize remaining ball processing is performed. Specifically, the processing number “5” relating to the winning ball remaining ball processing, the processing time relating to the winning ball remaining ball processing to be saved in the special game processing timer, and the winning port solenoid for closing the winning port. Processing for setting a control signal (off signal) and the like related to driving 133 is performed, and the processing for opening the special prize opening is completed.

  If it is determined in step S872 that the opening time of the big prize opening is not long open (step S872; NO), that is, if the opening time of the big prize opening is short opening (for example, 0.8 seconds), Without setting the interval command (step S876), the decoration special drawing command (step S878), and the ending command (step S874), the process proceeds to step S879 and the winning prize remaining ball process is performed. The winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process (step S879) for setting various data for performing is performed. Specifically, the processing number “5” relating to the winning ball remaining ball processing, the processing time relating to the winning ball remaining ball processing to be saved in the special game processing timer, and the winning port solenoid for closing the winning port. Processing for setting a control signal (off signal) and the like related to driving 133 is performed, and the processing for opening the special prize opening is completed.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the special winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step S879) in the above-described special winning opening open process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “5” (corresponding to the process number related to the big winning opening remaining ball process) is set in step S881, and the process number (here, “5”) is set in the special game process number area in step S882. ). Next, in step S883, a remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 ms) is set, and in step S884, the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Next, in step S885, the big prize opening solenoid output data area is turned OFF. Save data and return.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step S364) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the winning ball remaining ball processing, first, the current round number reaches the upper limit value by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area. It is checked whether or not (round) (step S891).
If it is determined in step S891 that the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step S892; NO), an interval time table is set (step S893), and the big prize opening information and the current round are set. The interval time corresponding to the number is acquired (step S894), and the interval time is further saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S895). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step S896) for setting various data for transitioning to the fanfare / interval process, specifically, the process number “3” relating to the fanfare / interval process, The processing time for the fanfare / interval processing to be saved in the game processing timer, processing for setting a test signal indicating the end of the operation of the variable winning device 27, and the like are performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

  On the other hand, as a result of the check in step S891, if it is determined that the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step S892; YES), processing for setting an ending time table (step S897) is performed, and the symbol information is handled. After obtaining the ending time (step S898), the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S899).

  Next, the jackpot end process transition setting process (step S900) for setting various data for shifting to the jackpot end process, specifically, the process number “6” related to the jackpot end process, and the blockage of the big prize opening Information related to clearing of each parameter in the test signal, special gaming state (for example, information relating to clearing the number of winnings to the big prize opening, information relating to clearing the number of rounds in the special gaming state, upper limit of the number of rounds in the special gaming state Information related to clearing the value, information related to clearing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds, information related to clearing the flag for opening information determination whether the opening time of the big winning opening is long open or short open), etc. The processing for setting is performed, and the winning ball remaining ball processing is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step S896) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “3” (corresponding to the processing number related to the fanfare / interval processing) is set in step S911, and the processing number (here, “3”) is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S912. Save. Next, in step S913, a signal related to the end of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area and the process returns. As a signal related to the end of the big prize opening, there is, for example, a signal obtained by turning off the special electric accessory 1 operating signal.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot end process transition setting process (step S900) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “6” (corresponding to the process number related to the big hit end process) is set in step S921, and the process number (here “6”) is saved in the special figure game process number area in step S922. To do. Next, in step S923, a signal related to the completion of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step S924, the winning prize count is reset, in step S925, the number of rounds is reset, and in step S926, the round number upper limit area is reset. Subsequently, in step S927, the round number upper limit value information area is reset, and in step S928, the big prize opening release information area is reset and the process returns.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, details of the jackpot end process (step S365) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big hit end process, first, it is checked whether the probability variation determination flag set in the stop symbol information setting process is a high probability entry flag (step S931), and the check result is determined in step S932. It is determined that it is not a rush, and the process proceeds to step S933.
In step S933, jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed. Since this is a state that is not a high-probability rush, a process for shifting to a mode that shortens the time after the big hit ends is set. Next, a probability information command corresponding to the probability variation determination flag is prepared in step S934, and command processing is performed in step S935.

In step S936, special effect information (for setting) is loaded and saved in the special effect information (for distribution) area. After that, special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step S937) for setting various data for shifting to the special figure normal process. A process for setting a flag for defining the monitoring period (big prize opening fraud monitoring information) or the like is performed, and the jackpot end process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the determination in step S932 is YES (high probability entry), the process branches to step S938 and the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed. Since this is a state of high probability rushing, it sets processing for shifting to a mode in which probability fluctuation (high probability start) occurs after the big hit. Next, the processing after step S934 is executed.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step S933) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area in step S941. A signal related to the start of a short time in this region is, for example, a big hit 2 signal ON. In step S942, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area. The signals related to the start of a short time in this area are as follows.
・ Turn on special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction status signal
・ Turn on special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction status signal
-Normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON
・ Turn on the normal signal 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal
・ Turn on the normal extension 1 signal
Next, in step S943, the number of the hour / hour is saved in the game state display number area, and in step S945, the low probability & hourly flag is saved in the special-purpose game mode flag area. Next, in step S946, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, and in step S947, the initial value (for example, 100) of the time fluctuation number is saved in the time fluctuation number area and the process returns.
In this way, the process of shifting to the mode that shortens the time after the big hit ends is performed.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step S938) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the external information output data area in step S951. The signal relating to the start of high probability in this region is, for example, a big hit 2 signal ON. In step S952, a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the test signal output data area. The signals related to the start of a short time in this area are as follows.
・ Turn on special symbol 1 high probability state signal
・ Turn on special symbol 2 high probability state signal
・ Turn on special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction status signal
・ Turn on special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction status signal
-Normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON
・ Turn on the normal signal 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal
・ Turn on the normal extension 1 signal
Next, in step S953, a high probability number is saved in the game state display number area, and in FIG. In step S955, the high probability & short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Next, in step S956, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery.
In this way, the process of shifting to a mode having a high probability after the end of the big hit is performed.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step S937) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “0” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure normal process) is set as a process number in step S961, and the process number (here, “0”) is set in the special figure game process number area in step S962. Save. In step S963, a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area.
Here, the signals relating to the end of the big hit include OFF of the big hit 1 signal and OFF of the big hit 3 signal.

In step S964, a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area. Here, the signals relating to the end of the jackpot are as follows.
・ Turn off the condition device operating signal
・ Off signal during continuous operation of equipment
・ Off signal per special symbol or signal per special symbol 2
Next, the probability variation determination flag area is reset in step S965, the round LED pointer area is reset in step S966, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area in step S967, and further in step S968. The special effect information (for setting) area is reset and the process returns.

Next, a description will be given of a flowchart relating to the usual game process. Here, “step B” is used as a step number.
[Normal game processing]
First, details of the usual game process (step S79) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 122 is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, the display of the usual figure is set, and the like.
First, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 122 is performed. The details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) will be described later.
Next, a general power prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring the input from the second start port switch 121 is performed. The details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) will be described later.

Next, the normal game process timer has already expired, or the normal game process timer is updated (-1) to check whether the game process timer has expired (step B3), If it is determined that the usual game process timer has timed up (step B4; YES), a process for setting a reference figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the usual game process number (step B5) ) To obtain a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number using the table (step B6).
Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step B7), the game branch process (step B8) is performed according to the game process number.

In step B8, if the game process number is “0”, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game is monitored, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game, the setting of effects, The usual figure processing (step B9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
Note that details of the normal processing (step B9) will be described later.
If the game process number is “1” in step B8, a normal map change process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process is performed.
The details of the normal map changing process (step B10) will be described later.
If the game processing number is “2” in step B8, and if the result of the normal variation display game is a win, the public power release depending on whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is supported A general map display process (step B11) is performed for setting the time and setting information necessary for performing the normal map processing.
The details of the normal map display process (step B11) will be described later.

In step B8, if the game process number is “3”, the process during the normal map process for setting the information necessary to continue the process during the normal map process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process ( Step B12) is performed.
The details of the normal processing (step B12) will be described later.
If the game process number is “4” in step B8, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the end process for each normal figure.
The details of the ordinary electric power remaining ball process (step B13) will be described later.
If the game process number is “5” in step B8, a normal figure end process (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (step B9) is performed.
Note that details of the normal hit end process (step B14) will be described later.
Then, after preparing various tables for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (collective display device 35) (step B15), the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (collective display device 35) is prepared. The symbol variation control process (step B16) according to is performed, and the regular game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the usual game process timer has not expired (step B4; NO), the process proceeds to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B21). Then, if it is determined that there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B22; YES), the number of pending maps is acquired, and it is checked whether the number of pending maps is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (step). B23) If it is determined that the number of ordinary drawings reserved is less than the upper limit (step B24; YES), a process of updating (+1) the number of ordinary drawings reserved (step B25) is performed.

Then, after performing the process of calculating the address of the random number save area corresponding to the updated number of pending reservations (step B26), the process of saving the acquired hit random number in the random number save area of the RWM (step B27) Then, the gate switch monitoring process ends.
Further, when it is determined in step B22 that there is no input to the gate switch 122 (step B22; NO), or when it is determined in step B24 that the number of pending maps is not less than the upper limit value ( Step B24: NO) The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned general game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the general power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, whether or not the normal figure changing display game is in a hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is performing a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) of opening operation (whether the normal figure winning figure is being hit) It is checked whether or not (step B31). If it is determined that the normal map is being reached (step B32; YES), it is checked whether or not there is an input to the second start port switch 121 (step B33), and there is an input to the second start port switch 121. If it determines with (step B34; YES), the process (step B35) which updates the count number of a utility counter (+1) will be performed.

Next, it is checked whether or not the count number of the updated electric power counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, 9) (step B36), and the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B37; YES). If it is determined, the hit end value “4” is saved in the normal process control pointer area (step B38). Thereafter, the ordinary game processing timer is cleared to “0” (step B39), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.
In other words, if there is a win-winning prize exceeding the upper limit during the hit state of the normal map, the hit end is set in the mid-process control pointer at that time and The hit state in the figure ends in the middle.

  In step B32, it is determined that the vehicle is not hitting the normal map (step B32; NO), or in step B34, it is determined that there is no input to the second start port switch 121 (step B34; No) Or, when it is determined in step B37 that the count number has not reached the upper limit (step B37; NO), the power receiving switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (step B9) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the usual map routine processing, first, it is checked whether or not the number of pending charts is “0” (step B41), and if the number of charts held is “0” (step B42; YES), After proceeding to Step B70 and performing the usual figure normal process transition setting process 1, the usual figure usual process is terminated. The normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 performs a process for repeating the normal figure normal process next time, and will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B42 that the number of pending maps is not 0 (step B42; NO), the process proceeds to step B43, where the probability of a hit result in the usual map fluctuation display game is higher than usual. It is determined whether or not it is in a probability state (that is, when a normal probability is high).
Here, if it is determined that it is not at the time of normal probability (normally variable winning device 26 is currently supported) (step B43; NO), the probability of a hit result in the general variable display game is not in a high probability state. From the random number save area, a random number is loaded and prepared (step B44), and a judgment value at the time of normal low probability is set (step B45).
Thereafter, it is checked whether or not the value of the hit random number matches the determination value (step B46). After the offset information is saved (step B48), processing for setting the stop symbol number at the time of shift is performed for the normal symbol stop symbol (step B49). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B50, and a process of clearing the random number saving area to “0” (step B50) is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B47 that the value of the hit random number matches the determination value (step B47; YES), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B51), and then the normal symbol stop symbol is hit. Processing for setting the stop symbol number at the time (step B52) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B50, and a process of clearing the random number saving area to “0” (step B50) is performed.
Also, if it is determined in step B43 that the normal figure has a high probability (step B43; YES), since the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game is in a high probability state, the random number save area is used. A winning random number is loaded and prepared (step B53), and a process of setting a lower limit judgment value at the time of normal probability (step B54) is performed.
Thereafter, it is checked whether or not the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B55), and if it is determined that the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step B56; NO), The process of setting the upper limit determination value (step B57) is performed.
Then, it is checked whether or not the value of the hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step B58), and if it is determined that the value of the hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step B59; NO), the process goes to step B51. After shifting and saving information for hitting a hit flag (step B51), a process of setting a stop symbol number at the time of hitting is performed (step B52) for the normal symbol stop symbol, and then the process shifts to step B50. Then, a process of clearing the random number save area to “0” (step B50) is performed.

  In step B56, it is determined that the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B56; YES), or in step B59, the value of the hit random number is determined to be greater than the upper limit determination value. Even in the case (step B59; YES), the process proceeds to step B48, and after the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (step B48), the stop symbol number at the time of shift is set in the normal stop symbol (Step B49) is performed, and then the process proceeds to Step B50.

Now, if the process has proceeded to step B50 via step B49 or step B52, the random number save area is cleared to 0 (step B50), and then the stop symbol number is displayed in the normal symbol stop symbol area. Is saved (step B60), and the signal corresponding to the universal symbol stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B61).
Subsequently, the process for shifting the hit random number save area (step B62) is performed, the process for clearing the free area after the shift is cleared (step B63), and then the number of pending reservations is updated (-1). The process (step B64) is performed.
In other words, in accordance with the execution of the map change display game related to the oldest general map hold 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the general map hold 2 to 4 that are held after the general map hold 1 is performed one by one. become. As a result of this processing, the value for the usual figure hold 2 to the usual figure hold 4 in the hit random number save area (for example, the hit random number) is moved from the usual figure hold 1 to the usual figure hold 3 in the hit random number save area. It becomes. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation 4 in the hit random number saving area is cleared and the number of usual figure reservations is decremented by one.

Next, a process of determining whether or not the normally variable winning device 26 is being supported (supporting ordinary power) (step B65) is performed. A process (step B66) for setting a usual fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) at the time of support is performed. Next, the process proceeds to step B67, where the normal time change time when there is the general power support set in step B66 is saved in the normal game process timer (step B67), and the process proceeds to step S68.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B65 that the normal support is not being performed (step B65; NO), the process branches to step B69 to set a normal fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) when there is no general power support. The process (step B69) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step B67, and the fluctuation time of the usual figure when there is no ordinary power support set in step B69 is saved in the ordinary figure game process timer.
Then, after the process of step B67, a normal chart changing process transition setting process (step B68) for shifting to the normal chart changing process is performed, and the normal chart normal process ends.

[Usual map transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B70) in the normal figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “0” (corresponding to the processing number related to the normal routine processing) is set in step B81, and the processing number (here “0”) is set in the general game processing number area in step B82. Save. Next, in step B83, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. As a result, the normal process is shifted to the normal processing next time.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process (step B68) during the normal map change in the above normal map normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the process of changing the normal map) is set in step B91, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the game process number area of the normal game in step B92. Save. Next, in step B93, a signal relating to the start of normal fluctuation (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step B94, the fluctuation flag is saved in the normal fluctuation control flag area. Next, in step B95, the variable timer initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the usual variable control timer area, and the process returns. As a result, the process shifts to the normal map change process next time.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process for changing the normal map (step B10) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, processing for setting transition to a normal map display process is performed in step B101. This is a setting for shifting to the normal map display processing, and details will be described later. After this processing, it returns.

[Transition setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal map display process (step B101) in the process for changing the normal map will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “2” (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing for displaying the normal map) is set as a processing number in step B111, and the processing number (here, “2”) is set in the general game processing number area in step B112. Save. Next, in step B113, a normal map display time is set (for example, 600 ms). Next, in step B114, the normal figure display time is saved in the normal game process timer area, and in step B115, a signal related to the end of the normal figure change (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. . Next, in step B116, the stop flag is saved in the usual figure fluctuation control timer area and the process returns. As a result, the process moves to the normal map display process next time.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the normal map display process (step B11) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process of displaying a normal figure, first, a hit flag set in the normal process of normal figure is loaded (step B121), and a process of clearing the hit flag area (step B122) is performed.
Next, it is checked whether or not the loaded hit flag is hit (step B123), and if it is determined that the hit flag is not hit (step B124; NO), the process branches to step B125 and the normal processing transition setting process is performed. 1 (described with reference to FIG. 69), and the process for displaying the normal diagram is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B124 that the winning flag is winning (step B124; YES), a process for determining whether or not normal power support is being performed (step B126) is performed.
If it is determined that the power transmission is being supported (step B126; YES), a process (step B127) for setting a power transmission opening time (for example, 1.7 seconds) when the normally variable winning device 26 is being supported is performed. After that, a process of setting a hit start pointer when the normal variation winning device 26 is being supported (step B128) is performed. That is, when the normal variation winning device 26 is being supported, the winning start pointers (for example, the winning start pointers “0” to “4” are set so that the number of times the normal variation winning device 26 is opened is two or more times). ”, Etc., but here“ 0 ”) is set. Subsequently, a hit start pointer is saved in the middle process control pointer area per hit (step B129).
Next, after saving the normal power open time (for example, 1.7 seconds) set in step B127 in the normal game process timer area (step B130), the normal process transition setting process (step B131) is performed. Do. This is a setting for shifting to the normal processing during the normal map, and details will be described later. After this processing, it returns.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B126 that ordinary power support is not being performed (NO), the process branches to step B132, and the normal variable winning device 26 sets a normal power open time (for example, 0.3 seconds) when there is no support. After performing the above, a process (step B133) of setting “4” as a hit start pointer when the normal variation winning device 26 is not supported is performed. When the winning start pointer is set to “4”, the number of times the normal variation winning device 26 is released is one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B129.
When the process proceeds to step B129 by this route, the hit start pointer (in this case, “4”) is saved in the normal processing control pointer area per normal map, and then in step B130, the general power release set in step B132 is performed. The time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the normal game process timer area, the normal process transition setting process is performed in step B131, and the process returns.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal map during the normal map display process (step B131) will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “3” (corresponding to the processing number related to the normal processing per ordinary figure) is set in step B141, and the processing number (here, “3”) is set in the ordinary game processing number area in step B142. Save. Next, in step B143, a signal related to the start of the normal signal (for example, the signal per normal symbol is turned ON) and a signal related to the start of the normal electric operation (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned ON) are output in the test signal output data area. To save. Next, in step B144, the ON data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area, the normal power count is reset in step B145, then the normal power fraud winning number is reset in step B146, and the normal power fraud monitoring is performed in step B147. Save the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag in the period flag area and return. As a result, the next time, the routine shifts to the normal processing.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal hit process (step B12) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the normal processing per normal map, first, the normal processing control pointer per normal map is loaded and prepared (step B151), and then the loaded normal processing control pointer per normal map is a hit end value (for example, “4”, etc. ) (Step B152), and if it is determined that the value is not the hit end value (step B153; NO), a process (step B154) for updating (+1) the normal process control pointer area is performed. Do.
Next, a general electric operation transition setting process (step B155) is performed. Here, the operation of ordinary power is controlled. Then return.
Further, when it is determined in step B153 that the value is a hit end value (step B153; YES), the process is not performed without updating (+1) the normal process control pointer in step B154. Is transferred to step B155, and the subsequent processing is performed.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the ordinary power operation transition setting process (step B155) in the above-described ordinary process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, branching is performed using the control pointer in step B161. Here, the process branches according to the value of the control pointer loaded and prepared in step B151. Specifically, if the control pointer is “0” or “2” in step B161, the process branches to step B162 to set a wait time (for example, 800 ms), and in step B163, the normal game process timer area is set. The wait time is saved, and in the subsequent step B164, the data is saved to OFF in the power transmission solenoid output data area, and then the process returns. As a result, the closing time after the normal variation winning device 26 is opened becomes the above-mentioned wait time, and the normal variation winning device 26 is blocked during this period.

On the other hand, if the control pointer is “1” or “3” in step B161, the process branches to step B165 to set a normal power open time (for example, 1700 ms) at the time of normal power support, and a normal game in step B166. After the normal power release time is saved in the processing timer area, the data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in step B167, and then the process returns. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 26 becomes the above-mentioned normal power opening time, and the normal variable winning device 26 is opened during this period.
If the control pointer is “4” in step B161, the process branches to step B168 to set “4” as the process number, and in step B169, the process number (here, “4”) is set in the usual game process number area. ). Next, in step B170, a normal power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is set, in step S171, the normal power remaining ball processing time is saved in the general game processing timer area, and in step B172, the normal power solenoid output data is saved. Save OFF data in the area and return. Therefore, when the control pointer is “4”, the power transmission release control is terminated, and information necessary for performing the next power transmission remaining ball process is set.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, in step B181, an end process transition setting process is performed for each normal map. This is a setting for shifting to a normal hit end process, which will be described in detail later. After this processing, it returns.

[Usual map end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal call end process transition setting process (step B181) in the above-described ordinary electric power remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, a process number “5” (corresponding to a process number related to the normal process end process) is set in step B191, and a process number (here, “5”) is set in the normal game process number area in step B192. Save. Next, in step B193, the normal ending time is set (for example, 100 ms), in step B194, the ending time is saved in the general game processing timer area, and in step B195, a signal relating to the end of the normal electric operation (for example, a normal electric accessory) (1) The signal during operation is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B196, the ordinary power count is reset, and in step B197, the middle processing control pointer area per ordinary figure is reset and the process returns. As a result, next time, the process shifts to the end process for each figure.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B14) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, a normal process transition setting process 2 is performed in step B201. This is a setting for shifting to the normal routine transition setting process 2 and will be described in detail later. After this processing, it returns.

[Usuzu usual process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B201) in the above-mentioned normal figure end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “0” (corresponding to the processing number related to the normal routine processing) is set in step B211 and the processing number (“0” in this case) is set in the normal game processing number area in step B212. Save. Next, in step B213, a signal related to the end of the normal drawing (for example, the signal per normal symbol is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B214, the fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. As a result, next time, the routine shifts to normal processing.

The flowchart related to the general game process has been described above. Next, a description will be given of a subroutine after step S80 in the above-described timer interrupt process.
Here, description will be made using “step C” as the step number.
[Segment LED editing processing]
First, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S80) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The segment LED editing process is a process related to the segment LEDs provided in the collective display device 35 (FIGS. 2, 4, and 5). As described above, the collective display device 35 displays ordinary maps and special diagrams. In addition, a special figure or ordinary chart start memory hold display (special figure hold display, universal figure hold display) and a game state display are performed.
These displays are configured by, for example, a plurality of indicators (for example, one lamp or a seven-segment indicator) using LEDs as light emission sources. More specifically, for example, special figure 1 hold indicator, special figure 2 hold indicator, universal figure hold indicator, first game state display part, second game state display part, error display part, round display part, etc. The segment LED editing process includes segment LEDs having functions, and performs settings related to their drive.

In the segment LED editing process, first, a process of updating (+1) the display control timer (step C1) is performed.
Thereafter, it is checked whether or not the display control timer is at the output ON timing (step C2), and if it is determined that the output is at the ON timing (step C3; YES), a process of setting the lighting pointer as the blinking control pointer (step) After performing C4), the process proceeds to step C5.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C3 that the output ON timing is not reached (step C3; NO), the process branches to step C6 and the process of setting the extinction pointer as the blinking control pointer (step C6) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step C5. Transition.
Here, the determination as to whether or not it is the output ON timing is to monitor the state of a specific bit. If it is “0”, it is determined that the output is not ON timing.
In particular, in this embodiment, when bit 5 of the display control timer is “1”, it is determined that the output is ON. At this time, for example, it is set so as to blink 128 ms.

When the process proceeds from step C4 or step C6 to step C5, in step C5, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved maps and the blinking control pointer set in step C4 or step C6 is acquired, and then the acquired display data is acquired. Are saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the usual hold display). Then, after acquiring the display data corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold, the acquired display data is saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display) (step C7).
Subsequently, after acquiring the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number, the acquired display data is saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the special figure 2 hold indicator) (step C8).

Next, after acquiring the display data corresponding to the round LED pointer, the acquired display data is saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the round display section) (step C9).
Subsequently, after acquiring the display data corresponding to the game state display number, the acquired display data is saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the first game state display part or the second game state display part) (step C10). ).

Next, the high probability notification flag related to notification that the probability state of jackpot is a high probability state at the time of power failure recovery is checked (step C11), and it is not the timing to notify the high probability (step C12; NO). If determined, the OFF data of the high-probability notification LED is saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the error display section) (step C13), and the segment LED editing process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C12 that it is the timing to notify the high probability (step C12; YES), step C13 is skipped and the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality, and fraud notification is set to start or end.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor detection signal bit output from the magnetic sensor switch 125 and taken into the second input port 162 (input port 2) is checked (step C21), and the magnetic sensor detection signal is input. If it is determined that there is no (step C22; NO), the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C23).
Thereafter, it is checked whether the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time has already expired, or after the magnet fraud notification timer has been updated (-1), the timer has expired (step C24). ). If it is determined in the determination result of whether or not the magnet fraud notification timer has timed up that the time has not expired (step C25; NO), the routine returns and the routine is repeated.
If it is determined by the repetition of the routine that the magnet fraud notification timer has timed up, it is determined that the time has expired (step C25; YES), a magnet fraud notification end command (ACTION) is prepared ( Step C26) After performing the process of setting the magnet fraud release flag as the magnet fraud flag (step C27), the process proceeds to step C34 and the subsequent processes are performed. In this case, even if the routine is repeated, since it is a normal state in which no fraud has occurred, fraud notification is not performed. That is, the magnet fraud notification timer is always up.

On the other hand, if a fraud using a magnet is performed and it is determined in step C22 that a magnetic sensor detection signal is input (step C22; YES), the magnet fraud monitoring timer is updated (+1), and then the timer is timed. It is checked whether or not the time is up (step C28), and if it is determined that the time is not up (step C29; NO), the process branches to step C24 and the subsequent processes are performed. In determining whether the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed out, it is determined that the time is up when the monitoring timer = 8. That is, the input of the magnetic sensor detection signal is interrupted eight times and continuously performed, so that it is determined that the time is up. This is because the sensing of the magnetic sensor switch 125 is 4 ms, and it is determined that the fraud has occurred in 32 ms. Therefore, if the magnetic sensor detection signal is turned ON by interrupting 8 times, it can be determined that the fraud is occurring.
Therefore, when the magnetic sensor detection signal is input continuously for a predetermined period, that is, a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 interrupts), the magnet fraud monitoring timer has timed out in step C29 (step C29; YES). If determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C30), and then the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step C31).

Next, a magnet fraud notification command (ACTION) is prepared (step C32), a magnet fraud occurrence flag is set as a magnet fraud flag (step C33), and the set magnet fraud flag is compared with the value of the magnet fraud flag region ( Step C34). If the set magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C35; NO), it is determined that a new magnet fraud has occurred and the process proceeds to step C36, where the set magnet fraud flag is set as the magnet fraud flag. Save to area. Thereafter, command setting processing is performed (step C37), and the process returns.
Therefore, at this time, the fraud notification is performed by the continuous ON input of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125. That is, fraud notification is started. As described above, the unauthorized start notification is started when the ON input of the magnetic sensor detection signal continues for 32 ms (that is, an unauthorized notification command is generated).

On the other hand, if the set magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C35; YES), the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 does not change. Return without doing. This is the case when the same magnet fraud continues.
After that, when there is no fraud, there is no ON input of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 in Step C22, and the process branches to NO in Step C22 and proceeds to the processing after Step C23. At this time, a fraud notification end command is set in step C37.

In addition, when the magnetic sensor detection signal is not input for a certain period, that is, for a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 interrupts), the occurrence of magnet fraud has not yet been determined (illegal notification is being performed). In step C29, after it is determined that the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step C29; NO), the process proceeds to step C24, and the subsequent processes are performed. .
Therefore, for the fraud notification end command, the fraud notification end command is set when 60000 ms further elapses from the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (60000 ms) from the start of the fraud notification command. That is, during the ON state of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 and for about 60000 ms (60 seconds) after the signal is turned off, the unauthorized notification is performed, and as long as the signal is ON, the unauthorized notification is continued. It will be.
In summary, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 is turned ON, after 32 ms, it is determined that a fraud has occurred, and a fraud notification command is set. While the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 is ON, the magnet is fraudulent every 32 ms. When the monitoring timer expires and returns to the initial value and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 125 is turned OFF, the fraud notification continues for about 60000 ms (60 seconds) from that point, and the fraud occurrence state is canceled after 60000 ms. An unauthorized notification end command is set.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S82) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, step C41 specific information signal editing processing is first performed. This is to acquire unique information (unique ID) of the main board, and details will be described later.
Next, in step C42, it is checked whether the security signal control timer has already expired or has expired after "-1" update. The security signal control timer checks fraud and gaming machine error status at regular intervals. The check result is determined in step C43. If NO, the process proceeds to step C44 to determine whether the unique information output request has been made. The unique information here is unique information of the main board, that is, unique ID.
If the unique information output request has not been requested in step C44, the process proceeds to step C45 to set the output request flag for the unique information signal when the power is turned on, and the output request flag for the unique information signal when the power is turned on in step C46. . As a result, the unique ID (specific information of the main board) is output to the outside when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (for example, when the store is opened). After step C46, the security signal ON output data is set in step C47, and then the process proceeds to step C48.

If it has already been requested to output the unique information in step C44, the process jumps to steps C45 and 46 and proceeds to step C47.
On the other hand, if the security signal control timer has already expired in step C43 or has expired after updating "-1", the process branches to step C49 to clear the output request flag of the specific information signal when the power is turned on. After setting the security signal OFF output data in C50, the process proceeds to Step C48. That is, if the security signal control timer has already expired, the external output of information related to security is not set.

Next, in steps C48, 51, and 52, it is determined whether a magnet fraud has occurred, a special prize opening fraud has occurred, or a general electric power fraud has occurred. If any one or more frauds have occurred, the process proceeds to step C53 to set the output data of the security signal ON, and further set the output data of the gaming machine error state signal ON in step C54.
As a result, fraud and gaming machine error states are output to the outside. On the other hand, if NO in step C48, NO in step C51, NO in step C52, that is, if all NO in steps C48, 51, 52, the process branches from step C52 to step C55 and the gaming machine error state signal is OFF. Set the output data.

After step C54 or step C55, the process proceeds to step C56 to determine whether the door or frame is being opened. Here, the door is the glass frame 5, and the opening of the door is detected by the glass frame open detection switch 211. The frame is the front frame 4, and the opening of the frame is detected by the front frame open detection switch 212.
If the door or frame is being opened, the process proceeds to step C57 to determine whether or not the unique information output has been requested. If NO (not requested), the unique information signal for opening the door / frame is determined in step C58. After setting the output request flag and setting the output requested flag for the unique information signal when the door / frame is opened in step C59, the process proceeds to step C60. Accordingly, at this time, when the glass frame 5 or the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened (for example, including unauthorized opening), a unique ID (specific information of the main board) is output to the outside. .

When the process proceeds from step C59 or C57 to step C60, the output data of the door / frame opening signal ON is set in step C60, the output data of the gaming machine error state signal ON is set in step C61, and the process proceeds to step C62. This is because an error signal is output to the outside when an event of door or frame opening occurs.
On the other hand, if NO in step C56, that is, if the door or frame is not open, an event of opening the door or frame does not occur, so there is no need to set such output data, and the process branches to step C63. Then, the output request flag for the unique information signal when the door / frame is opened is cleared, the output data of the door / frame opening signal OFF is set at step C64, and the process proceeds to step C62.

In step C62, it is determined whether or not the big hit operation is being performed. If the big hit operation is being executed, it is determined whether or not the unique information output has been requested in step C65. If NO (not required), the big win is determined in step C66. In step C67, the unique information signal output request flag is set. In step C67, the unique information signal output requested flag is set, and then the process proceeds to step C68. Therefore, at this time, when the big hit of the pachinko machine 1 occurs, the unique ID (the unique information of the main board) is output to the outside.
On the other hand, if the unique information output request has been made at the time of the big hit in Step C65, the process jumps to Steps C66 and 67 and proceeds to Step C68.
In Step C68, output data of ON signal for one jackpot is set, and then the process proceeds to Step C69 to perform the start port signal editing process, and in the subsequent Step C70, the symbol determination number signal editing process is performed and the process returns. This is to edit the signal to be output to the outside for editing the signal to be output to the outside when the starting prize is received or to confirm the symbol of the special figure.
On the other hand, when the big hit is not in operation at step C62 (NO), after branching to step C71 and clearing the output request flag of the unique information signal at the big hit, the output data of the big hit 1 signal OFF is set at step C72. The process proceeds to step C69. Therefore, when no big hit occurs, there is no output of the unique ID (the unique information of the main board) to the outside.

[Inherent information signal editing processing]
Next, details of the unique information signal editing process (step C41) in the external information editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step C81 whether serial communication is in progress. This is to determine whether or not the game control device 100 is executing serial communication with the management device 140 (or the card unit 551). If serial communication is being performed, the game control device 100 returns this time. If the serial communication is not in progress, the processing after step C82 is executed. The game control device 100 and the management device 140 are unidirectional communication, and only signal transmission from the game control device 100 to the management device 140 is allowed. Therefore, it is determined whether or not serial communication is in progress by checking whether or not the serial transmission buffer in the game control device 100 is communicating.
If serial communication is not in progress, it is checked in step C82 whether the output request flag for the unique information signal is set. If NO in step C83 (the output request flag is not set), the routine is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if YES in step C83 (output request flag is set), the process proceeds to step C84 to clear the output request flag of the unique information signal.
Here, the output request flag of the specific information signal is independently set corresponding to “security signal at power-on”, “door / frame opening signal”, and “big hit 1 signal”. If a plurality are established at the same time, priority is given and processing is performed one by one. Therefore, not all output request flags are cleared at once.
Next, CPU specific information acquisition processing is performed in step C85. This is a process of acquiring unique information, and details will be described later. After step C85, the process returns.

[CPU specific information acquisition processing]
Next, details of the CPU unique information acquisition process (step C85) in the above-described unique information signal editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step C91, a start code is written in the serial transmission buffer in the game control apparatus 100. This is a code for causing the management device 140 on the receiving side to specify that it is the start of serial communication. Next, in step C92, it is determined whether or not the acquisition is only the chip code (main board unique ID). If the acquisition is only the chip code, the process jumps to step C97, and the chip code identification code is written in the serial transmission buffer. The chip code as the individual identification information (unique ID) is read out, written into the serial transmission buffer, and the process returns. As a result, the unique ID is acquired and output to the management apparatus 140.

  On the other hand, if the acquisition is not only the chip code in step C92, the process proceeds to step C93 and the manufacturer code identification code is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the manufacturer code is read and written in the serial transmission buffer in step C94. Next, in step C95, the product code identification code is written in the serial transmission buffer, and in step C96, the product code is read out and written in the serial transmission buffer, and then the process proceeds to step C97. As a result, the manufacturer code and the product code are acquired and output to the management device 140. Therefore, when the acquisition is not only the chip code in step C92, the manufacturer code, the product code, and the chip code are sequentially acquired and output to the management apparatus 140.

In this way, by using the serial transfer (transmission) function provided in advance in the game control device 100, it is not necessary to prepare a transfer (transmission) process by a program (for example, a game program), so that the program configuration is Increased efficiency.
In addition, the number of wirings is reduced as compared with parallel transfer (transmission), thereby reducing the cost.
In addition, as described above, the unique ID and the like are not transmitted from the game control device 100 to the management device 140 by serial communication, but may be transmitted by parallel communication, for example.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step C69) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the first start port switch 120 or the second start port switch 121.
When the routine starts, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not “0”, a process of updating (−1) (step C101) is performed. The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0.
Next, it is checked whether or not the start port signal output control timer that is decremented by a predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) every time the timer interruption is performed is timed up (step C102). If it is determined that the start port signal output control timer is up (step C103; YES), it is checked whether the start port signal output count is 0 (step C104).

Here, if it is determined that the number of start port signal outputs is not 0 (step C105; NO), the start port signal output count is updated (-1) (step C106), and then the start port signal is output to the start port signal output control timer region. The output control timer initial value (for example, 192 ms) is saved (step C107).
Here, as an initial value of the start port signal output control timer, an on-state (eg, high level) time (eg, 128 ms) and an off-state (eg, low level) time (eg, 64 ms) of the start port signal are added. Save the time (eg, 192 ms).
This is because the start port signal output control timer set to the initial value (for example, 128 ms) starts to decrement (update (-1)) at the same time when the start port signal is turned on (high level). Even if the start port signal is turned off (low level) after the on-state time (128 ms) has elapsed, the start port signal output control timer continues to decrement, and the elapsed time after the start port signal is turned off. This is because the start port signal output control timer is timed up (“0”) when the time (64 ms) has elapsed.
Next, processing for setting ON data of the start port signal is performed (step C108). Thereafter, a process (step C109) of saving the start port signal set to ON in step C108 in the external information output data area is performed, and the start port signal editing process is terminated.
If it is determined in step C105 that the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step C105; YES), the process branches to step C110 and processing for setting OFF data of the start port signal is performed, and then step C109 is performed. Then, the start port signal set to OFF is saved in the external information output data area, and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C103 that the start port signal output control timer is not up (step C103; NO), the process branches to step C111 and the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). It is checked whether or not the start port signal output control timer is in the output ON period depending on whether or not it is.
If it is determined that the start port signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step C112; YES), the process proceeds to step C108 to perform processing for setting ON data of the start port signal (step C108), and then A process of saving the start port signal set to ON in the external information output data area (step C109) is performed, and the start port signal editing process is terminated.
If it is determined that the start port signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step C112; NO), the process proceeds to step C110 to perform processing for setting the start port signal OFF data, and then proceeds to step C109. A process for saving the start port signal set to OFF in the external information output data area is performed, and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

[Design determination frequency signal editing process]
Next, details of the symbol determination number signal editing process (step C90) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step C121, the OFF data of the symbol determination number signal is set, and in step C122, it is determined whether the symbol determination number signal control timer has already timed up or (-1) whether it has timed up after updating. To check. This is because the symbol is determined after a fixed time has elapsed and a signal is output to the outside for the determination of the symbol of the special symbol, and the elapsed time is counted by the timer.
The determination result of step C122 is determined in step C123. If the symbol determination number signal control timer is not up (NO), the process proceeds to step C124, the ON data of the symbol determination number signal is set, and the process proceeds to step C125. . In step C125, the symbol determination number signal (ON data in this case) set in the previous step C124 is saved in the external information output data area and the process returns.

When the routine is repeated and it is determined in step C123 that the symbol determination number signal control timer has timed up (YES), the routine jumps to step C125 and the symbol determination number signal (in this case, OFF data) set in the previous step C121. Is saved in the external information output data area and the process returns.
In this way, the symbol of the special figure is determined after a certain time and is output as external information.

[Command setting processing]
Next, details of each command setting process executed during the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the command setting process, first, a process (step C131) of updating a write counter that defines a buffer writing location is performed. The write counter is updated by (+1) in the range of “0” to “31”.
Subsequently, the command is saved in the command transmission area (MODE) corresponding to the write counter (step C132). This is because the upper one byte command of the two byte commands corresponds to (MODE), so that it is saved.
Thereafter, the command is saved in the command transmission area (ACTION) corresponding to the write counter (step C133). This is because the lower 1 byte command of the 2 byte commands corresponds to (ACTION), so it is saved. After step C133, the process returns.
In this way, the upper 1 byte command of the 2-byte command is saved in the command transmission area (MODE) corresponding to the write counter, and the lower 1 byte command is saved in the command transmission area (ACTION).

[Design variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process in steps S367 and S369 of the above-described special figure game process and step B16 of the normal figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step C141, it is checked whether or not the fluctuation control flag (read from (A) below) of the target symbol is changing.
Here, the information defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in advance is as follows.
(B) Address of fluctuation control flag area (b) Address of symbol display table (for fluctuation) (c) Address of symbol display table (for stoppage) Information defined on symbol display table (for fluctuation) Is as follows.
(D) Address of variable symbol number area (e) Display data (there are as many as the variable symbol number)
(F) Address of segment area Furthermore, the information defined on the symbol display table (for stopping) is as follows.
(G) Stop symbol number area address (h) Display data (the number of stop symbol numbers)
(Re) Segment area address

The check result of step C141 is determined in step C142, and if it is changing (YES), the process proceeds to step C143, and the symbol display table (for variation) (above (b)) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired. . Next, in step C144, the target variation timer is updated by (-1), and it is checked whether or not the time is up. The check result of step C144 is determined in step C145, and if the time is not up (NO), the process jumps to step C148, and the value of the target variable symbol number area is loaded as a display symbol pointer. Next, in step C151, display data corresponding to the display symbol pointer (above (e), (h)) is acquired, and the process proceeds to subsequent step C152, where the acquired display data is converted into the target segment area (above (f), (Re)) and save the routine.
Therefore, at this time, since the variation timer of the target symbol does not time out, the display data of the symbol corresponding to the symbol number for variation is saved in the target segment area, and the routine is repeated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C145 that the target variation timer has timed up (YES), the process proceeds to step C146, and the symbol variation control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the target variation timer area. Next, after updating the target variable symbol number (above (d)) in step C147, the process proceeds to step C148, where the value of the target variable symbol number area is loaded as a display symbol pointer, and in step C151, the display symbol pointer is loaded. The corresponding display data is acquired, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step C152), and the routine is terminated.
Therefore, at this time, since the variation timer of the target symbol is timed up, the timer initial value is saved, the variation symbol number is updated, and the display data of the symbol is saved in the target segment area.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation control flag of the target symbol is not changing but is stopped in step C142 (NO), the process branches to step C149, and the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol (above) (C)), and after loading the value of the target stop symbol number area as the display symbol pointer in step C150, the process proceeds to step C151, and the display data corresponding to the display symbol pointer is acquired and acquired. The display data is saved in the target segment area (step C152), and the routine is terminated.
Therefore, at this time, since the fluctuation control flag of the target symbol is stopped from being changed, the symbol display data for stopping is saved in the target segment area.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process in the latter half variation pattern setting process (step S650) and the distribution process in the variation pattern setting process (step S672) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step C161, it is checked whether or not the top data of the target selection table (variation group selection table) is a code without distribution.
Here, the selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern group. For example, if there is no need for distribution, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If it is determined that the top data of the selection table is a code without distribution (step C162; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step C168), and the distribution process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C162 that the top data of the selection table is not an unsorted code (step C162; NO), after the target variation pattern random number (for example, variation pattern random number 2) is loaded as a selection value (Step C163), the first distribution value specified in the selection table is acquired (Step C164).
Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step C164 from the selection value loaded in step C163 (for example, the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2), a new selection value is calculated (step C165), It is determined whether or not the calculated new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C166).

If it is determined that the new selection value is not smaller than “0” (step C166; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step C167), the process returns to step C164 to repeat the loop. .
That is, in step C164, after the distribution value specified next in the selection table is acquired, the new selection value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value using the new selection value determined in step C166 as the selection value. Calculate (step C165). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C166).
The above process is repeatedly executed until it is determined in step C166 that the new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C166; YES). As a result, one of the latter-half variation pattern groups is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern group defined in the selection table.
If it is determined in step C166 that the new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C166; YES), the process proceeds to step C168, where the data address corresponding to the distribution result is updated. (Step C168), the distribution process is terminated.

In this way, for example, a variation pattern random number 2 (random number for determining a reach variation detailed mode) is used to select a more detailed one from the latter-half variation pattern group distributed by the variation pattern 1. For example, from the normal reach group, select a specific production pattern such as a normal reach pattern that stops by -1 frame from the winning symbol, a -2 frame shift, a +1 frame shift, etc. . This is because the variation time varies depending on the number of frames to which the special map is sent. In addition, for example, when the SP1-A (special 1-A) reach system is used, a pattern in which symbols are normally aligned, or a pattern in which the symbols appear to have shifted once and re-variably align (referred to as so-called relief effects) (of course, There are various modes, such as the time of re-variation increases the variation time).
Therefore, by executing this distribution process, if the top data of the selection table is not a code without distribution, a new value is generated based on the distribution value stored in the selection table and the selection value related to the determination. By calculating the selection value and repeating the process of determining whether the new selection value is less than the predetermined value “0”, one of the plurality of variation pattern groups is quickly set. To be able to.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step S647) in the latter half fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation pattern group of the special figure variation display game from the variation group selection table such as the loss variation pattern selection table or the jackpot variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern random number 1. .
In particular, this is processing when the size of the random number is 2 bytes, and the 2-byte data includes, for example, “0” to “49999”.
When this routine is started, first, in step C171, it is checked whether or not the top data of the target selection table is an unallocated code.
Here, the selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern group. For example, if there is no need for distribution, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

If it is determined that the top data in the selection table is a code without sorting (step C172; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step C178), and the 2-byte sorting process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C172 that the top data of the selection table is not an unsorted code (step C172; NO), after the target variation pattern random number (for example, variation pattern random number 1) is loaded as a selected value (Step C173), the first distribution value specified in the selection table is acquired (Step C174).
Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step C174 from the selection value loaded in step C173 (for example, the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1), a new selection value is calculated (step C175), It is determined whether or not the calculated new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C176).

If it is determined that the new selection value is not smaller than “0” (step C176; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step C177), the process returns to step C174 to repeat the loop. .
That is, in step C174, after the distribution value specified next in the selection table is acquired, the new selection value is subtracted from the new selection value determined in step C176 as the selection value. Calculate (step C175). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C176).
The above processing is repeatedly executed until it is determined in step C176 that the new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C176; YES). As a result, one of the latter-half variation pattern groups is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern group defined in the selection table.
If it is determined in step C176 that the new selection value is smaller than “0” (step C176; YES), the process proceeds to step C178, where the data address corresponding to the result of distribution is updated. (Step C178) The 2-byte distribution process ends.

Thus, for example, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (reach fluctuation mode determination random number) is used to determine whether or not the reach state is generated in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation when the reach state occurs. This relates to the determination of the reach variation mode in the display game, and the above selection table corresponds to a variation group selection table such as a loss variation pattern selection table or a jackpot variation pattern selection table.
The variation group selection tables such as the loss variation pattern selection table and the jackpot variation pattern selection table indicate whether or not the reach state has occurred in the special figure variation display game and the reach of the special figure variation display game in the case where the reach state occurs. Depending on the type (reach variation mode), a plurality of types of latter-half variation pattern groups are defined, and the ROM 101B storing the variation group selection table stores the first special diagram and the second special diagram ( As a variation mode of the identification information), a plurality of variation distribution information (second half variation pattern group) and respective distribution values according to each setting of the reachless variation mode in which the reach state does not occur and the plurality of types of reach variation modes are set to a predetermined value. They are stored in association with each other in order.
Therefore, by executing this 2-byte distribution process, when the top data of the selection table is not a code without distribution, based on the distribution value stored in the selection table and the selection value related to the determination, A new selection value is calculated, and by repeating the process of determining whether or not the new selection value is less than the predetermined value “0”, any one of the plurality of variation pattern groups is quickly selected. To be able to set.

Next, control of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 157 and 159.
Here, “step D” is used as the step number. The special drawing controlled by the production control device 300 is a special drawing for production displayed on the display device 41. The special drawing in the description of the control processing of the production control device 300 below is the special drawing for production ( This means a decorative pattern that is not a special figure.

[Power-on reset processing]
First, the power-on reset process of the production control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
This power-on reset process starts when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.
When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started, the interrupt is first prohibited in step D1, the CPU 311 is initially set in step D2, the VDP 312 is initially set in step D3, and the interrupt is then set in step D4. Then, the main process of step D5 is started. When the main process is started, the main process is executed until the power is turned off (including a power failure).

[Main processing]
Next, the main process (step D5) in the above-described power-on reset process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the main process is started, first, a wireless module initialization process for initializing the wireless module 360 is executed in Step D11, and Steps D12 to D16 and Step D16a are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D17. Note that this example is an example in which communication between sub-boards in different pachinko machines (in this case, between the production control devices, hereinafter simply referred to as sub-sub) is performed by wireless communication, but is limited to wireless communication. Instead, it may be wired communication.

In step D12, the base address of the VDP 312 register is set. This is because the address space varies depending on the type of the CPU 311 and its setting, so that the base address is set and various designations are made based on the difference from the address.
In step D13, display data generation is permitted. This is a process for permitting the display circuit 608 to access the VRAMs 606 and 607 and generate display data.
In step D14, a random number seed is set. This is processing for setting a generation sequence of pseudo-random numbers using, for example, a srand function. Here, as an argument given to the srand function, a fixed value such as 0 (zero) may be used, or a value created based on an ID value of a CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine is used. Also good.

  In step D15, a terminal ID is set. This is a process of setting an ID for each machine (that is, for each gaming machine) based on the setting of the setting SW 371, for example. As the terminal ID to be set, the individual ID of the wireless module 360 or the like may be used. However, it is easier to specify the location information of the gaming machine in the island by manually setting with the setting SW or the like, and in the game hall It is easy to assign to the unit number. In other words, with the wireless module ID, it is difficult to specify the position information from the magnitude of the numerical value unless it is arranged in ascending order at the time of installing the gaming machine. For example, if the values of the terminal IDs are set in the order of the installed positions, it is easy to specify the installed position information from the terminal ID values. However, the method of setting the terminal ID from the ID of the wireless module has an advantage that it can be set automatically without bothering human hands. On the other hand, since setting of the terminal ID by the setting SW needs to set a different number for each stand by a human operation, there is a possibility that it may be impossible when busy such as when a gaming machine is introduced. Further, when using the ID of the communication module, there is an advantage that the cost is not increased because the setting SW is unnecessary. Since there are advantages and disadvantages as described above, it is necessary to select the terminal ID setting method according to the effect desired to be performed in the inter-sub-board communication. In this example, an effect that the notice character is made to appear on the display device 41 of each gaming machine sequentially from the leftmost gaming machine in the island (that is, the arrangement of gaming machines in the island (ID1, ID2, ID3,... ID10 from the left). In order to be able to realize an effect that needs to be specified), a setting method using the setting SW that makes it easy to specify the position information of the stand is given as an example. This terminal ID is provided for identifying a transmission destination and a transmission source in inter-sub-board communication.

In step D16, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later) is initially set.
In step D16a, a startup screen display process is executed. The start-up screen display process uses the information stored in the control ROM (PROM 321) without using the information stored in the CGROM (image ROM 322), and uses the information stored in the control ROM (PROM 321). In the example, this is a process for displaying a later-described startup screen or NG screen) on the display device 41, and details thereof will be described later.
Next, when proceeding to step D17, steps D17 to D24 are executed, and the process proceeds to step D25.
In step D17, random number update processing is executed. This is a process of updating the pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main process by using, for example, a rand function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on a specified generation sequence every time recalculation is performed, it is only necessary to execute the function. A random number that is updated by +1 may be used as in the main board (game control apparatus 100).

In step D18, a received command check process (described later) is executed.
In step D20, inter-sub transmission start processing is executed. This is a process of permitting an inter-sub-transmission interrupt when there is a request for inter-sub-command transmission. Depending on the performance, it may not be desired to send the command immediately, so time adjustment is also performed (details will be described later).
In step D21, inter-sub reception task processing is executed. This is a process that mainly analyzes the received inter-subcommand (details will be described later).
In step D22, inter-sub ack response task processing is executed. This is a process of performing monitoring when an ack (reply) is requested to another unit (details will be described later).

In step D23, inter-sub-effects setting processing is executed. This is a process of controlling the effect corresponding to the received inter-subcommand (details will be described later).
In step D24, an effect display editing process is executed. This is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41 (details will be described later). In this effect display editing process, commands are set in the form of a table, and the commands set in this way are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D28 (instructing screen drawing) to be described later.

  In step D25, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing. If it is the frame switching timing, steps D26 to D32 are sequentially executed. If it is not the frame switching timing, step D25 is repeated. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds≈33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of a V blank interrupt (also referred to as a V sink interrupt). It is the timing that arrives at a target interval. Subsequent processes (steps D26 to D32, and subsequent steps D17 to D24) are executed for each processing cycle at this frame switching timing by the process of step D25. Note that time management that needs to be synchronized with the contents of the effects is performed in units of frames (that is, in units of the processing cycles). When the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, 3 frames is 100 ms. This is similar to the case where the main board (game control device) manages time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt period.

In step D26, the watchdog timer is cleared.
In step D27, if there is a compression / decompression request, a decompression execution is instructed. This is a process of instructing the VDP 312 to reproduce the moving image when the moving image is reproduced because the moving image is compressed and stored in the character ROM (image ROM 322). (Details will be described later).
In step D28, the VDP 312 is instructed to draw a screen.
In step D29, an effect button input process is executed. This is a process of performing editing when the effect button 9 is pressed when it is valid. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the process for detecting the input of the button may be performed within this process, or may be performed within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown).

In step D30, sound control processing is executed (details will be described later).
In step D31, a decoration control process for controlling various LEDs and the like is executed.
In step D32, motor / SOL control processing for controlling various motors and SOL (solenoid) is executed.
In addition, although the control processing of steps D30 to D32 is performed in these steps in which operation switching is performed in units of processing cycles in order to match the presentation of the screen, signals generated or set by these control processing and The process of actually outputting data (especially signals for controlling driving of various LEDs and motors) to the port is performed within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Startup screen display processing]
Next, the startup screen display process executed in step D16a in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D1301, it is determined whether or not there is a defect in the peripheral circuit (component) in the effect control device. For example, in the case of the VDP 312, the CPU 311 checks the register of the VDP 312 in which the error status is indicated to determine whether there is a problem. If it is determined that there is a defect (abnormal), the process proceeds to step D1302 to display an NG screen (also referred to as an error screen), and if there is no defect (normal), the process proceeds to step D1303 to display a start-up screen. . Here, for example, the start screen is a screen for notifying that the effect control device 300 is normally in the process of starting (a state until the command is received from the game control device after the start) (a specific example will be described later). It is. The NG screen is, for example, a screen for notifying an error occurrence and the type of the error that occurred (a specific example will be described later). If the NG screen is displayed, it can be seen that the startup process is in progress, so the NG screen substantially informs that the startup process is in progress, and the peripheral circuit has started up with an abnormality. It can be said that this is notified.

In step D1302, the address of the NG screen parameter table corresponding to the error type of the fault that has occurred is set as control table pointer data for initial screen display, and then the flow advances to step D1304.
In step D1303, the address of the startup screen parameter table is set as control table pointer data for initial screen display, and then the flow advances to step D1304.

  Here, the data of the control table pointer for initial screen display is table-like control data for controlling the display of the initial screen (hereinafter referred to as the initial screen control table) as in the notice control table pointer described later. The stored address (for example, the head address). In other words, when the data of the control table pointer for initial screen control is determined, one of the plurality of initial screen control tables is determined (selected) corresponding to this data, and further specified in the initial screen control table. The position (line) of is specified. The pointer means a storage area of a RAM (RAM 311a in this example) in which data of an address such as a table address is stored. In this example, the types of initial screen control tables include an NG screen parameter table for displaying an NG screen and a startup screen parameter table for displaying a startup screen.

In addition, screen information is included in the control data constituting the initial screen control table. The screen information is constructed from a plurality of pieces of image information for displaying a target initial screen. The image information includes information on the shape, coordinates, and color of each image. In this example, as a drawing method for each image constituting the initial screen, either sprite drawing (specialized for rectangular display) or triangle drawing for displaying a triangle is selected and used depending on the shape of the image. . That is, sprite drawing is used for setting the background color of the screen and displaying a simple rectangular image, and triangle drawing is mainly used for displaying an image having a complicated shape such as a character. Further, the image information in each method has the following contents and configuration.
≪Image information of sprite drawing≫
-X and Y coordinates of the drawing area where the upper left of the image is placed-X and Y coordinates of the drawing area where the lower right of the image is placed-Color of the image << Image information of triangle drawing >>
-X and Y coordinates of the drawing area where vertex 1 is placed-X and Y coordinates of drawing area where vertex 2 is placed-X and Y coordinates of drawing area where vertex 3 is placed-Color of the image

  Next, in step D1304, image information at a specific position (row) in the initial screen control table designated by the control table pointer data set in step D1302 or D1303 is read to determine whether this is a triangle drawing or not. If it is a triangle drawing, steps D1305 to D1313 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D1321. If it is not a triangle drawing (ie, if it is a sprite drawing), steps D1314 to D1320 are executed sequentially, and then the process proceeds to step D1321.

In step D1305, the X coordinate of vertex 1 is acquired. Here, “to acquire” means to extract data from the PROM 321 (the same applies hereinafter).
In step D1306, the Y coordinate of vertex 1 is acquired.
In step D1307, the X coordinate of vertex 2 is acquired.
In step D1308, the Y coordinate of vertex 2 is acquired.
In step D1309, the X coordinate of the vertex 3 is acquired.
In step D1310, the Y coordinate of vertex 3 is acquired.
In step D1311, image color data is acquired.
In step D1312, a drawing effect is set.
In step D1313, the triangle is pasted into the virtual drawing space.
Triangle drawing preparation (preparation for drawing one line of the initial screen control table) is realized by the processing of steps D1305 to D1313 described above.

In step D1314, the upper left X coordinate is acquired.
In step D1315, the upper left Y coordinate is acquired.
In step D1316, the lower right X coordinate is acquired.
In step D1317, the lower right Y coordinate is acquired.
In step D1318, image color data is acquired.
In step D1319, a drawing effect is set.
In step D1320, a sprite (in this case, specialized for rectangular display) is pasted into the virtual drawing space.
Preparation of sprite drawing (preparation of drawing for one line of the initial screen control table) is realized by the processing of steps D1314 to D1320 described above.

Next, when proceeding to step D1321, an update for increasing the data of the control table pointer by 1 is executed. As a result, the line designated in the initial screen control table (the line referenced for the initial screen display control) is switched to the next line.
After step D1321, it is determined in step D1322 whether the control table pointer data specifies the last line of the initial screen control table. If it is the last line, the process proceeds to step D1323; The processing after step D1304 is repeated for the next row. Thus, preparation for displaying each image (each image constituting the initial screen) designated by each row of the selected initial screen control table is executed.
In step D 1323, the VDP 312 is instructed to execute drawing of the initial screen prepared by the above processing, and then the process returns.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, command reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 (main board) by the effect control apparatus (sub board), and the data constituting the command falls within a normal range. The content to check whether it is included is also included.
In the case of this example, the case where the communication between the main board and the sub board is performed by parallel communication using a strobe signal (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an STB signal) will be described as an example.
This command reception interrupt process is started when the strobe signal described in the control process of the game control apparatus 100 (main board) is turned on and a command reception interrupt is generated in the effect control apparatus 300 (sub board). That is, the strobe signal output from the main board is also input to the interrupt terminal (not shown) of the CPU 311 of the sub board, and the command reception is performed when the strobe signal input to the interrupt terminal is turned on. An interrupt occurs. Here, this command reception interrupt has a higher interrupt priority than the above-described V blank interrupt. The command reception interrupt occurs irregularly as described above, but when the main board transmits commands continuously, the command reception interrupt occurs on the sub board corresponding to the transmission interval (for example, 4 msec). The interval is also the same interval (for example, 4 msec).
The command from the main board includes MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), which are sequentially transmitted. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

When this routine is started, first, the reception monitoring timer is stopped in step D41, and then it is determined in step D42 whether the STB signal input to the port is off. If it is off, the MODE reception flag is set to “NG” in step D59. Is returned (end of this routine), and if it is not off (that is, if it is on), the command from the main board inputted at this time is inputted (read) at step D43. Since 8-bit parallel communication is used, 1-byte (8-bit) data is input at a time in step D43.
Here, the determination result of step D42 is normally NO, and the process proceeds to step D43. This routine is started when the STB signal is turned on as described above. However, if a command reception interrupt occurs abnormally due to noise or the like, if the STB signal of the port input is off, the determination result in step D42 is YES and the process proceeds to step D59. It is avoided that the process (steps D43 to D58) is executed.

After step D43, in step D44, it is determined based on the value of the data whether the command data input in step D43 is within the MODE range. If not, the process proceeds to Step D48 because it is within the ACTION range. The MODE range is a range of values within 1 byte that can be set as MODE data, and the ACTION range is a range of values within 1 byte that can be set as ACTION data. .
When the process proceeds to step D45, the command data input at step D43 is stored as the reception MODE, then at step D46, the MODE reception flag is set to “OK”, and at step D47, the value of the reception monitoring timer is reset to zero. Then, the timing operation of the reception start timer is started, and then the process returns. As used in step D45 above, simply storing means storing in a predetermined storage area so that it can be read for use in later control processing (the same applies hereinafter).

  Proceeding to step D48, it is determined whether the value of the MODE reception flag is “OK”. If it is “OK”, it is further determined at step D49 whether the reception monitoring timer has timed out. Proceed to If the value of the MODE reception flag is not “OK” in step D48 and if the time-out has occurred in step D49, the command could not be received normally, so “NG” is set in the MODE reception flag in step D59. Then return. If the value of the MODE reception flag is not “OK” in step D48, it is abnormal because, for example, command data in the ACTION range has been received, but command data in the MODE range has not been received prior to that. If the time-out has occurred at step D49, it is abnormal because the command data in the ACTION range is not received within the specified reception monitoring time counted by the reception monitoring timer from the time when the command data in the MODE range is received. .

In step D50, the command data input in step D43 is stored as a reception ACTION. Next, in step D51, the value of the MODE reception flag is set to “NG”, and the flow proceeds to step D52.
In step D52, it is determined whether or not the value of the command reception counter is larger than 31, and if it is larger, it returns because it exceeds the capacity of a command buffer, which will be described later. move on. Although the command reception counter value is 0 to 31 and the process proceeds to step D53, the values 0 to 31 are values corresponding to the capacity of the command buffer described later, and the system control cycle (the above-described processing cycle; It is sufficient that the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board in 1/30 seconds) is exceeded.

In step D53, a presentation operation corresponding to reception MODE and reception ACTION is prepared. Next, in step D54, a reception command range check process (described later) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D55.
In step D55, it is determined whether or not the range check is OK. If it is not OK, the process returns to discard the command (reception MODE and reception ACTION). If OK, the process returns after sequentially executing steps D56 to D58. Here, the determination result of the range check in step D55 is a range check OK (step D55 is Yes) if the command range normal flag is set in the receive command range check process described later, and the receive command range check process described later. If the command range abnormality flag is set at, the range check is not OK (step D55 is No).

In step D56, the reception MODE and the reception ACTION are stored in the command buffer. The command buffer is a so-called ring buffer in this example, and has a specified capacity (the number of commands that can be stored). This command buffer is constituted by a storage area in the RAM of the CPU 311, for example.
In step D57, updating is performed to increase the value of the command reception counter by one.
In step D58, since the data is stored (that is, written) in the command buffer, the command write index value is updated by 1 in the range of 0 to 31. The command write index is a command buffer write pointer, and the value of this command write index is in the range of 0 to 31 in this example, but this range is the capacity of the command buffer (in this case, 32). As described above, the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board in one cycle of the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second) is greater than the number of commands. That's fine.

[Received command range check processing]
Next, details of the received command range check process (step D54) in the above-described command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step D61, it is determined whether the value of the received MODE stored at step D45 is within the normal range. If it is not within the normal range, the command range abnormality flag is set at step D67 and the process returns. If it is within the range, steps D62 and D63 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D64. The MODE values are not all of the values in the MODE range in which the command contents are defined, and there are values that are not defined and are not used. In the determination of D61, it is determined that it is not in the normal range.

In step D62, a minimum value (ACTION_min) is acquired from the possible values of ACTION corresponding to the value of the reception MODE stored in step D45. In the present application, “acquiring” data in the control process in this manner means that data is extracted from the ROM (PROM 321 in the production control device 300 of this example).
In step D63, the maximum value (ACTION_max) among the possible values of ACTION corresponding to the value of the reception MODE stored in step D45 is acquired.
When the process proceeds to step D64, it is determined whether the value of the reception ACTION stored at step D50 is smaller than the minimum value acquired at step D62. Proceed to step D65.

In step D65, it is determined whether the value of the reception ACTION stored in step D50 is larger than the maximum value acquired in step D63. If it is larger, the process proceeds to step D67. Proceed to step D66.
If the process proceeds to step D66, it is normal, so the command range normal flag is set and the process returns. If the process proceeds to step D67, it is abnormal, so the command range abnormality flag is set and the process returns.

[Received command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (step D18) in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D71, the value of the command reception counter is loaded as the command reception number. Next, in step D72, it is determined whether the command reception number is not zero. After execution, the process proceeds to step D76, and if zero, the process returns. In the present application, as in step D71, “loading” data in the control process means that data is extracted from the RAM (RAM in the CPU 311 in the effect control apparatus 300 of this example).

In step D73, the content of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) is subtracted by the number of command receptions.
Assuming that A is the value of the command reception counter and B is the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after execution of step D71. Immediately after execution of step D73, “A = A−B = 0” is a normal movement, but in the aspect of this example (when the command from the main board is parallel communication using a strobe signal) Since the control device gives the highest priority to the command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board) without prohibiting the interrupt, there is a possibility that the value of A increases from the processing of step D71 to the processing of step D73. . Therefore, if the process at step D73 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count is shifted. Therefore, at step D73, the subtraction process “A−B” is performed. Is going. However, when serial communication is used for transmission / reception of commands from the main board, the interrupt is disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D71 and the processing of step D73. The processing content of step D73 may be “A ← 0”.

In step D74, the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer in step D56, hereinafter simply referred to as command buffer) (that is, command data stored at the address corresponding to the read pointer) are stored in the command area (in some cases, command To the storage area). The command area is a storage area in the RAM of the CPU 311 that constitutes a buffer in a so-called FIFO format (first-in first-out format), for example.
In step D75, since the data in the command buffer has been read, updating is performed by increasing the value of the command read index, which is a command buffer read pointer, by 1 in the range of 0 to 31. Here, the range of 0 to 31 may be the same range as the command write index updated in step D58.

  When the process proceeds to step D76, it is determined whether or not copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D74 and D75 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). Returning to step D74, the process is repeated from step D74. If completed, the process proceeds to step D77.

When the process proceeds to step D77, the contents of the command area (the data stored first in the data not yet read in the command area, that is, the data to be read next) are loaded (that is, read), With respect to the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the current command), a received command analysis process (described later) is executed in the next step D78, and the process proceeds to step D79.
In step D79, the address of the command area (address of data to be read next) is updated, and the process proceeds to step D80.
In step D80, it is determined whether or not analysis of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D77 to D79 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). If not completed, the process returns to step D77. The process is repeated from step D77, and if completed, the process returns.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (step D78) in the received command check process described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, first, in Step D91, the values of ExMode and ExAct are cleared. ExMode and ExAct are storage areas in which command data is recorded separately in upper bytes and lower bytes in steps D125, D127, and D158, which will be described later.

  After step D91, in step D92, the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D77 is stored in MODE and the lower byte is stored separately in ACT, and then the process proceeds to step D93. In the case of a fluctuation-type command for instructing a special pattern fluctuation pattern, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. Is.

  In step D93, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the variable command range 1. If it is within this range, steps D94 and D95 are executed in sequence, and the process proceeds to step D96. If it is outside this range, the process proceeds to step D99. Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D92 (the same applies to steps D99, D111, D112, D113, D114, D131, D132, D145, and D146 described later). In addition, the same type of variation commands that command the variation pattern of the special figure are grouped, and the range of values that can be taken by the command data belonging to the first group (normal variation system) is the variation system. Command range 1. Similarly, the range of values that can be taken by command data belonging to the second group (reach variation system) is the variation command range 2, and the range of values that can be taken by command data belonging to the third group (sudden variation system) varies. The system command range is 3.

In step D94, a normal variation type symbol type information table is prepared. The symbol type information table is a table for setting a symbol type of a special symbol corresponding to command data. Note that the data of the symbol type information table, etc., that is, various information used in the control process of the effect control device 300 (for example, data of various tables) is stored in advance in the PROM 321 together with the operation program.
In step D95, a variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process (details will be described later) for setting symbol type information corresponding to the current command is executed.

In step D96, it is determined whether invalid command information is returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process in step D95. If invalid command information is returned, the current command is returned as an invalid command and invalid. If the command information is not returned, it is determined that the command is valid and the process proceeds to step D97.
When the process proceeds to step D97, the data of the current command is stored as cmd1st (the first command of the first command and the second command forming the pair), and then, in step D98, the data corresponding to the variation pattern commanded by the current command is stored. The symbol type information of the special symbol (the one set in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process in step D95) is stored as standby symbol information, and then the process proceeds to step D162. The standby symbol information is a symbol symbol corresponding to a symbol symbol that should be set from a first command (such as a variable command) transmitted prior to a symbol command (second command) described later. It is type information (that is, symbol information) of the special figure stored and saved before reception.

When it proceeds to step D99, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range 2. If it is within this range, steps D100 and D101 are sequentially executed to proceed to step D102. .
In Step D100, a reach variation system symbol type information table is prepared.
In step D101, a variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process (described later) is executed for the current command.

In step D102, it is determined whether invalid command information is returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process in step D101. If invalid command information is returned, the current command is returned as an invalid command, and invalid. If the command information is not returned, it is determined that the command is valid and the process proceeds to step D103.
In step D103, the data of the current command is stored as cmd1st, and then in step D104, special symbol information corresponding to the variation pattern commanded by the current command (set in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process in step D101). Stored) as standby symbol information, and then proceeds to step D162.

When it proceeds to step D111, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range 3. If it is within this range, steps D115 and D116 are executed in sequence, and the process proceeds to step D117. .
In step D115, a sudden variation system symbol type information table is prepared.
In step D116, a variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process (described later) is executed for the current command.

In step D117, it is determined whether invalid command information is returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process in step D116. If invalid command information is returned, the command is returned as an invalid command, and invalid. If the command information is not returned, it is determined that the command is valid and the process proceeds to step D118.
In step D118, the data of the current command is stored as cmd1st, and then in step D119, special symbol information corresponding to the variation pattern commanded by the current command (set in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process in step D116). Stored) as standby symbol information, and then proceeds to step D162.

When the process proceeds to Step D112, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. If the MODE data is within this range, Steps D120 and D121 are executed in sequence, and the process proceeds to Step D162. The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to the big hit effect (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.), and the range that can be taken by the data of the jackpot command is the jackpot command range.
In step D120, the current command data is stored as cmd1st. In step D121, special symbol information (information such as 15R big hit symbol, 2R big hit symbol) corresponding to the ACT data of the current command is stored. The information is stored as standby symbol information, and then the process proceeds to step D162.
Here, in steps D120 and D121, MODE and ACT data are not used unconditionally. Although not shown in the figure, for example, a missing tooth check of MODE data is performed, and further, it is adopted after checking whether it is a normal ACT value corresponding to the MODE. If the command is determined to be a correct command, the MODE and ACT data are discarded and the process returns.
Note that the missing tooth check of MODE data means that it is determined whether or not the MODE data to be checked corresponds to an invalid value in a portion where values that MODE can take are not continuous. This missing tooth check of the MODE data is only a determination of whether the determination in step D112 etc. is not less than the minimum value that the MODE data can take and not more than the maximum value (determination that does not check the discontinuous portion). If necessary, for example, it is executed immediately before step D120. If there is no discontinuous portion in the MODE value, this missing tooth check is unnecessary. Further, in steps D93, D99, D111, D112, and steps D113, D114, D131, D132, D145, D146, D172, which will be described later, such a missing data check of MODE data is included in the determination contents as necessary. In the case of this configuration, it is not necessary to separately perform the missing tooth check of the MODE data. Also, there may be missing teeth (discontinuous portions) in the normal value of ACT. In this case, for example, when checking whether the value is normal ACT corresponding to MODE, In addition to the range check, the tooth missing check is also performed.

When the process proceeds to step D113, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol command range. If the MODE data is within this range, step D122 is executed and the process proceeds to step D123. The symbol command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the special symbol is to be stopped).
In step D122, special symbol information corresponding to the ACT data of the current command (symbol command) is acquired.

Proceeding to step D123, the symbol information acquired in step D122 is compared with the standby symbol information at that time (the symbol information set in any of the aforementioned steps D98, D104, D119, D121), and the two match. If so, the process proceeds to step D124, and if both do not match, the process proceeds to step D126. The determination result in step D123 is normally affirmative (both coincide), but if an abnormality such as an abnormal command value (the command value changes to an abnormal value due to noise or the like) occurs, It becomes negative (they do not agree).
In step D124, stop symbol information to be generated corresponding to the symbol information acquired in step D122 is set, and the procedure proceeds to step D125.
In step D125, the upper byte of the command data stored as cmd1st is set as ExMode (determined MODE data), and the lower byte is separated and stored as ExAct (determined ACT data), and then in step D126. move on.
In step D125, after storing the command data as ExMode and ExAct, the process of deleting the command data stored as cmd1st is also executed. With this erasure, the determination result in step D162 described later becomes NO.
When the process proceeds to step D126, the standby symbol information is cleared, and the process proceeds to step D162.

In step D114, it is determined whether the MODE data is a single command. If it is a single command, steps D127 and D128 are sequentially executed, and the flow advances to step D162. If not, the flow advances to step D131. Unlike a command that makes sense by a combination such as a variable command and a symbol command (that is, a first command and a second command), a command that is established independently is called a single command. The single command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, and a model designation command.
In step D127, the MODE data of the current command is stored as ExMode, and the ACT data of the current command is stored as ExAct.
In step D128, the standby symbol information is cleared, and the process proceeds to step D162.
Here, in steps D127 and D128, MODE and ACT data are not unconditionally adopted as in steps D120 and D121 described above. Although not shown in the figure, for example, a missing tooth check of MODE data is performed, and further, it is adopted after checking whether it is a normal ACT value corresponding to the MODE. If the command is determined to be a correct command, the MODE and ACT data are discarded and the process returns.

  When it proceeds to step D131, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the pre-reading variation command range 1, and if it is within this range, steps D133 and D134 are sequentially executed to proceed to step D135. move on. Here, the prefetch fluctuation command is a command for instructing a special pattern fluctuation pattern for performing prefetching (for example, special figure jackpot notice), and the same kind of prefetch fluctuation commands are grouped. The range of values that can be taken by command data belonging to the first group (the normal variation system for prefetching) is the prefetching variation system command range 1. Similarly, the range of values that command data belonging to the second group (prefetching reach fluctuation system) can take is the prefetching fluctuation command range 2, and command data belonging to the third group (prefetching sudden fluctuation system) can take. The range of values is the prefetch fluctuation command range 3.

In step D133, a pre-read normal variation system symbol type information table is prepared.
In step D134, a variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process (described later) is executed for the current command.

When the process proceeds to step D135, it is determined whether invalid command information is returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process of step D134. If invalid command information is returned, the current command is returned as an invalid command and invalid. If the command information is not returned, it is determined that the command is valid and the process proceeds to step D136.
In step D136, the data of the current command is stored as cmd1st, and in step D137, special symbol type information corresponding to the variation pattern commanded by the current command (in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process in step D134). Stored) as standby symbol information, and in step D138, prefetch information setting processing 1 is executed, and then the flow proceeds to step D162. Note that the prefetch information setting process 1 and the prefetch information setting process 2 described later are processes for performing a special pattern fluctuation pattern (or start memory hold display) when prefetching is performed.

When the process proceeds to step D132, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the look-ahead variation command range 2. If it is within this range, steps D139 and D140 are sequentially executed and the process proceeds to step D141. move on.
In step D139, a look-ahead reach variation system symbol type information table is prepared.
In step D140, a variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process (described later) is executed for the current command.

When the process proceeds to step D141, it is determined whether invalid command information is returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process of step D140. If invalid command information is returned, the current command is returned as an invalid command and invalid. If the command information is not returned, it is determined that the command is valid and the process proceeds to step D142.
In step D142, the data of the current command is stored as cmd1st. Next, in step D143, the special symbol type information corresponding to the variation pattern commanded by the current command (in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process in step D140). Stored) as standby symbol information, and in step D144, prefetch information setting processing 1 is executed, and then the flow proceeds to step D162.

When it proceeds to step D145, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the pre-reading variation command range 3. If it is within this range, steps D150 and D151 are executed in sequence, and the process proceeds to step D152. move on.
In step D150, a look-ahead sudden variation system symbol type information table is prepared.
In step D151, a variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process (described later) is executed for the current command.

In step D152, it is determined whether invalid command information is returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process in step D151. If invalid command information is returned, the command is returned as an invalid command and invalid. If the command information is not returned, it is determined that the command is valid and the process proceeds to step D153.
Proceeding to step D153, the data of the current command is stored as cmd1st, and then in step D154 special symbol type information corresponding to the variation pattern commanded by the current command (in the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process of step D151). Stored) as standby symbol information, and in step D155, prefetch information setting processing 1 is executed, and then the flow proceeds to step D162.

When the process proceeds to step D146, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the pre-read symbol command range. If it is within this range, step D156 is executed and the process proceeds to step D157. If it is outside this range, the process proceeds to step D162. The prefetch symbol command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol when prefetching is performed (for example, what the special symbol is to be stopped), and the range of data of the prefetch symbol command can be taken. This is the pre-read symbol command range.
In step D156, the symbol information of the special figure corresponding to the ACT data of the current command is acquired.

Proceeding to step D157, the symbol information acquired at step D156 is compared with the standby symbol information at that time (the symbol information set in any of the above-mentioned steps D137, D143, D154, etc.), and the two match. If not, the process proceeds to step D158. If the two do not match, the process proceeds to step D159. The determination result in step D157 is normally affirmative (both coincide), but if an abnormality such as an abnormal command value (the command value changes to an abnormal value due to noise or the like) occurs, It becomes negative (they do not agree).
When the process proceeds to step D158, the upper byte of the command data stored as cmd1st is stored as ExMode and the lower byte is stored as ExAct, and then the process proceeds to step D159.
In step D158, after storing the command data as ExMode and ExAct, the process of deleting the command data stored as cmd1st is also executed. With this erasure, the determination result in step D162 described later becomes NO.
When the process proceeds to step D159, the standby symbol information is cleared, prefetch information setting processing 2 is executed at the next step D160, and then the process proceeds to step D162.

When the process proceeds to step D162, it is determined whether there is a command data setting as cmd1st. If cmd1st is set, step D163 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D147. If cmd1st is not set, step D163 is not executed. Proceed to D147.
Here, if any of the aforementioned steps D97, D103, D118, D120, D136, D142, and D153 is executed, this cmd1st is set (that is, the determination result of step D162). Will be YES). Further, if any of the aforementioned steps D125 and D158 is executed and the setting of cmd1st is still erased, the setting of cmd1st is not present (that is, the determination result of step D162 is NO). Become). For this reason, step D163 is executed when cmd1st (first command) is received.
In step D163, an area that needs to be initialized in the RAM storage area of the CPU 311 is initialized with a corresponding default value.
It should be noted that the area required for initialization that is initialized in step D163 includes the contents of the first command and the second command that exert an effect in a set (for example, a jackpot symbol command that forms a set with an effect screen command such as a fanfare command). An area for storing information for determining is included. For example, an area for storing information related to changes in special symbols (such as stop symbol information) and a region for storing information related to jackpot screens (such as jackpot symbol information, number of rounds, and count) are included. In addition, according to step D163, the information regarding the production whose contents are determined by the first command and the second command is stored when the first command of the first command and the second command that exerts the effect in combination is received. The area to be initialized is once initialized. Here, an area for storing information whose contents are determined by a second command of a type or system different from the received first command is also initialized (for example, when a big hit system effect screen command such as a fanfare command is received) In addition to the information storage area determined by the jackpot symbol command that is paired with the effect screen command, for example, an area for storing information determined by the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command of the variable system is also initialized).
When the process proceeds to step D147, it is determined whether or not ExMode is set. If there is no ExMode, the process returns, and if there is, the process proceeds to step D148. Here, “Ex Mode is set” means that data is stored as Ex Mode. Further, “Ex Mode is not set” means that the data of Ex Mode remains cleared. ExMode is cleared in step D91.
Proceeding to step D148, it is determined whether or not the data of ExMode is other than the fluctuation command (including the pre-reading fluctuation command), and if it is other than the fluctuation command (including the pre-reading fluctuation command), the process proceeds to step D149. If it is a command (including a prefetch variation command), the process proceeds to step D161.
In step D149, the received command initialization process 1 (described later) is executed, and then the process returns.
In Step D161, the received command initialization process 2 (described later) is executed, and then the process returns.

[Variation pattern compatible symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the variation pattern corresponding symbol setting process (child module) executed in steps D95, D101, D116, D134, D140, and D151 in the received command analysis process (parent module) will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D171, effective symbol type information corresponding to the ACT data stored in step D92 is acquired, and the process proceeds to step D172. The acquisition of the symbol type information is performed based on the symbol type information table set in the immediately preceding step (for example, in the case of step D95, the preceding step D94).
In the case of this example, as the symbol type information, there are three patterns of “missing symbol”, “2R jackpot symbol”, and “15R jackpot symbol”. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, a type such as a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol with a number other than 2R or 15R may be set, and the setting of the symbol type varies depending on the specifications of the model.

  When the process proceeds to step D172, the MODE data (the upper byte data stored in step D92 described above, the same applies to steps D178, D179, D180) is within the variable command range (steps D134, D140, D151). If this routine is being executed, it is determined whether it is within the pre-reading variation command range), and if it is within this range, the process proceeds to step D173, and if it is outside this range, it is determined that it is abnormal and returns. Here, the “variable command range” is a range including all of the above-described variable command range 1, variable command range 2, and variable command range 3. Further, the “prefetch fluctuation command range” is a range including all of the above-described prefetch fluctuation command range 1, prefetch fluctuation command range 2, and prefetch fluctuation command range 3. That is, in this step D172, the command normality with a wider range is checked as compared with the aforementioned steps D93, D99 and the like.

  In step D173, it is determined whether the symbol type information acquired in step D171 is an outlier symbol. If it is an outlier symbol, in step D178, an outbreak ACT consistency check table corresponding to the MODE data is acquired and the operation proceeds to step D181. If it is not a symbol, the process proceeds to step D174. Here, the off-time ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be used as ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the off-line symbol.

  In step D174, it is determined whether the symbol type information acquired in step D171 is a 2R jackpot symbol. If 2R jackpot symbol, a 2R jackpot ACT matching check table corresponding to the MODE data is acquired in step D179, and the process proceeds to step D181. Proceed to step D175 if the 2R big hit symbol is not reached. Here, the 2R jackpot ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the 2R jackpot symbol.

  In step D175, it is determined whether the symbol type information acquired in step D171 is a 15R big hit symbol. If 15R big hit symbol, the 15R big hit ACT matching check table corresponding to the MODE data is acquired in step D180, and the process proceeds to step D181. If it is not 15R big hit symbol, the command returns invalid command information at step D176. Here, the 15R jackpot ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the 15R jackpot symbol.

When the process proceeds to step D181, branching at step D184 repeats the operation of sequentially executing steps D182 and D183 until the end of the check table (obtained in any of the immediately preceding steps D178, D179, and D181). .
Here, in step D182, the contents of the table (that is, the data corresponding to the pointer at that time in the check table acquired in the immediately preceding step) match the ACT data stored in step D92 described above. If there is a match, the process exits this loop and proceeds to step D177. If not, the process proceeds to step D183.
In step D183, the value of the check table pointer is updated, and the flow advances to step D184.
In step D184, it is determined whether step D182 has been repeatedly executed up to the last data of the check table. If step D182 is repeated up to the last data, the process proceeds to step D185. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D182. Return and repeat the process.

If any of the data in the check table matches the data of the ACT stored in the above-mentioned step D92 by the processing of the repetition loop of steps D181 to D184, the process proceeds to step D177, otherwise (matches). If there is no data in the check table), the process proceeds to step D185.
In step D185, invalid command information is returned as being abnormal, and the process returns. In step D177, the value of the symbol type information acquired in step D171 is returned.
In step D98 described above, the symbol type information returned in step D177 is stored as standby symbol information.

[Initialization process by received command 1]
Next, details of the received command initialization process 1 executed in step D149 in the received command analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, first, in step D191, the area that needs to be initialized is initialized with the corresponding default value, and in the next step D192, NULL (data indicating that there is no information) is set as full fade information. The process proceeds to step D193. It should be noted that the area requiring initialization initialized in step D191 is a common area (for example, the entire notice information area) to be initialized when the command is confirmed, among the RAM storage areas of the CPU 311.

When the process proceeds to step D193, it is determined whether the data of ExMode is for instructing a customer waiting demo. If the data is for instructing a customer waiting demo, the round display information is set to NULL in step D195 and the process proceeds to step D196. If it is not to instruct a customer waiting demonstration, the process proceeds to step D194. The customer waiting demo is a customer waiting demonstration effect (also referred to as a customer waiting effect), and is an effect including a customer waiting demonstration display performed on the display device 41. The customer-waiting demonstration effect is not limited to display on the display device 41, but may be effected by display on another display device, lighting of lamps (including blinking), or sound output.
When the process proceeds to step D196, it is determined whether the P machine state (pachinko machine state) is in the customer waiting demonstration. If the customer waiting demonstration is in progress, the process proceeds to step D199, and if not in the customer waiting demonstration, the process proceeds to step D197.
In step D197, information on the start of waiting for customer A display is set in the display control flag area, and in the next step D198, waiting for customer display data (information on the customer waiting demonstration control table) is set in the background information, and step D199. Proceed to

  In step D199, the change end display data is set in the background information at the end of change. In the next step D200, the customer waiting A is set as the P machine state, and in the next step D201, the special figure is stopped as the special figure display symbol number. The value of the symbol area is set, and no hold display movement control is set in the next step D203, and then the process proceeds to step D203a. In the hold display movement control, when the start memory hold display is also performed on the screen of the display device 41 that displays the special drawing, the display position of the hold display is appropriately moved so as not to overlap the display of the reach action or the like. Control.

Steps D195 to D203 are processes for executing the customer waiting demonstration display on the display device 41. The customer waiting demonstration display is divided into “customer waiting A” for symbol display and “customer waiting B” for movie display, and “waiting for customer A” is started by steps D195 to D203. The customer waiting demonstration display of “waiting for customer B” is performed (see the customer waiting display editing process described later).
The value of the special figure stop symbol area in step D201 is the data set in step D341 described later, and the special figure display symbol number is, for example, when a customer waiting demo command is transmitted during the special figure change. In addition, it is a storage area for storing the value of the special figure stop symbol area at that time. The special symbol display symbol number stored in this way is used for symbol display waiting for customers.

When the process proceeds to step D203a, it is determined whether or not data transmission between subs is being performed (that is, whether or not data transmission is being performed with respect to an effect control device of a different pachinko machine). If not, the process returns after executing steps D203b to D203f.
In step D203b, an inter-sub command (broadcast transmission setting) for customer waiting demo synchronization (inter-sub synchronization in the customer waiting demo display) is prepared, and inter-sub transmission data is edited in the next step D203c to edit the prepared inter-sub command. Edit processing (described later in FIG. 120) is executed.

In step D203d, an initial value is set in an ack waiting timer (a timer used in step D521 described later). Whether or not the sub-board (production control device) of the pachinko machine that has received the inter-sub command returns ack to the sub-board of the pachinko machine that has transmitted the inter-sub command varies depending on the type of command (steps described later). D480a). In this example, the inter-sub-command for waiting for a customer demo synchronization includes a content requesting a reply of ack. That is, in this example, the inter-sub-command for the customer waiting demo synchronization is a command that requires an ack response.
In step D203e, a sub-submission effect start waiting timer (a timer used in step D532 described later) is set.
In step D203f, an inter-sub transmission request flag is set. The inter-sub-transmission request flag is used for determination in step D461 described later.

Proceeding to step D194, it is determined whether or not the data of ExMode commands a fanfare effect (effect when a big hit is made), and if the fanfare effect is commanded, steps D204 to D210 are sequentially executed. Returning to step D221 if the instruction is not for instructing a fanfare effect.
In step D204, the big hit is set as the P machine state.
In step D205, the round display information is set to NULL.
In step D206, the big hit fanfare display data (background control table information for the big hit fanfare) is set in the background information.
In step D207, black fade display is set as full face fade information.
In step D208, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is set as the special symbol display symbol number.
In step D210, no hold display movement control is set.
These steps D204 to D210 are processes for executing a fanfare effect (including fanfare display on the display device 41).

Proceeding to step D221, it is determined whether the data of ExMode is a command for a round effect (effect during a big hit round), and if it is a command for a round effect, steps D223 to D229 are executed sequentially before returning. If no round effect is instructed, the process proceeds to step D222.
At step D223, the big hit is set as the P machine state.
In step D224, a scene switching table corresponding to the number of rounds is set as the round display information.
In step D225, the jackpot round background display data (background control table information for the jackpot round) corresponding to the data of ExAct is set in the background information.
In step D226, the round number display data corresponding to the data of ExAct is set.
In step D227, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is set as the special figure display symbol number.
In step D228, the symbol movement table during round (information of the symbol variation table for round) is set in the symbol variation table area.
In step D229, no hold display movement control is set.
These steps D223 to D229 are processes for executing a round effect (including round display on the display device 41).

Proceeding to step D222, it is determined whether the data of ExMode commands an interval effect (effect between the rounds of big hits), and if the interval effect is commanded, steps D230 to D235 are sequentially performed. After the execution, the process returns, and if the interval effect is not instructed, the process proceeds to step D241.
In Step D230, the big hit is set as the P machine state.
In step D231, the round display information is set to NULL.
In Step D232, the big hit interval background display data (information on the background control table for the interval) is set in the background information.
In step D233, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is set as the special symbol display symbol number.
In step D234, the symbol operation table in the round is set.
In step D235, no hold display movement control is set.
These steps D230 to D235 are processes for executing an interval effect (including an interval display on the display device 41).

Proceeding to step D241, it is determined whether the data of ExMode commands an ending effect (effect at the end of the big hit). If the ending effect is commanded, steps D244 to D250 are sequentially executed and then the process returns. If the ending effect is not instructed, the process proceeds to step D242.
In step D244, the big hit is set as the P machine state.
In step D245, a scene switching time table is set in the round display information.
In step D246, ending background display data (information on the ending background control table) is set in the background information.
In step D247, black fade display is set as full face fade information.
In step D248, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is set as the special figure display symbol number.
In step D250, no hold display movement control is set.
These steps D244 to D250 are processes for executing an ending effect (including an ending display on the display device 41).

When the process proceeds to step D242, it is determined whether the data of ExMode is for instructing the value of the special figure 1 hold number. After executing the setting process (described later), the process returns.
Note that the special figure 2 is provided with the same steps as the above steps D242 and D251, but the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

Proceeding to step D243, it is determined whether the data of ExMode is for commanding a special symbol stop. If the special symbol stop is not commanded, the process returns.
In step D252, if the current BGM is not the basic BGM, a sound stop request is set.
In step D253, if the background information at the end of change is not NULL, the background information is overwritten.
In step D254, the changing state is set as the P machine state.
In step D255, normal background display data (information of a normal background control table) is set in the background information.
In step D256, NULL is set in the background information at the end of change.
In step D257, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is set as the special symbol display symbol number.
In step D259, no hold display movement control is set.
These steps D252 to D259 are processes for executing the special symbol stop effect (including the special symbol stop display on the display device 41).
The received command-specific initialization process 1 is not shown or described for processes other than those for the special figure 2 pending number command. For example, corresponding processing when other commands of non-variable system (such as commands of error system, probability state system, etc.) are received is also omitted.

[Special Figure 1 Hold Information Setting Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 hold information setting process executed in step D251 in the above-described received command initialization process 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D261, the data of the special figure 1 holding number at that time is loaded, and this loaded data is stored as the previous holding number. Next, in step D262, the command (ExMode and The value of the number of holdings commanded in the ExAct data) is stored as the special figure 1 holding number, and then the process proceeds to step D263.

In step D263, it is determined whether the new pending number (the figure 1 pending number stored in step D262) matches the previous pending number (the value stored in step D261). If not, the process proceeds to step D264.
In step D264, it is determined whether the number of holds has increased (that is, whether the number of new holds> the number of previous holds). If it has increased, the process proceeds to step D265, and if it has not increased, the process proceeds to step D267.
When the process proceeds to step D265, a display pattern of reserved normal lighting is set in the color information area corresponding to the new number of reservations, a start opening winning sound is requested in the next step D266, and then the process returns.

In step D267, the special figure 1 prefetch information area is shifted, and in the next step D268, the color information area is shifted.
The process proceeds to step D265 when there is a start prize in FIG. 1. In order to perform a hold display (display of the start memory being held) and an output of a winning sound for production by this start prize. Steps D265 and D266 are executed. Further, the process proceeds to step D267 when the number of suspensions of the start-up memory in FIG. 1 has decreased, so that the display of the number of suspensions for which pre-reading display (for example, jackpot notice or change pattern notice) is performed is displayed in a shifted manner. In addition, steps D267 and D268 are executed in order to shift the pre-read information (various information (flag etc.) such as pre-read variation pattern and stop pattern information and pre-read effect) to the area corresponding to the number of holds. In the effect control device 300, in the above-described steps D138, D144, D155, D160, and step D161 (initialization process 2 for each received command), a prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) for each hold. The pre-read information is set as an analysis result. The storage area for the pre-read information needs to be shifted corresponding to the decrease in the number of reservations in the same manner as the random number storage area is shifted at the start of fluctuation on the main board. Step D267 described above is present. Step D268 is a process for similarly shifting the storage area of the information of the reserved display color corresponding to the pre-read information (that is, the color of the hold display that varies depending on the presence or absence of the pre-read effect for the pre-read effect). It is.

[Initialization process by received command 2]
Next, the details of the received command initialization process 2 executed in step D161 in the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIGS.
When this routine is started, first, steps D271 to D281 are executed, and the process proceeds to step D282.
In step D271, the area that needs to be initialized is initialized with the corresponding default value.

  In step D271, a common area (for example, the entire notice information area) to be initialized when the command is confirmed is initialized with the corresponding default value in the storage area of the RAM of the CPU 311.

In step D272, NULL is set as full-surface fade information.
In step D273, information on normal variation display is set in the display control flag area.
In step D274, a change initialization flag for the 4th symbol of the changing special figure is set.
In Step D275, the changing 4th symbol status of the special figure is set as changing.
By the processing of these steps D274 and D275, the 4th symbol corresponding to the changing one of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 changes (refer to the 4th symbol editing process described later).
In step D276, no hold display movement control is set.

In step D277, a variation pattern classification process (described later) is executed.
In step D278, a notice distribution table corresponding to the broad pattern returned in the variation pattern classification process in step D277 is prepared.
In Step D279, a random number lottery process A (described later) is executed.
In step D280, a step UP notice distribution table corresponding to the major pattern returned in step D277 is prepared.
In step D281, a random number lottery process B (described later) is executed.

In step D282, it is determined whether the main pattern returned in step D277 is “normally shifted”. If “normally shifted”, the process proceeds to step D285. If not “normally shifted”, steps D283 and D284 are sequentially performed. After execution, the process proceeds to step D285.
In step D283, a reach advance notice distribution table corresponding to the major pattern returned in step D277 is prepared.
In Step D284, a random number lottery process C (described later) is executed.
When the process proceeds to step D285, the notice effect setting process 1 (described later) is executed, then the notice effect setting process 2 (described later) is executed at step D286, and then the song number of the basic BGM is set at step D287. Thereafter, the process proceeds to Step D288.

When the process proceeds to step D288, it is determined whether or not the ExMode data (first half fluctuation pattern) commands normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds. If 12 seconds fluctuation is commanded, steps D289 to D295 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns. If the command does not command normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, the process proceeds to step D301. Here, “normal” in “normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds” means that it is not a special fluctuation such as a shortening fluctuation.
In this example, in the case of a normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, there can only be a fluctuation pattern without reach action. In this case, since the reach action is not performed, the time value of the second half fluctuation is set as 0, and the fluctuation pattern is 12 seconds in total (that is, the normal fluctuation of 12 seconds; “normal” here means the fluctuation that is not reach). ). That is, the second half fluctuation time value indicated by the ExAct data (second half fluctuation pattern) is 0 second fluctuation.
In step D289, the background information is set to the normal fluctuation background (information of the background control table for normal fluctuation).
In step D290, NULL is set in the background information at the end of change.
In step D291, an early stage fluctuation table at the time of normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds is set as a symbol fluctuation table to be described later. Specifically, the address information of this early stage variation table is stored in the symbol variation table area (the same applies hereinafter).
In Step D292, the first half fluctuation table at the time of the first half second normal fluctuation is set as the symbol fluctuation table.
In step D293, a second half fluctuation table corresponding to ExAct is set as the symbol fluctuation table.
In step D294, a flag for generating a split eye symbol is set. The disjointed symbol pattern means a state in which a plurality of symbols constituting the special symbol are not a symbol for reaching or jackpot (including a combination such as “776” if the symbol is not a reach-shaped combination).
In step D295, stop symbol setting processing (described later) is executed.

These steps D289 to D295 are processes for executing the variable display on the display device 41 of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) without reach action. Here, in steps D291 to D293, control is performed by dividing the time of one variation into three sections. Even with the same variation command, the symbol itself may change depending on the type of notice, etc., and a plurality of movements are registered in the tables of these steps D291 to D293.
Note that these steps D289 to D295 are an example in the case of no reach action, and there are actually many modes without a reach action.

Proceeding to step D301, it is determined whether or not the ExMode data (first-half variation pattern) commands normal variation in the first half of 10.4 seconds ("normal" here is not a shortened variation or the like). If the normal variation in the first half of 4 seconds is commanded, steps D302 to D303 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D304. If the normal variation in the first half of 10.4 seconds is not commanded, the process proceeds to step D318. In this example, in the case of a normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds, there can only be a fluctuation pattern with a reach action. In this case, since the time value of the second half variation changes with the contents of the reach action, the variation pattern is defined as a total of (10.4 + α) seconds. There are a plurality of types of ExACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) for the same ExMode, and this number varies depending on the specifications of each gaming machine.
In step D302, an early stage fluctuation table at the time of normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds is set.
In step D303, a first half fluctuation table at the time of a normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds is set.
These steps D302 to D303 are processes for executing the fluctuation display on the display device 41 of the early stage and the first half of the special figure (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) in the first half of the normal variation of 10.4 seconds. In the present application, the period of the movement of the symbols within the first half variation time is referred to as “early”, and the remaining period within the first half variation time is referred to as “first half”. Even if the same first half variation time, the movement of the symbol may be scrolled down as it is or hopping up once (a kind of notice), so that the movement does not go all the way "early + first half = first half fluctuation" It is the composition. In addition, in this embodiment, the production contents are set for each period obtained by dividing the production at the time of special figure variation into a plurality of times in this way, and the whole production at the time of special figure fluctuation is combined as the production content of each period. It is a combination formula. This has the advantage that the total amount of data that must be stored in the nonvolatile memory for storing control data (PROM 321 in this example) is reduced. That is, for example, if all the first-half fluctuation tables are prepared for each production content whose movement is slightly different, the data amount becomes enormous, but such a combination can improve such a problem.

Proceeding to step D304, it is determined whether or not the data of ExAct (second half fluctuation pattern) commands a deviation deviation from normal-1. If normal-1 designates a deviation, steps D307 to D311 are sequentially executed. If the process returns later and does not command a deviation of normal-1, the process proceeds to step D305. Note that the deviation from normal-1 is a fluctuation pattern that deviates with normal reach action.
In step D307, the background of the normal reach action (information of the background control table for normal reach action) is set as the background information.
In step D308, NULL is set in the background information at the end of change.
In step D309, the latter half fluctuation table corresponding to ExAct is set as a symbol fluctuation table described later.
In step D310, a flag for generating -1 deviation symbols is set.
In step D311, a stop symbol setting process (described later) is executed.
These steps D307 to D311 are for executing fluctuation display on the display device 41 of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) in the latter half of the normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds and out of the normal-1. It is processing of.

Proceeding to step D305, it is determined whether or not the data of ExAct is for commanding the change of military commander reach-1. If the command of military commander reach-1 is commanded for deviation, the processing returns after executing steps D312 to D317 sequentially. If the commander does not instruct the change of the general, reach to step D306. Note that the general deviation from the military commander reach-1 is a variation pattern that comes off with the military commander reach action in which the character of the military commander appears.
In step D312, the background of the military commander reach action (background control table information for the general commander reach action) is set as background information.
In step D313, the background at the end of the military commander reach is set in the background information at the end of change.
In step D314, a second half fluctuation table corresponding to ExAct is set as a symbol fluctuation table to be described later. Here, the table is selected in accordance with the type of notice (brown-off notice) during the warrior reach.
In step D315, a flag for generating -1 deviation symbols is set.
In step D316, a stop symbol setting process (described later) is executed.
In step D317, white fade display information is set in the full face fade information.
These steps D312 to D317 execute the fluctuation display on the display device 41 of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) in the case of the second half fluctuation of the normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds and the warrior reach-1 deviation. Process.

When the processing proceeds to step D306, setting processing corresponding to other various types of reach (including one that becomes a big hit) is performed for the latter half of the normal variation in the first half of 10.4 seconds, and then the process returns.
When the processing proceeds to step D318, setting processing corresponding to various types of reach (including those that are big hits) in other ExMode and ExAct is performed.
Note that the above steps D301 to D305 and steps D307 to D317 are processes of some examples when there is a reach action. Actually, there are many other types of reach actions, but in order to avoid complications, these other types of processing are collectively shown in steps D306 and D318. Illustration and description are omitted.

[Stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the stop symbol setting process executed in steps D295, D311, and D316 in the above-described received command initialization process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, there are three symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) in which special graphics for production are arranged side by side, and each symbol has nine symbols (symbol numbers 0 to 8). The case is illustrated.
When this routine is started, first, in step D321, it is determined whether or not a misalignment is set as the symbol generation flag. Proceed to D331. It should be noted that the symbol generation flag of the missed break is set (that is, set) in the aforementioned step D294.

Step D322 is a process of setting a symbol number selected at random from nine symbol numbers 0 to 8 as a left symbol lx.
Step D323 is a process of setting one symbol number selected at random from eight symbol numbers 0 to 7 as the right symbol rx.
Proceeding to step D324, it is determined whether the right symbol rx set at step D323 is greater than or equal to the left symbol lx set at step D322. If right symbol rx ≧ left symbol lx, the symbol of the right symbol rx is determined at step S325. The number is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step D326. If the right symbol rx ≧ the left symbol lx is not satisfied (that is, if the right symbol rx <the left symbol lx), the process proceeds to step D326 without executing step D325.
Through the processing of these steps D322 to D325, the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx are set randomly, and the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx are always set to different symbol numbers. The reason for selecting from the range of symbol number 7 or less in step D323 is to ensure that it can be increased by one in step D325.

Proceeding to step D326, it is determined whether the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx are combinations that can be an appearance prohibition symbol. If the combination can be an appearance prohibition symbol, the procedure proceeds to step D327. move on. Here, the “prohibited appearance” symbol is a symbol that is prohibited from appearing as a disjointed pattern. For example, in the case of a specification that uses a combination of 3, 5, and 7 as a chance chance, such as “357”, “375”, “537”,... When necessary, this chance is a symbol that is prohibited from appearing. Steps D326 to D330 are processing for this prohibition control. In the case of a model that only needs to be separated, this prohibition control is unnecessary, and only the processing in the right column (step D338) is sufficient.
More specifically, for example, assuming that a combination of 3, 5, and 7 is an appearance prohibited symbol, in step D326, the symbol number of the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx is different from any of 3, 5, and 7 If it is two, the process proceeds to step D327 because it can be an appearance prohibited symbol.

Proceeding to step D327, the cx value at which the combination of “left symbol lx, middle symbol cx, right symbol rx” becomes an appearance prohibited symbol is stored in a storage area called nocx. For example, if the left symbol lx is 3 and the right symbol rx is 5, then if the middle symbol cx is 7, then the special symbol combination is “3, 7, 5” and the symbol is prohibited from appearing. Therefore, the value 7 of the symbol cx is set to nocx.
After step D327, in step D328, a process of setting one symbol number randomly selected from eight types of symbol numbers 0 to 7 as the middle symbol cx is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D329.

In step D329, it is determined whether the middle symbol cx ≧ nocx. If the middle symbol cx ≧ nocx, the middle symbol cx is incremented by one in step S330 and the process proceeds to step D341, where the middle symbol cx ≧ nocx must be satisfied. If not, the process proceeds to Step D341 without executing Step D330.
According to the processing of these steps D328 to D330, the value of the middle symbol cx is always different from nocx. As a result, the combination of “left symbol lx, middle symbol cx, right symbol rx” is not necessarily an appearance prohibited symbol. It becomes.
In step D338, a process of setting one symbol number selected at random from eight symbol numbers 0 to 7 as a middle symbol cx is executed, and then the procedure proceeds to step D341.

When the process proceeds to step D331, it is determined whether or not reach-1 is set as the symbol generation flag. If it is set, the process proceeds to step D333 after executing step D332; otherwise, the process proceeds to step D337. It should be noted that the symbol generation flag for reach-1 is set in the aforementioned steps D310 and D315.
In step D332, a process of storing a value selected at random from ten values 0 to 9 as tmprnd is executed.
In step D333, it is determined whether the value of tmprnd is 0. If it is 0, steps D334 and D335 are sequentially executed, and then the procedure proceeds to step D336.

In step D334, a process of storing one value randomly selected from four odd numbers 1, 3, 5, and 7 as the number of the left symbol lx is executed. The description in the drawing of step D334 is described using a programming language, “rand” indicates a function for generating a random number, “mod” indicates an operation for obtaining a remainder of division, and “ rand () mod 4 ”is a value selected at random from 0, 1, 2, and 3. In step D334, since the value of “rand () mod 4” is doubled and added by 1, one value is randomly selected from 1, 3, 5, and 7 after all.
In step D339, a process of storing one value randomly selected from five types of even values 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 as the number of the left symbol lx is executed.
In step D335 or step D340, the value of the right symbol rx is made the same as the value of the left symbol lx in order to obtain the reach symbol (ie, the right symbol is the same symbol as the left symbol).

  Here, according to the processing of Steps D332 to D334 and Step D339, the odd and even appearance ratios of the reach symbols can be changed. In this case, since the process proceeds from step D333 to step D334 only when tmprnd = 0, the odd-numbered symbol appearance ratio is 1/10, whereas the ratio from step D333 to step D339 (that is, even-numbered symbol). The appearance ratio) is 9/10. This is done for the following reason. In other words, since there is a re-lottery effect, the reach pattern when a big hit is inevitably likely to be an even number. Therefore, the appearance rate of the odd reach is lowered in order not to reduce the jackpot reliability of the odd reach. Of course, the ratio of the odd and even appearance rates may not be a ratio of 1: 9. Further, in this example, an example in which a symbol is obtained by calculation as in steps D334 and D339 is illustrated, but a symbol may be selected by a random number and a data table.

When the process proceeds to step D336, the result obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the left symbol lx is set as the value of the middle symbol cx so that −1 is deviated, and then the procedure proceeds to step D341.
When the process proceeds to step D337, a process of generating a combination of symbols (including a jackpot symbol) corresponding to the other symbol generation flag is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D341.
In step D341, the values of the left symbol lx, middle symbol cx, and right symbol rx set in the steps so far are stored in the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the stop symbol region, respectively, and then the process returns.
Note that the steps D321 to D336 and the steps D338 to D340 are processes in the case of an unbalanced break and reach-1 in the case of a break. Actually, there are many other types of stop symbols, but in order to avoid complications, these other types of processing are collectively shown in step D337. Illustration and description are omitted.

[Variation pattern classification process]
Next, details of the variation pattern classification process executed in step D277 in the above-described received command initialization process 2 will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D351 whether the data of ExMode is a variable command, and if it is a variable command, the process proceeds to step D352, and if not, the process proceeds to step D358.
In step D352, it is determined whether the data of ExAct is in the valid range. If the data is in the valid range, step D353 is executed, and the process proceeds to step D354.

In step D353, fluctuation pattern check data corresponding to the data of ExMode is acquired. The fluctuation pattern check data is set for each MODE data of the fluctuation command, and 0 is set as the fluctuation pattern check data for MODE data that is not used in the model.
In step D354, it is determined whether the variation pattern check data acquired in step D353 is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step D358.

In step D355, a broad pattern table corresponding to ExMode data is set.
In step D356, the broad pattern data corresponding to the data of ExAct is acquired based on the broad pattern table set in step D355.
In step D357, the broad pattern data acquired in step D356 is returned and the process returns.
In step D358, 0 is returned and the process returns.

  In addition, in order to prepare the notice distribution table corresponding to ExMode and ExAct data in the above-described step D278, etc., the broadly classified pattern data indicates to which classification the variation pattern commanded by the ExMode and ExAct data belongs. It is the data shown. The major pattern table is a table for determining the major pattern data. In this major pattern table, the major pattern data is 0 where there is no combination of ExMode and ExAct data. For this reason, when there is no combination of data of ExMode and ExAct, in step D357, 0 is returned as in step D358. In addition, when 0 is returned in this way, for example, it is handled in the same way as normal losing. If it is handled in the same way as normal, there is an advantage that even if there is an abnormality in the confirmed command, the special figure can be changed temporarily, so that the player can be kept uneasy. . However, when 0 is returned, there is a mode in which the change start setting is not performed as a configuration in which, for example, step D277 in FIG. In this way, the special figure can be prevented from changing in the case of command abnormality.

[Random lottery processing A]
Next, details of the random number lottery process A executed in step D279 in the above-described received command-based initialization process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is a process of selecting a sorting result in the notice sorting table prepared for the sorting group A in step D278 described above by random number for each type.
When this routine is started, the notice type number A is incremented from the initial value 1 by an increment 1 until the final value na (for example, na = 9) is reached, the steps D361 to D368 are repeatedly executed, and then the process returns. That is, in step D361, immediately after the routine starts, the notice type number A is set to 1, and the process proceeds to step D362. In step D368, if the notice type number A is less than na, the process returns to step D361, and if the notice type number A is na, the process returns. Then, when returning to step D361, the value of the notice type number A is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step D362. The closing price na differs depending on the model.

  Further, the notice distribution table prepared in step D278 is a matrix data table (matrix), and for example, the distribution values of various distribution results are arranged side by side in the same row (stage) for each notice type. Then, the value of the notice type number A corresponds to one of a plurality of rows in this table. For example, A = 1 is the first row from the top, and A = 2 is the second row from the top. ... and so on. That is, the notice type number is a parameter indicating the vertical arrangement position (number line) of a specific distribution value in the notice distribution table. In addition, a distribution table pointer is provided as a parameter indicating the horizontal arrangement position (number of columns) of a specific distribution value in one row of the notice distribution table. In this example, since there are 1000 types of random values from 0 to 999, the distribution values are numbers within the range of 0 to 999 that are set to be 1000 when all the distribution values in the same row are added. is there. The same applies to other distribution tables and other notice type numbers B and C.

  In step D362, a process of storing one value randomly selected from 0 to 999 as rdm is executed, and then in step D363, the value of the sorting table pointer corresponding to the notice type number A (notice type number A The value indicating the first column of the row corresponding to the value of () is set, and the process proceeds to step D364. Here, as described above, the distribution table pointer set in step D363 designates the horizontal position (hereinafter referred to as the pointer position) in the same row in the notice distribution table prepared in step D278 described above. It is a pointer to do.

When the process proceeds to step D364, the distribution value at the current position of the pointer is compared with the value of rdm. If the value of rdm is equal to or greater than the distribution value, the process proceeds to step D365, where the value of rdm Is less than the distribution value, the process proceeds to Step D367.
In step D365, a value obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the rdm value is set as a new rdm value. Next, in step D366, the distribution table pointer is incremented by 1 (the same distribution table). (Update that shifts the pointer position away from the head by one column in the row) is performed, and then the process returns to step D364 and the process is repeated.

  According to the processes of steps D364 to D366, the process of updating the distribution table pointer by subtracting the distribution value from the value of rdm is repeated until the value of rdm becomes less than the distribution value. . Then, when the value of rdm becomes less than the distribution value (that is, when the determination result in step D364 is NO), the number of times the distribution table pointer is updated (or the value of the pointer position) and the notice at that time The value of the type number A indicates one specific position (that is, one distribution result) in the notice distribution table, and the distribution result is selected based on a random number.

Proceeding to step D367, a notice data value is set based on the update count of the distribution table pointer (that is, the number of times the steps D365 and D366 are repeatedly executed), and this notice data value is stored in the corresponding notice type area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to Step D368.
When the process proceeds to step D368, as described above, if the notice type number A is less than na, the process returns to step D361, and if the notice type number A is na, the process returns.

[Random number lottery processing B]
Next, the details of the random number lottery process B executed in step D281 in the received command-specific initialization process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is a process of selecting a distribution result in the step-up notice distribution table prepared for the distribution group B in step D280 described above by random number for each type.
In this routine, similarly to the random number lottery process A described above, steps D371 to D378 are repeatedly executed until the notice type number B is increased from the initial value 1 by an increment 1 until the final value nb (for example, nb = 7) is reached. And then return. The value of the closing price nb differs for each model.

  Note that the step-up notice is a step-by-step notice of jackpot while changing the notice contents and the reliability of the notice. In the drawings and specification of the present application, “SU” means step-up of this step-up notice.

[Random number lottery processing C]
Next, the details of the random number lottery process C executed in step D284 in the above-described received command initialization process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is a process of selecting a sorting result in the reach advance notice sorting table prepared for the sorting group C in step D283 described above by random number for each type.
In this routine, similarly to the random number lottery process A or B described above, steps D381 to D388 are performed until the notice type number C is increased from the initial value 1 by an increment 1 until the final value nc (for example, nc = 6) is reached. It executes repeatedly and then returns. The value of the closing price nc differs depending on the model.

It should be noted that in steps D367, D377, and D387 in the random number lottery processes A, B, and C described above, the contents of the effect specified by the notice data value (value determined from the number of updates of the distribution table pointer) (whether or not the SU notice is executed). In addition, various types of information (SU notice count, SU progress pattern, various notice types, etc.) corresponding to the production pattern) are stored in a predetermined storage area (eg, SU notice count area, SU progress pattern area described later) in the notice type area. , The notice type C4 area, the notice type C5 area, etc.).
As a result, according to the random number lottery processes A, B, and C described above, distribution results are selected in advance for all the notice type number values in all the groups A, B, and C, and according to the distribution results. Various pieces of information for designating the production contents are stored in advance in predetermined storage areas.

[Notification effect setting process 1]
Next, details of the notice effect setting process 1 executed in step D285 in the above-described received command initialization process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. As the notice effect setting process 1, the case where the SU notice is set according to the random number lottery result (results of the random number lottery processes A, B, and C described above) is exemplified. The contents are different.
When this routine is started, first, in step D391, the distribution result is loaded from the SU notice count area in the notice type area, and the process proceeds to step D392.

In step D392, it is determined whether the SU notice count loaded in step D391 is 1. If not, the process proceeds to step D393. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step D404.
In step D393, it is determined whether the number of SU notices loaded in step D391 is 2. If not, the process proceeds to step D403. If it is 2, the process proceeds to step D394.
In step D404, the distribution result is loaded from the SU progress pattern area of the notice type area, and the process proceeds to step D405.

In step D405, it is determined whether the SU progress pattern loaded in step D404 is 0 or 2. If it is not 0 or 2, the process proceeds to step D406, and if it is 0 or 2, the process proceeds to step D407.
In step D406, male warrior 1_1 information is set in the SU1 advance notice information area, and the process returns. In step D407, the female general 1_1 information is set in the SU1 advance notice information area, and the process returns. The SU1 notice information area is an area for storing the first information of the step-up notice, and the first step-up notice is executed based on the information set in this area. Note that the information set in steps D406 and D407 is SU1 advance notice data (for example, address information designating a specific row in the SU1 advance notice control table).

In step D394, the distribution result is loaded from the SU2 type area of the notice type area, and the process advances to step D395.
In step D395, it is determined whether the SU2 type loaded in step D394 is 1. If not, the process proceeds to step D396. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step D408.

Proceeding to step D396, male warrior 1-2 information (SU1 notice data for SU1 notice) is set in the SU1 notice information area, and then male warrior 2_1 information (SU2 notice data for SU2 notice) is set in the SU2 notice information area in step D397. Set and proceed to step D398.
In step D408, the female warlord 1_2 information (notice data for SU1 notice) is set in the SU1 notice information area. Next, in step D409, the female warlord 2_2 information (notice data for SU2 notice) is set in the SU2 notice information area. Set and proceed to step D398. The SU2 notice information area is an area for storing the second information of the step-up notice, and the second step-up notice is executed based on the information set in this area.

In step D398, the distribution result is loaded from the SU progress pattern area of the notice type area, and the process proceeds to step D399.
In step D399, it is determined whether the SU progress pattern loaded in step D398 is 0. If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step D411, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step D400.
In step D400, the distribution result is loaded from the SU2 female appearance pattern area in the notice type area, and the process proceeds to step D401.

In step D401, it is determined whether the SU2 female appearance pattern loaded in step D400 (in the figure, the pattern is expressed as “P”) is 0. If not, the process proceeds to step D410. Proceed to D402.
In step D402, the female warlord 1_2 information (SU1 advance notice data) is set in the SU1 advance notice information area, and the process advances to step D411.
In step D410, the female warlord 2_2 information (notification data for SU2 notice) is set in the SU2 notice information area, and the process proceeds to step D411.

In step D411, it is determined whether the SU progress pattern loaded in step D398 is 2. If not, the process returns. If it is 2, the process proceeds to step D412.
In step D412, the female warlord 1_2 information (notice data for SU1 notice) is set in the SU1 notice information area, and in the next step D413, the female warlord 2_2 information (notice data for SU2 notice) is set in the SU2 notice information area. Set and return.
When the process proceeds to step D403, similarly, the SU notice information area is set in accordance with the SU notice frequency distribution result, and then the process returns.
Note that the setting of the SU notice may be three or more times, but here, in order to avoid complications, the other SU notice setting processes are collectively shown in step D403. The illustration and description are omitted.

[Notification effect setting process 2]
Next, details of the notice effect setting process 2 executed in step D286 in the above-described received command initialization process 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. As the notice effect setting process 2, the case where the scroll, PB, and military commander notice are set according to the random number lottery result (the result of the random number lottery process A, B, and C described above) is illustrated. The content of the notice effect is different. PB means a push button and corresponds to, for example, the production button 9 in this example.
When this routine is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the notice type C4 area of the notice type area in step D421, and the process proceeds to step D422.
Note that the name such as C4 is a name on the spec and represents the type number of the notice in each route of the production. For example, “notice type 4 in route C” is indicated.

Proceeding to step D422, it is determined whether the data of the distribution result of the notice type C4 loaded in step D421 specifies scroll notice. If it is not a scroll notice, the process proceeds to step D423. Proceed to step D425.
In step D425, scroll advance notice 0 information (precaution data for front notice 4) is set in the front notice information 4 area, and the process returns. When the scroll advance notice 0 information is set in the front notice information 4 area, the scroll advance notice is executed.
Proceeding to step D423, it is determined whether or not the data of the sorting result of the notice type C4 loaded in step D421 specifies character notice. If not, the process proceeds to step D424. After executing steps D426 to D429 sequentially, the process returns.

In step D426, the distribution result is loaded from the notice type C5 area of the notice type area.
In step D427, scroll color information (notice data for front notice 4) corresponding to the distribution result of notice type C5 is set in the front notice information 4 area.
In step D428, the distribution result is loaded from the notice type C6 area of the notice type area.
In step D429, scroll character information (notice data for front notice 5) corresponding to the distribution result of notice type C6 is set in the front notice information 5 area.
Based on the settings of these steps D427 and D429, the character notice is executed.

  Proceeding to step D424, it is determined whether or not the distribution result data of the notice type C4 loaded at step D421 specifies a PB notice. If not, the process returns. If it is a PB notice, step D430 is entered. , D431, D441 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D442. The PB notice is, for example, a notice effect that displays a video suggesting that the user presses the PB on the screen of the display device 41 and urges the player to press the PB, thereby providing a big hit expectation. is there.

In step D430, the distribution result is loaded from the notice type P1 area of the notice type area.
In step D431, PB color information (notice data for front notice 4) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type P1 is set in the front notice information 4 area. By setting the PB color information, the display color of the PB image in the PB notice is set.
In step D441, the distribution result (data for determining the number of military commanders) is loaded from the notice type C8 area of the notice type area.
Proceeding to step D442, it is determined whether or not the distribution result loaded in step D441 specifies one military commander. If it is not one military commander, the procedure proceeds to step D443. After executing steps D445 to D448 in sequence, the process proceeds to step D444.

In step D445, the distribution result is loaded from the notice type N1 area of the notice type area.
In step D446, left speech frame information (forecast data for front notice 5) is set in the front notice information 5 area.
In step D447, warrior words frame information (notice data for front notice 6) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type N1 loaded in step D445 is set in the front notice information 6 area.
In step D448, left military commander character information (precaution data for front notice 7) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type N1 loaded in step D445 is set in the front notice information 7 area.
Based on the settings of these steps D446 to D448, display of a notice effect of one warlord is executed.

  Proceeding to step D443, it is determined whether or not the distribution result loaded in step D441 designates two military commanders. If it is not two military commanders, the procedure proceeds to step D444, and if there are two military commanders, After executing Steps D449 to D455 sequentially, the process proceeds to Step D444.

In step D449, the distribution result is loaded from the notice type N2 area of the notice type area.
In step D450, left speech frame information (notice data for front notice 5) is set in the front notice information 5 area.
In step D451, warrior serif frame information (notice data for front notice 6) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type N2 loaded in step D449 is set in the front notice information 6 area.
In step D452, left military commander character information (precaution data for front notice 7) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type N2 loaded in step D449 is set in the front notice information 7 area.
In step D453, right speech frame information (precaution data for front notice 8) is set in the front notice information 8 area.
In step D454, warrior serif information (forecast data for front notice 9) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type N2 loaded in step D449 is set in the front notice information 9 area.
In step D455, the right military commander character information (precaution data for front notice 10) corresponding to the distribution result of the notice type N2 loaded in step D449 is set in the front notice information 10 area.

Based on the settings of these steps D450 to D455, a notice of two warlords is executed.
When the processing proceeds to step D444, similarly, various types of notice information are set using the notice type area distribution result, and then the process returns.
There are many other types of notice settings, but in order to avoid complications, the setting process for these other notice types is shown collectively in step D444, and details thereof are shown and described. Is omitted.
Further, in this example, the example in which the notice type is set by the program as described above has been described. However, a general-purpose setting process using a data table may be used.

[Inter-submission transmission start processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub transmission start process executed in step D20 in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that inter-sub transmission refers to transmission in inter-sub communication. Inter-sub-communication is communication (in this example, wireless communication) performed between sub-boards (in this example, the production control device) of pachinko machines with different game rooms.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D461 whether there is an inter-sub transmission request (that is, whether the inter-sub transmission request flag set in step D203f described above or step D480 described later is set). If there is an inter-sub transmission request (if the inter-sub transmission request flag is set), the process proceeds to step D462, and if there is no inter-sub transmission request (if the inter-sub transmission request flag is not set), the process returns. .
In step D462, it is determined whether the value of the inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step D466. If it is less than 0, the process returns after executing steps D463 to D465 sequentially. .

In step D463, the inter-sub transmission request flag is cleared (set to a state where it is not set).
In step D464, an intersub transmission permission flag is set.
In step D465, an inter-sub transmission interrupt is permitted. Note that an inter-sub transmission interrupt is permitted in step D465 if data to be transmitted by inter-sub communication occurs, and is prohibited if there is no data to be transmitted (see step D1196 described later).
In step D466, the inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is updated (that is, the timer value is decreased by a certain value). The inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is a timer whose initial value is set in step D479, which will be described later, and which is cleared (value is set to 0) in step D491, which will be described later.

[Inter-task reception task processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub-task reception task process executed in step D21 in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D471 whether there is an inter-sub-reception task request (that is, whether an inter-sub-reception task request flag set in step D1179 described later is set). If there is a task request (if the inter-sub receive task request flag is set), the process proceeds to step D472, and if there is no inter-sub receive task request (if the inter-sub receive task request flag is not set), the process returns. .

In step D472, the SB_MODE data (the value copied in step D1176 described later) of the received inter-subcommand command is loaded from the SB_MODE area, and the process proceeds to step D473.
Proceeding to step D473, it is determined whether or not the SB_MODE data loaded in step D472 indicates terminal ID notification. If it does not indicate terminal ID notification, the process proceeds to step D474, and if terminal ID notification is indicated. Advances to step D481 after sequentially executing steps D482 to D485.

In step D482, the received terminal ID (value copied in step D1175 described later) is loaded from the inter-subcommand command source ID area.
In step D483, the terminal presence / absence information in the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded in step D482 is set to “present”.
In step D484, an initial value is set in the terminal lifetime timer in the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded in step D482. Note that by providing a terminal lifetime timer, a time limit is provided for the gaming machine with the received terminal ID to recognize “is”. In other words, it is necessary to periodically check the existence of each other between the gaming machines that perform inter-sub-communication, and the process (not shown) based on this terminal lifetime timer (for example, until the terminal lifetime timer expires) If the same terminal ID notification is not received again, this confirmation is periodically performed by a process of updating the terminal presence / absence information corresponding to the terminal ID to “none”. This has the following advantages. In other words, if a certain gaming machine loses power or a wireless module suddenly breaks down, for example, if communication between gaming machines that have established communication with each other is no longer established, the opponent exists. It is useless to keep communicating on the premise that there is a difference, and there is a possibility that the effect of the inter-sub presentation will be reduced. For example, as an inter-submission effect, instructions are sent sequentially from the leftmost gaming machine on the island to the adjacent gaming machine by inter-subcommunication, and images of specific characters (characters) are sequentially sent from the leftmost gaming machine on the island to each gaming machine. In the case of performing a continuous effect (a kind of cooperation effect) such that the display device 41 is displayed so as to flow to the right, there is a possibility that the continuous effect is interrupted and interrupted at a gaming machine in which the communication is not established. is there. However, if the configuration is such that the terminal presence information is updated by periodically performing the above confirmation, it is possible to prevent the inter-submission effect from being requested for a gaming machine whose presence is “none” in the middle. Efficient inter-substage production can be performed reliably, such as by performing the above-mentioned interlocking production by skipping a stand whose power has been turned off.
However, since the inter-substage production does not affect the game result, there is a problem even if there is the above-mentioned adverse effect (for example, the adverse effect that the presentation is not performed as a result of requesting the production to the other party that no longer exists). The idea of not being also established. In the case of a specification according to such a concept, the terminal lifetime timer is not necessary.
In step D485, the received game state data (the value copied to the inter-sub command game state region in step D1178 described later) is stored in the game state of the terminal information region corresponding to the terminal ID loaded in step D482.

  When the process proceeds to step D474, it is determined whether the SB_MODE data loaded at step D472 indicates an ack response. If the data does not indicate an ack response, the process proceeds to step D476, and if it indicates an ack response, step D486 is performed. Then, after setting the ack reception flag, the process proceeds to step D481.

In step D476, it is determined whether the SB_MODE data loaded in step D472 is an effect command. If it is not an effect command, the process proceeds to step D481, and if it is an effect command, the process proceeds to step D477.
In step D477, it is determined whether inter-sub data transmission is in progress. If inter-sub data transmission is in progress, the process proceeds to step D481, and if inter-sub data transmission is not in progress, steps D478 to D480 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D480a. Note that inter-sub data transmission is data transmission (for example, command transmission) in inter-sub communication. In the present application, a command transmitted / received by inter-sub-communication is referred to as inter-sub-command.

In addition, the processes in steps D478 to D480 are processes for performing an effect according to the received inter-sub command (particularly an effect command).
In Step D478, various inter-sub commands or parameters for various effects corresponding to the received inter-sub command contents are set.
In step D479, an inter-sub transmission start wait timer is set so as to transmit the inter-sub command set in step D478 to the sub-board of another gaming machine. Similarly, in step D480, an inter-sub transmission request flag is set.

Depending on the contents of the production, there may be a case where the inter-sub command is not generated. In such a case, the setting of the inter-subcommand is not performed in step D478, and the processing of steps D479 and D480 for transmitting the inter-subcommand is not executed, and the process proceeds to step D480a.
In step D480a, it is determined whether the SB_MODE data loaded in step D472 is a command that requires an ack response. If the command does not require an ack response, the process proceeds to step D481, and if the command requires an ack response. Proceeds to step D481 after sequentially executing steps D488 to D491.

Steps D488 to D491 are processes for returning an ack response in response to an ack request.
In step D488, the received transmission source ID is prepared as a transmission destination ID command.
In step D489, data of SB_MODE and SB_ACT of the ack response are prepared. Note that SB_MODE and SB_ACT are data constituting an inter-subcommand command, and are data of the eighth and ninth bytes in the packet configuration example (described later) shown in FIG.
In step D490, inter-sub-transmission data editing processing (described later) is executed.
In step D491, the inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is cleared (the timer value is set to 0).

In step D481, the inter-sub-task reception task request flag is cleared, and then the process returns.
Since steps D477 and D487 are provided, the operation requested by the inter-sub-command (effect-related command) is not performed when inter-sub-data is being transmitted. This is because the inter-sub command does not always need to be handled unlike the command from the main board, and being transmitted means that it is requesting another unit or returning ack. This is because it is not necessary to respond to the request from the table. Moreover, there is a possibility that the contradiction will appear in the production if all the requests are met, but this configuration has the advantage that there is no possibility of such a contradiction. However, this idea is a basic idea, and if there is an effect that is desired to be performed in any state, there may be a mode in which the requested operation is performed even during transmission.

[Inter-submission transmission data editing processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub-transmission data editing process executed in step D490 in the inter-sub-reception task process described above (or step D203c of the above-described reception command-specific initialization process 1) will be described with reference to FIG. It is assumed that the configuration of packets transmitted and received between the subs is the configuration shown in FIG. 158 described later.

When this routine is started, steps D501 to D514 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D501, packet start code (STX) data (for example, 02H) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 0. Here, the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 is a part of a transmission buffer area (inter-sub transmission buffer area) for inter-sub communication, and the storage area at the address 0 in the inter-sub transmission buffer area is inter-sub transmission. Buffer 0 (hereinafter, the same applies to other addresses 1, 2, 3,... 11).
In step D502, the inter-sub transmission data count (SIZE) data (for example, data indicating 12 bytes) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 1.

In step D503, the terminal ID (the terminal ID assigned to the effect control device 300 or the wireless module 360 of the effect control device 300) or the group ID (the pachinko machine belongs) as data of the transmission source ID (SID). ID for identifying a group of pachinko machines) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 2.
In step D504, the data (terminal ID and group ID) of the transmission destination ID (DID) is set in the intersub transmission buffer 3. Note that, in the data of the transmission source ID (SID) and the transmission destination ID (DID), the upper bit of one byte is the group ID and the lower bit is the terminal ID, respectively.
In step D505, the inter-sub-maker code (MAKER) data is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 4.
In step D506, the data of the year code (YEAR) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 5.

In step D507, the inter-sub model code (TYPE) data is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 6.
In step D508, the data of the inter-subcommand command (SB_MODE) (for example, prepared in step D489 described above) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 7.
In step D509, the data of the inter-sub command ACT (SB_ACT) (for example, the data prepared in step D489 described above) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 8.
In step D510, data of its own game state STS (that is, the game state of the pachinko machine) (for example, data indicating that it is the fifth round of the big hit now) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 9.

In step D511, a checksum of setting data (that is, data from STX to STS) from the intersub transmission buffer 0 to the inter sub transmission buffer 9 is calculated. The checksum calculation method is not particularly limited. For example, simple addition may be performed with a 1-byte size.
In step D512, the checksum calculation result (SUM) data calculated in step D511 is set in the inter-sub-transmission buffer 10.
In step D513, packet end code (ETX) data (for example, 03H) is set in the inter-sub-transmission buffer 11.
In step D514, the address of the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 is set as data of the inter-sub transmission pointer (parameter for designating the address of the inter-sub transmission buffer area). This inter-sub transmission pointer is used in step D1192 described later.

[Inter-sub ack response task processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub ack response task process executed in step D22 in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D521 whether the value of the ack waiting timer is 0. If 0, the process returns. If not, the ack waiting timer is updated in step D522. After that, the process proceeds to Step D523. Note that the initial value of the ack waiting timer is set in step D203d described above.

Proceeding to step D523, it is determined whether or not an ack response has been received (that is, whether or not an ack reception flag has been set). If not (when the ack reception flag is not set), the process returns without executing steps D524 to D526. The ack reception flag is set in step D486 described above.
In step D524, the ack reception flag is cleared.
In step D525, the ack waiting timer is cleared.
In step D526, since the ack response has been received, various parameter settings are made to correspond to the effects waiting for the ack response.

[Inter-submission effect setting processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub-effects setting process executed in step D23 in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D531 whether or not there is an inter-submission request (that is, whether or not an inter-subtitle request flag is set). If there is no inter-sub production request (a state where the inter-sub production request flag is cleared), the process returns. The inter-submission effect request flag is set in step D478 described above.

In step D532, it is determined whether the value of the inter-submission production start wait timer is 0. If it is 0, the flow advances to step D533. Return). The inter-submission production start wait timer is a timer set in step D203e described above.
In step D533, the received inter-subcommand commands SB_MODE and SB_ACT (hereinafter, inter-subcommand commands include SB_MODE and SB_ACT) are loaded, and in step D534, the loaded data is inter-sub linked notice It is determined whether the command is an inter-system command, and if it is an inter-sub-linkage advance notice-type command, the process proceeds to step D539, and if it is not an inter-sub-linkage advance notice-type command, the process proceeds to step D535. Note that the inter-sub-linked notice command is a command for a linked effect that links the notice effect with a plurality of pachinko machines performing inter-sub communication. For example, there is an effect in which images of the same character are sequentially displayed on each gaming machine so that the images of the same character move in the horizontal direction within the island, and there are synchronized effects in which the same effect is performed simultaneously in synchronism.

  Proceeding to step D539, an effect operation table corresponding to the effect designated by the SB_MODE and SB_ACT data of the inter-subcommand command loaded at step D533 is set, and then the process proceeds to step D537. It should be noted that the effect operation table set in step D539 is used in step D924 of inter-sub linked advance notice editing processing described later.

  When the process proceeds to step D535, it is determined whether the inter-subcommand data loaded at step D533 is a customer waiting timing adjustment command. If it is a customer waiting timing adjustment command, the process proceeds to step D540. Proceed to D536. The customer waiting timing adjustment command is a command for performing an effect of matching the timing of the customer waiting demonstration display with a plurality of pachinko machines performing inter-sub-communication, and in this case, the customer waiting A is executed in synchronization. It is a command to make.

In step D536, if the inter-subcommand data loaded in step D533 is a normal value, parameters for various effects corresponding to this data are set, and then the process proceeds to step D537.
Proceeding to step D540, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demonstration performance is being performed (that is, whether or not a customer waiting demonstration performance is being performed). Therefore, the process proceeds to step D537, and if the customer waiting demonstration is being performed, the process proceeds to step D541 to adjust the customer waiting timing.
In step D541, the demo status of the pachinko machine (that is, the own machine) that has received the inter-subcommand command (information indicating the type of the customer waiting demonstration effect, etc.) is the symbol display (customer waiting A described above). If it is symbol display (waiting for customer A), the process proceeds to step D543, and if it is not symbol display (waiting for customer A) (that is, if movie display (waiting for customer B) is being executed), the process proceeds to step D542.

In step D542, the demonstration control timer is set to the value of the movie immediate end, and then the process proceeds to step D537. When the demonstration control timer is set to the value of the movie immediate end, the movie display (customer wait B) as the customer wait demonstration display is immediately ended, and the customer wait demonstration effect of the symbol display (customer wait A) is started.
In step D543, the demonstration control timer is initialized to the symbol display start value, and then the process proceeds to step D537. When the demo control timer is initialized to the symbol display start value, the customer waiting demonstration effect on the currently executing symbol display (customer waiting A) is terminated halfway, and the customer waiting demonstration effect on the symbol display (customer waiting A) is started from the beginning. Be started.

  According to the above steps D542 and D543, anyway, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A). As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed on the pachinko machine that transmitted the customer waiting timing adjustment command determined in step D535 and the own machine and other pachinko machines that have received this customer waiting timing adjustment command. It starts synchronously from the beginning of (customer waiting A). The customer waiting demonstration effect started in this way is controlled by a customer waiting display editing process, which will be described later. When the specified time elapses, the symbol display (customer waiting A) is switched to the movie display (customer waiting B). When the time has elapsed, the display is switched from the movie display (waiting for customer B) to the symbol display (waiting for customer A), and so on, as long as the customer waiting demonstration effect is continued, two types of customer waiting demonstration effects are executed alternately.

In step D537, the inter-submission effect request flag is cleared, and then the process returns.
In addition, in this example, the processing of the effect that synchronizes the notice effect and the effect of matching the timing of the customer waiting demonstration effect is given as a specific example of the process for the inter-sub effect. However, the content of the inter-submission effects is not limited to such an aspect, and instead of the aspect of this example or in addition to the aspect of this example, the inter-substance effects may be configured to be performed.
In this example, in order to avoid complication, the setting process of the other types of inter-sub effects is collectively shown in step D536, and the details and illustration thereof are omitted.

[Direction display edit processing]
Next, details of the effect display editing process executed in step D24 in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG. As described in the main process, this effect display editing process is a process for setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41 and parameters thereof. In this effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands set in this way are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D28 (instructing screen drawing) of the main process.
When this routine is started, first in step D550, it is determined whether or not there is a defect in the peripheral circuit in the effect control device, as in step D1301 (FIG. 159). As a result of the determination in step D550, if there is no problem, the process returns after executing steps D551 to D569 sequentially, and if there is a problem, the process returns without executing steps D551 to D569. As a result, even if a command for instructing a customer waiting effect or the like is received from the game control device when there is the above problem, the display based on the command is not executed and the initial screen (in this case, the NG screen) is displayed. Will be continued.

In step D551, a customer waiting display editing process (described later) is executed.
In step D552, initial setting of the drawing area is executed.
In step D553, background editing processing (described later) is executed.
In step D554, background preview editing processing (described later) is executed.
In step D555, a symbol editing process (described later) is executed.
In step D556, the preview editing process 1 (described later) is executed.
In step D557, a pending edit process (described later) is executed.
In step D558, a preview editing process 2 (described later) is executed.
In step D559, inter-sub-linked advance notice editing processing (described later) is executed.
In step D560, a reduced symbol editing process (described later) is executed.
In step D561, a fourth symbol editing process (described later) is executed.
In step D562, a big hit round editing process (described later) is executed.

In step D563, a drawing end declaration is executed. The drawing end declaration is a process for outputting information indicating that various editing processes for one frame have been completed to the VDP 312. As a result, the VDP 312 reports that various editing processes for one frame have been completed.
In step D564, the head address of the left symbol control area is set in the same manner as in step D767 described later.
In step D565, a variable parameter update process (described later) is executed based on the head address set in step D564.
In step D566, the head address of the middle symbol control area is set as in step D764 described later.
In step D567, a variable parameter update process (described later) is executed based on the head address set in step D566.
In step D568, the head address of the right symbol control area is set as in step D770 described later.
In step D569, a variable parameter update process (described later) is executed based on the head address set in step D568.

  Here, the editing process from the background editing process of steps D553 to D561 to the fourth symbol editing process is a process of setting a command group for instructing the VDP 312 to display characters and the like to be displayed on the screen of the display device 41. Then, processing is performed earlier as the depth is displayed on the screen. This is because drawing commands are transmitted to the VDP 312 in the order of the set commands. For example, since the 4th symbol and the like must not disappear during the change, the process is performed at the end in order to display it on the foreground. Even if there is a notice effect, there are those that are performed in front of the symbol and those that are performed in the back, so there are notice editing processes in several places.

  In the case of such a flowchart, since it is necessary to provide the editing process for all theoretical layers, the number of editing processes varies depending on the model. However, it is not limited to such a configuration (a configuration in which the drawing priority is determined by the processing order). For example, there is a method of controlling the processing order to be changed according to the effect at that time. In addition, the processing order is irrelevant when using the function of setting the drawing priority for each character.

  In this example of inter-sub notice, processing is performed with a higher drawing priority so that the effect is conspicuous (that is, the inter-sub notice pre-edit editing process is executed at a relatively later step D559). In addition, the priority order of the inter-sub linked advance notice editing process is made lower than the edit process (steps D560 and D561) such as the fourth figure so as not to hide the fourth symbol and the reduced symbol by displaying the inter-sub linked advance notice. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, there may be an effect such as a shadow in the back of the screen as an inter-sub notice, so change the processing order according to the content of the effect you want to perform. Also good. For other displays, the processing order may be similarly changed.

[Customer waiting display edit processing]
Next, details of the customer waiting display editing process executed in step D551 in the effect display editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D571 whether the customer waiting display control is being performed (that is, the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed). . When the above-described ExMode data instructs a customer waiting demo, a customer waiting demonstration effect is performed.

In step D572, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect is to be initialized. If the customer waiting effect is to be initialized, steps D573 to D575 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D576 to initialize the customer waiting effect. If the state is not to be changed, the process proceeds to step D576 without executing steps D573 to D575.
The state in which the customer waiting effect is to be initialized is a state in which an effect other than the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed and should be switched to the customer waiting A. Specifically, the step of initialization process 1 for each received command described above is performed. If the information of the customer waiting A display start set in D197 is set in the display control flag area, it is determined that this customer waiting effect should be initialized.

In step D573, an update for increasing the customer waiting control pointer by 1 is executed. The customer waiting control pointer is a pointer for designating a position in the customer waiting demonstration control table. The initial value of the customer waiting control pointer is set, for example, in step D197 or D198 of the received command-based initialization process 1 described above.
In step D574, a demonstration control timer corresponding to the customer waiting control pointer is set. That is, the value of the customer waiting demo execution time is read from the information of the customer waiting demo registered at a specific position in the customer waiting demo control table specified by the value of the customer waiting control pointer at that time, and this customer waiting demo is read. Set the execution time value as the demo control timer value. Here, specifically, a time (for example, 30 seconds) for executing customer waiting A is set. The demonstration control timer is a timer for counting the time for executing the customer waiting demonstration effect (that is, the customer waiting demonstration execution time).

Note that the basic operation of the customer waiting effect (that is, the customer waiting demonstration effect) in this example is to alternately perform the “stop symbol display state” (customer waiting A) and the “demo display state by movie playback” (customer waiting B). It is. Each customer waiting demonstration execution time differs depending on the model, and for example, “stop symbol display” (customer waiting A) is set to 120 seconds, and “movie display” (customer waiting B) is set to 30 seconds.
In step D575, since customer waiting A is started, data indicating a symbol display (customer waiting A) is set as a demo status (information indicating the type and state of the customer waiting demonstration effect).

When the process proceeds to step D576, it is determined whether the demo status data is a symbol display. If the symbol status is displayed, steps D577 and D578 are sequentially executed to execute the symbol display, and then the process proceeds to step D579. After the steps D586 and D587 are sequentially executed to stop, the process proceeds to step D579.
In step D577, a decorative symbol display flag is set.
In step D578, a hold display flag is set.
In step D586, the decorative symbol display flag is cleared.
In step D587, the hold display flag is cleared.

When the process proceeds to step D579, an update is performed to decrease the value of the demo control timer by 1 in order to time the customer waiting demo execution time, and then the process proceeds to step D580.
Proceeding to step D580, it is determined whether the value of the demo control timer has become 0 (that is, whether the set customer waiting demo execution time has elapsed). If the value of the demo control timer has become 0, step After D581 to D582 are sequentially executed, the process proceeds to step D583, and if the value of the demonstration control timer is not 0, the process returns.

In step D581, in order to switch from customer waiting A to customer waiting B, or from customer waiting B to customer waiting A, the value of the demo status is switched to data indicating the type of customer waiting demonstration effect different from the current one.
In step D582, an update for increasing the customer waiting control pointer by 1 is executed in order to advance the customer waiting demonstration effect.
Proceeding to step D583, it is determined whether the value of the customer waiting control pointer indicates the last data in the customer waiting demonstration control table. If it is the last, the customer waiting demonstration effect is repeatedly executed from the repeat position of the customer waiting demonstration control table. Therefore, after setting the pointer value of the repeat position as the customer waiting control pointer data in step D584, the process proceeds to step D585, and if not the last, the process proceeds to step D585 without executing step D584.
In step D585, a demo control timer corresponding to the value of the customer waiting control pointer at that time is set, and then the process returns.

According to the above-described customer waiting display editing process, as long as the customer waiting display control is in progress (that is, during the customer waiting demonstration), the “stop symbol display state” (customer waiting A) and “demo display state by movie playback” ( The customer waiting B) is executed alternately for a predetermined customer waiting demonstration execution time.
Although not shown, BGM may be played only during the movie display of the first loop in the customer waiting demonstration display (because it is noisy every time), or by pressing the effect button 9, the current display is displayed. A function of skipping to the next section may be provided so that it can be used when it is desired to view the display of the customer waiting B or when it is troublesome. In this case, the effect button 9 may be disabled for a certain period of time so that the screen is not switched too much, or may be switched by pressing a plurality of times such as double-clicking. Also, to save power, if the customer waiting effect continues for a certain period of time, the lighting of the decorative lamps and the sound output during the customer waiting demonstration performance are turned off, or the video is displayed as a still image to reduce power consumption. It is good also as a structure. At that time, setting the color of the image in accordance with the driving characteristics of the liquid crystal panel increases the effect.

[Background editing processing]
Next, details of the background editing process executed in step D553 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D591 whether or not background display control is being performed (that is, background display is being executed). If the background display control is not being performed, the process returns. If background display control is being performed, the process proceeds to step D592. Note that the determination in step D591 can be made based on, for example, whether NULL (no setting) is set as the value of the background control pointer. For example, if NULL is set as the value of the background control pointer, it can be determined that the background display control is not being performed. The background control pointer is a pointer that designates data in a background control table to be described later.

In step D592, it is determined whether the background information set in the received command initialization process 1 or the received command initialization process 2 is NULL (no setting), and is not NULL (that is, data is set). If so, the process proceeds to step D598 after sequentially executing steps D593 to D597, and proceeds to step D598 without executing steps D593 to D597 if NULL.
Note that “background information” includes, for example, data of the start address of the background control table of a new effect when an instruction to change the background is given. For example, when the special figure is displayed in a variable manner, the background information data (for example, data at the top address designating a specific background control table) is set as the background information in steps D289 and D307 described above. . Accordingly, the processing of this group (steps D593 to D597) is processing for initial setting when performing a new background effect.

In step D593, the background information data is set as the initial value of the background control pointer.
In step D594, the background information data is set as a background control pointer return value.
In step D595, the background information is set to NULL (no setting).
In step D596, a background control timer corresponding to the background control pointer is set.
In Step D597, a background switching flag is set.

When the process proceeds to step D598, it is determined whether the background control data switching initial setting (that is, the process of steps D593 to D597) has been performed immediately before. If not, after executing Step D606, the process proceeds to Step D603.
In step D606, background information update determination processing (described later) is executed.
In step D599, the background CG number corresponding to the background control pointer is set as the background number. Here, “corresponding to the background control pointer” means “corresponding to data in the background control table designated by the background control pointer” (the same applies hereinafter). The background CG number is the number of background image data among the image data (character data) stored in the image ROM 322.
In step D600, the background index number corresponding to the background control pointer (in this example, the background is the innermost 0th in principle) is set as the background index.
In step D601, an audio output request corresponding to the background control pointer is set.
In step D602, a moving image index setting process (described later) is executed.

In step D603, it is determined whether the background image type is a moving image based on the background control pointer. If it is a moving image, the process proceeds to step D607, and if it is a moving image, the process proceeds to step D604.
When the process proceeds to step D604, it is similarly determined whether the background image type is a still image. If it is a still image, the process proceeds to step D608, and if it is a still image, the process proceeds to step D605.
In step D605, it is similarly determined whether the background image type is display off (no display). If the display is off, the process proceeds to step D609, and if the display is off, the process returns.
In step D607, background moving image data editing processing (described later) is executed.
In step D608, background still image data editing processing (described later) is executed.
In step D609, background off data editing processing (described later) is executed.

[Background information update judgment processing]
Next, details of the background information update determination process executed in step D606 in the background editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the address of the background control area is set in step D611, and the process proceeds to step D612. The background control area is an area for storing background effect control data for controlling the background display.
When the process proceeds to step D612, it is determined whether the background display control is being performed (background display is being executed).

  When the process proceeds to step D613, it is determined whether or not the display is with time control. If the display is with time control, the process proceeds to step D615, and otherwise the process returns. The display with time control is a display that changes over time even when there is no change instruction based on a command from the main board.

When the process proceeds to step D615, the display timer value for measuring the time from the previous background change is updated by 1 and the process proceeds to step D616.
When the process proceeds to step D616, it is determined whether the display timer has timed out. If the time has expired, the process proceeds to step D618 after executing an update to increase the value of the background control pointer by 1 in step D617. To return.
In step D618, in the data in the background control table designated by the background control pointer, it is determined whether or not the display status code indicating the background display state is the symbol display system code waiting for the customer. If it is a symbol display code, the process proceeds to step D619, and if it is not a symbol display code waiting for a customer, the process proceeds to step D631.

In step D619, it is determined whether the display status code is a customer waiting symbol display (the display of the customer waiting A described above). Proceed to D628.
In step D620, the symbol display flag and the hold display flag are set. Next, in step D621, an update for increasing the background control pointer by 1 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D631.
In step D628, the symbol display flag and the hold display flag are cleared. Next, in step D629, an update for increasing the background control pointer by 1 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D631. .

In step D631, it is determined whether the display status code is normal update. If it is normal update, the process returns after executing step D634, and if it is not normal update, the process proceeds to step D632.
In Step D634, the background effect control data at the pointer position of the background control pointer is stored in the background control area, and then the process returns.
In step D632, it is determined whether the display status code is returned to the return position. If the display status code is returned to the return position, the process returns to step D633 after executing steps D635 and D636 in sequence. move on.

In step D635, the background control pointer return value is set as the value of the background control pointer (pointer value). In step D636, the background effect control data at the pointer position of the background control pointer (that is, control data corresponding to the return value) is stored in the background control area, and then the process returns.
In step D633, it is determined whether the display status code indicates that the background effect has ended. If the background effect has ended, the process returns after setting NULL (no setting) as the value of the background control pointer in step D637, and the background effect ends. Otherwise return.
According to the routine described above, the background display can be updated when there is time control.

[Video index setting processing]
Next, details of the moving image index setting process executed in step D602 in the background editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D641 whether the background image type is a moving image based on the background control pointer. If it is a moving image, the process proceeds to step D642. Return.
In step D642, it is determined whether or not compression / decompression is stopped (the operation of expanding compressed video data is stopped). If compression / decompression is not stopped, step D642 is repeatedly executed to stop compression / decompression. If there are, steps D643 to D650 are sequentially executed and the process returns. That is, the processing of steps D643 to D650 is executed while compression / decompression is stopped.

In step D643, the width and height data corresponding to the background CG number (background number set in step D599 described above) is set.
In step D644, the background index number set in step D600 is loaded. For example, 128 characters (including movies, background images, designs, etc.) can be arranged on one screen by the VDP 312, and serial numbers (referred to as indexes or index numbers) are assigned to these 128 characters. In the case of the background image, the index number (that is, the background index number) is basically set to 0 as the first (deepest) index. However, since the drawing is not performed at this time, an invalid state flag is set for the target background data.

In general, a “character” means a character or an animal having a property or character, or a property or character, and a computer term may mean a character. However, in the present application, particularly in the description of image display control using VDP, a series of still images or moving images such as a series of movies, background images, design images, and characters images are referred to as characters. Image data (still image data or moving image data) may be referred to as character data.
In step D645, a VRAM index table setting process (not shown) is executed.
In step D646, initialization of the decoding circuit (compressed data decompression circuit 604) is instructed.
In step D647, the start address of the stream data for displaying the background moving image is set.

In step D648, an index of an image development area (area for developing compressed character data) is set. Note that there are three development areas, for example, 0 to 2, and the number of areas to be used is designated by the processing in step D648. In the case of a movie, how many areas are used depends on how the movie is structured, but one area is used only for I frames, two areas are used for I and P frames, and three areas are used for I, P, and B frames. The index to be set is the value of the index numbers 0-2. I, P, and B frames are terms in the moving picture compression technique based on inter-frame prediction.
In step D649, execution options are set. The execution option instructs various settings in the VDP relating to moving image reproduction.
In step D650, the start address of the image development subregion is set. The image development sub-area is a memory area used as an auxiliary for image development.

[Background video data editing processing]
Next, details of the background moving image data editing process executed in step D607 in the background editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D661 to D665 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D661, the above-described index of image data (character data) to be instructed to be drawn is set to the VDP 312.

In step D662, the attribute of the image data is set. Here, basic information (number of colors, color palette, coordinates, etc.) of image data is set.
In step D663, a drawing effect (transparency setting, depth information, etc.) used for displaying the image data is set.
In step D664, the sprite is pasted into the virtual drawing space. This is a process for displaying the image by so-called sprite drawing.
In step D665, a compression / decompression request flag is set. This is a process for requesting the VDP 312 to decompress since the moving image is compressed.

[Background still image data editing processing]
Next, details of the background still image data editing process executed in step D608 in the background editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D671 to D674 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D671, the VDP 312 is instructed to load image data (still image) to be drawn into the VRAM. Since character data (so-called character data) is compressed, the work is performed after being expanded in the VRAM. If image data is designated, the VDP 312 automatically develops in the VRAM.

In step D672, the attribute of the image data is set. Here, basic information (number of colors, color palette, coordinates, etc.) of the image is set.
In step D673, a drawing effect (transparency setting, depth information, etc.) used for displaying the image is set.
In step D674, the sprite is pasted into the virtual drawing space. In other words, the character data developed on the VRAM is pasted to the frame buffer of the VDP 312. This is a process for displaying the image by so-called sprite drawing.

[Background off data editing process]
Next, details of the background off data editing process executed in step D609 in the background editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D681 to D683 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D681, the fill color of the screen is set.
In step D682, a drawing effect is set.
In step D683, a sprite for painting the screen is pasted in the virtual drawing space.
The processing in steps D681 to D683 described above is processing for drawing using the function (rectangular drawing or the like) of the VDP 312 without using data (that is, character data) in the character ROM (image ROM 322). This function is effective when the entire screen fades in or out with white or black.

[Background preview editing process]
Next, details of the background preview editing process executed in step D554 in the effect display editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG. In this routine, the display setting of the notice character displayed at the position which is the front surface of the background and the rear surface of the special drawing is performed. In other words, the preview that is performed in the background is edited.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D691 whether the background notice display control is being executed. If the background notice display control is not being executed (that is, if the background notice effect is not being executed), the process returns. If so (ie, if the background notice effect is being executed), the address of the background notice information area is set in step D692, and the process proceeds to step D693.

  Here, the background notice information area includes background notice data (to be described later) used for background notice display by the above-described received command initialization process 2 (particularly random number lottery processes A, B, and C, notice effect setting processes 1 and 2). This is an area in which, for example, address information designating a line in the notice control table to be set is set. Here, in principle, the background notice data is defined in the scenario table of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the command from the main board and the detailed fluctuation table of the left, middle and right symbols, and linked to the movement of the special figure. It is configured to be written in the background notice information area at the timing. Although there are a plurality of types of notice effects that are performed at a certain timing, the notice data values determined in the above-described random number lottery process (random number lottery processes A, B, C, etc.) can be used to produce an effect that has been selected in advance. It seems to be.

In step D693, it is determined whether the background notice data is set in the background notice information area. If the background notice data is set, steps D694 and D695 are sequentially executed based on the background notice data, and then the process returns. If the background notice data is not set, the process returns without executing steps D694 and D695.
In step D694, a notice information update determination process (described later) is executed. In step D695, a preview display data editing process (described later) is executed.

[Preliminary information update judgment processing]
Next, details of the notice information update determination process executed in step D694 (or steps D864, D914, etc. of the notice edit processes 1 and 2 described later) in the background notice edit process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. .
When this routine is started, first, in step D701, the data of the notice control table pointer indicated by the background notice data input in the notice control area (corresponding to the background notice information area in step D692) is loaded, and the process proceeds to step D702. .

Here, the notice control table pointer data is an address (for example, a head address) in which table-like control data for controlling the notice effect (hereinafter referred to as the notice control table) is stored. That is, when the data of the notice control table pointer is determined, one of a plurality of notice control tables is determined (selected) corresponding to this data, and a specific position (row) in the notice control table is designated. Will be. The pointer means a storage area of a RAM (RAM 311a in this example) in which data of an address such as a table address is stored. Control data such as a notice control table is stored in a ROM (PROM 321 in this example). The notice control table pointer stores the address of the storage area of the ROM in which the notice control table data is stored.
In the notice control table, various data types (for example, an image pattern table address for designating a character type, a coordinate table address for designating a character display position, and a character transparency are designated. A plurality of pieces of data (data such as parameters and table addresses) are set in the order of progress for each data type, and the presentation is performed by appropriately referring to these data in the order of progress. If the data set in the notice control table is a table address (information indicating a storage area in which the table data is stored), the data further corresponds to the area indicated by the data (ie, address) of the table address. There is a type of control data table (for example, a coordinate table, an image pattern table, a transmission table), and effects are performed with reference to the control data table. Also, a plurality of different advance notice control tables are registered in advance, and any of the advance notice control tables is appropriately selected and used for the type of effect and each section (scenario) during the effect. At that time, which notice control table is used is designated by the notice control table pointer data (that is, data stored in a storage area called the notice control table pointer). Hereinafter, for example, the description “designated by the notice control table pointer” means that the data of the notice control table pointer designates in detail.
Note that the pointer for designating the image pattern table is the pointer for designating the image pattern table, the pointer for designating the coordinate table is the pointer for designating the coordinate table. There is a transparency control pointer as a pointer for designating a table.

  In step D702, it is determined in the notice control table specified by the notice control table pointer loaded in step D701 whether the notice status is continuation of notice control. If not notice notice control is continued, the process proceeds to step D721 to continue notice control. If so, the process proceeds to step D703.

In step D703, it is determined whether or not the value of the advance notice start delay timer is greater than 0. If greater than 0, in step D704, the notice display start delay timer value is updated by 1 and the process advances to step D705. If not greater than 0 (less than 0), go to Step D706.
In step D705, it is determined whether or not the notice display start delay timer has timed up (whether the value has reached 0). If the time is not up, the process proceeds to step D706.

  When it is desired to reflect the notice effect from the reference time, a notice display start delay timer is set (in this example, it is set in step D725 described later). When the delay timer is not set (when it is 0), the performance is performed according to the reference time. For example, the timing at which the production is performed, such as the first stage of the step-up notice, is basically determined for each model. This is to prevent the interest from deteriorating because it cannot be predicted at the timing of being scattered every time. However, even in the same SU1 production, the type of character that appears by the distribution is changed, the reliability is changed to enhance the interest of the game, and even in the production of the basic same timing, it is desired to vary the production time depending on the content of the production There are many cases, and in such a case, according to the notice display start delay timer, the start time of the effect can be finely adjusted, and the timing of the end of the effect can be adjusted.

  Step D715 is a process for starting to sound at the notice start timing. In the case of proceeding to Step D715, since the notice display start delay timer has timed out, the notice effect is started, but this is a process for starting to sound at the start timing. However, depending on the type of advance notice, there is a case where no sound output is requested, and in this case, the process of step D715 is skipped.

In step D706, it is determined whether the value of the display frame counter is 0 or more. If it is 0 or more, steps D707 and D708 are executed in sequence, and the process proceeds to step D709.
Here, the display frame counter will be described. There is a scenario even during one notice effect, and it is necessary to set a time value for each section of the notice effect. The display frame counter is a counter that counts the remaining time of the time value of each section. While the value of the display frame counter is 0 or more (that is, while there is the remaining time), it is necessary to update the character type, display coordinates, and the like every frame, and the processing for this is performed after step D707. It is processing.

In step D707, if the currently executed notice effect does not reach the final data, the image pattern control pointer is updated by 1 (that is, switching to the next data arranged in the order of progress in the notice control table described above, and so on) (The same applies to the control pointer of the above).
In step D708, if the notice effect currently being executed has not reached the final data, an update to increase the coordinate control pointer by 1 is executed.
When the process proceeds to step D709, it is determined whether there is a transparent table (table-shaped transparent data) setting for the currently executed notice effect. If there is a transparent table setting, the process proceeds to step D710, and if there is no transparent table setting. Proceed to step D711.

In step D710, if the notice effect currently being executed has not reached the final data, an update for increasing the transmission control pointer by 1 is executed, and then the process advances to step D711.
In step D711, it is determined whether the value of the display frame counter is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, update is performed to decrease the value of the display frame counter by 1 in step D712. Proceed to step D713 without executing step D712.

  In step D713, it is determined whether the value of the display frame counter is 0. If it is 0, in step D714, an update for increasing the value of the notice control table pointer by 1 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D721. . Here, when the display frame counter = 0, the notice control table pointer is updated to shift to the next scenario. The flow of the scenario is defined in the notice control table, and the position (row) in the notice control table designated by the notice control table pointer is switched to the following by updating the value of the notice control table pointer by one.

In step D721, it is determined whether the notice status is initialized. If it is not initialized, the process proceeds to step D722. If it is initialized, steps D732 and D733 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D725.
In step D732, an update to increase the notice control table pointer by 1 is executed.
In step D733, the value of the previous notice control table pointer is set as a table pointer return value.
In step D722, it is determined whether the notice status is normal update. If it is not normal update, the process proceeds to step D723. If normal update, the process proceeds to step D725.

In step D723, it is determined whether or not the notice status is returned to the return position. If not, the process proceeds to step D724.
In step D734, the control table pointer return value (the table pointer return value set in step D733) is set as the value of the notice control table pointer.

In step D724, it is determined whether or not the notice status is the notice effect end. If the notice effect is not finished, the process proceeds to step D725. If the notice effect is finished, step NULL is set after setting NULL in the notice control table pointer in step D735. Proceed to D725. When NULL is set in the notice control table pointer, execution of the notice effect ends.
In step D725, a notice display start delay timer is set. Next, in step D726, a notice display frame counter (the aforementioned display frame counter) is set, and then, the process proceeds to step D727.

  In step D727, it is determined whether the value of the notice display start delay timer is 0. If not, the process proceeds to step D729. If it is 0, the corresponding audio output request is set in step D728, and the process proceeds to step D729. This is a process for immediately starting to sound when the delay timer = 0, since the notice effect is immediately started. Depending on the type of notice, a configuration may be adopted in which no sound output is required.

  In step D729, an image pattern control pointer is set. Next, in step D730, a coordinate control pointer is set. Next, in step D731, a transmission control pointer is set. Then, the process proceeds to step D1201. Here, since a new effect (including scenario continuation) is performed, it is necessary to designate a new control data table corresponding to the effect. These steps D729 to D731 are processes for setting the head address of the new control data table.

After step D731, the process proceeds to steps D1201 to D1208.
In step D1201, it is determined whether there is an inter-sub command setting. If there is no setting, the routine is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if there is an inter-subcommand setting, the process proceeds to step D1202 to set data corresponding to the command (inter-subcommand) content. Data setting is to set a production operation table for the own game machine (own machine) to operate according to the contents of the inter-sub command, or to set and clear the inter-sub production execution flag It is.
Note that when the inter-sub command is set in step D1201, a notice for performing a linked notice effect is executed during a variable display game based on the graphic variable command transmitted from the game control device 100. This is equivalent to a situation in which an inter-sub command is defined on the notice operation table at that time. At this time, a condition for starting an inter-sub notice effect by inter-sub communication is established.

After step D1202, the process proceeds to step D1203. In step D1203, it is determined whether or not inter-sub data is being transmitted. If not, the process proceeds to step D1204 to determine a transmission destination ID based on the command content. This is to specify the terminal ID of the other party's machine (other gaming machine) that transmits data by inter-sub-communication, and when sending a customer waiting effect command, all the machines in the same group on the island The terminal ID is designated. In this case, data (broadcast data) for all the units (however, excluding the own device) is determined as the transmission destination ID.
As shown in the packet configuration example of FIG. 158, in this example, when specifying IDs of all the devices in the same group on the island, “0F” is set as the terminal ID of the transmission destination, and all terminals are targeted. Notify that there is. Moreover, in the case of an effect such as exchanging with a specific unit, the terminal ID of that unit is designated.
On the other hand, if inter-sub data is being transmitted in step D1203, the routine is terminated and the process returns.
After step D1204, the process proceeds to step D1205 to perform inter-sub-transmission data editing processing (FIG. 120). Next, an inter-sub transmission request flag is set in step D1206. The inter-sub-transmission request flag is used for the determination in step D461. When the inter-sub-transmission request flag is set, inter-sub transmission is started.

Next, in step D1207, it is determined whether or not the inter-subcommand to be transmitted this time is a command waiting for ack, and if it is not a command waiting for ack, the process returns. On the other hand, if the command is waiting for ack, the process proceeds to step D1208, where the initial value of the ack waiting timer is set, and then the process returns.
As described above, in this example, the inter-subcommand of the customer waiting demo synchronization includes the content requesting the reply of ack, but the same applies to the “inter-sub-linkage advance notice command”. In D1207, it is determined whether or not the command is waiting for ack, and if it is the same command, the initial value of the ack waiting timer is set.
In this way, a certain variation pattern is to be performed on the own aircraft. For example, when the notice mode A is selected, the symbol variation of the special figure proceeds, and when the timing of occurrence of the notice mode A comes, the notice mode A Is set in the notice control area, and the notice is executed. Then, the scenario of the notice mode A is defined on the table in the own machine, but the transmission command (for example, “inter-sub linked notice command”) to the other machine is also defined in the table. In step D1201, the determination result is that there is an inter-subcommand setting.
In addition, when the other machine receives the “Inter-sub-link advance notice-related command” and decides to execute the production in response to the command (inter-sub-link advance notice-related command), the advance action table is set and the inter-sub-link is established. A notice will be given.

[Preliminary display data editing processing]
Next, details of the notice display data editing process executed in step D695 (or steps D865, D915, etc. of the notice edit processes 1 and 2 described later) in the background notice edit process described above will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is a process of creating a drawing instruction command (command for VDP 312) of a notice effect character (including a movie, etc., indicating an image stored in a character ROM (image ROM 322)). The same applies to the processing in the subsequent figures (FIGS. 135 to 147).
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D741 whether or not the value of the notice display start delay timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, the process returns. If it is not greater than 0 (if 0 or less), Proceed to step D742.

In step D742, it is determined whether the image pattern table data designated by the image pattern control pointer is NULL (no setting). If it is NULL, the process returns. Proceed to step D746.
In step D743, various parameters (image data ID, width, height, etc.) of the image data (ie, character data) are acquired from the image pattern table.
In step D744, the coordinate data of the image data is acquired from the coordinate table specified by the coordinate control pointer.
In step D745, transmission data without transmission is set. The transparency data is set in step D747, which will be described later, as necessary. Here, no transparency is set as the default value of the transparency data.

In step D746, it is determined whether the data of the transparency table designated by the transparency control pointer is NULL (no setting). If it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D748. .
In step D747, the transmission data (the data once set to be non-transparent in step D745) is replaced with data corresponding to the transmission table (there may be no transmission).

When the process proceeds to Step D748, Steps D748 to D752 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D748, an instruction to load image data (character data) corresponding to the parameter acquired in step D743 into the VRAM is given.
In step D749, the attributes (number of colors, color palette, coordinates, etc.) of the image data are set according to the parameters acquired in step D743 and the coordinate data acquired in step D744.
In step D750, the transmission parameters of the image data (whether or not to perform transmission control to make a transparent image, the degree of transparency, etc.) are set according to the transmission data.
In step D751, the image data rendering effect (transparency setting, depth information, etc.) is set.
In step D752, the sprite is pasted into the virtual drawing space. This is a process for displaying the image (character) by so-called sprite drawing.

[Design editing process]
Next, details of the symbol editing process executed in step D555 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D761 whether the data in the symbol variation table area (for example, information on the start address of the symbol variation table) is NULL (no setting). If NULL, the process returns and NULL is returned. Otherwise, after executing step D762, the process proceeds to step D763. Here, in step D761, a “left symbol variation table region” in step D781, which will be described later, a “variation table region in the left symbol control region” in step D782, a “middle symbol variation table region” in step D785, and “ It is checked whether all six areas of the “variable table area in the middle symbol control area”, “right symbol fluctuation table area” in step D789, and “variation table area in the right symbol control area” in step D790 are all NULL.
In step D762, a symbol information expansion process (described later) is executed based on the symbol variation table data specified by the symbol variation table area data.

  The symbol variation table is a table in which a plurality of address data for designating a symbol control table to be described later is set in a table. In the initialization process 1 for each received command and the initialization process 2 for each received command, a table corresponding to the command from the main board is selected from a plurality of symbol variation tables, and any row (record) on this table is selected. Whether to use is determined by random number lottery processing (random number lottery processing A, B, C described above). And the information which shows the symbol fluctuation | variation table determined in this way and its row | line | column (record) is written as the data of the said symbol fluctuation | variation table area | region. This symbol variation table includes types such as an early-stage variation table, a first-half variation table, and a second-half variation table. The symbol variation table includes a left symbol variation table, a middle symbol variation table, and a right symbol variation table.

Moreover, there is a symbol variation table pointer as a pointer for storing symbol variation table data (that is, a pointer for designating a symbol control table). Here, the symbol variation table data stores, for example, table-like control data (hereinafter referred to as a symbol control table) for controlling symbol variations (variable display of special symbols (decorative symbols) on the display device 41). Address (for example, head address). That is, when the data of the symbol variation table pointer is determined, one of a plurality of symbol control tables is determined (selected) for this data, and a specific position (row) in the symbol control table is designated. Will be. In this symbol control table, various data types (for example, symbol operation pattern, symbol update information, number of control frames, number of control repeats, coordinate table address for designating symbol display position (X coordinate table address and Y Coordinate table address), transparency table address for design transparency, etc., and multiple data (parameters, table addresses and pattern data) are set in order of progress for each data type. The symbols are changed with reference to the order of progress. When the data set in the symbol control table is a table address, the control data table of the corresponding type (for example, the X coordinate table, the Y coordinate) is further displayed in the area indicated by the data (ie, address) of the table address. There is a table, a transparent table), and symbol variation is performed with reference to the control data table.
Note that there are coordinate control pointers (X coordinate table pointer and Y coordinate table pointer) as pointers for designating the coordinate tables (X coordinate table, Y coordinate table), and there are transparent table pointers as pointers for designating the transparent table.

  When the process proceeds to step D763, it is determined whether or not decorative symbol display (display for so-called special drawing) is executed based on the processing result of step D762. If there is no display, the process returns, and if there is, execution of steps D764 to D772 is executed sequentially. Return later. In this step D763, for example, if all the data of each symbol variation table is NULL (the determination results in steps D781, D785, and D789 described later are all YES), the determination result that the decorative symbol display is not executed is returned. Will do.

In step D764, the start address of the medium symbol control area is set. The middle symbol control area is an area in which the address of the symbol control table designated for the middle symbol is stored in the symbol information expansion process (step D786 described later). That is, in this step D764, the head address of the symbol control table designated for the middle symbol is set for displaying the middle symbol. Note that the middle symbol design control table is designated (selected) by the above-described symbol variation table pointer data (specifically, the middle symbol variation table data).
The symbol control area (middle symbol control area, left symbol control area, and right symbol control area) is not only the table address (symbol variation table pointer data), but also the display symbol number, stop symbol number, and current frame counter. A group (structure) of storage areas in a RAM (RAM in the CPU 311 in this example) in which data such as a table pointer of the coordinate table is stored, and is composed of a plurality of bytes. For this reason, each symbol control area is divided into a plurality of areas. Among these areas, an area for storing a table address (symbol variation table pointer data) is referred to as a “variation table area”. As the “variation table area”, there are provided an initial-stage fluctuation table, a first-half fluctuation table, and a second-half fluctuation table, respectively, for a total of three areas. In each symbol control area, an area for storing data of a table pointer (X coordinate table pointer, Y coordinate table pointer) of a coordinate table or data of a table pointer (transparent table pointer) of a transparent table, They are referred to as “X coordinate table area”, “Y coordinate table area”, and “transparent table area”.
In step D765, the current symbol display editing process (described later) is executed for the middle symbol based on the setting in step D764. In step D766, the next symbol display editing process (described later) is similarly executed for the middle symbol.

In step D767, the head address of the left symbol control area is set. The left symbol control area is an area in which the address of the symbol control table designated for the left symbol is stored in the symbol information expansion process (step D782 described later). That is, in step D767, the head address of the symbol control table designated for the left symbol is set for displaying the left symbol. The symbol control table for the left symbol is designated (selected) by the above-described symbol variation table pointer data (specifically, the left symbol variation table data).
In step D768, the current symbol display editing process (described later) is executed for the left symbol based on the setting in step D767. In step D769, the next symbol display editing process (described later) is similarly executed for the left symbol.

In step D770, the start address of the right symbol control area is set. The right symbol control area is an area in which the address of the symbol control table designated for the right symbol is stored in the symbol information expansion process (step D790 described later). That is, in step D770, the head address of the symbol control table designated for the right symbol is set for displaying the right symbol. The symbol control table for the right symbol is designated (selected) by the symbol variation table pointer data described above (specifically, the data for the right symbol variation table).
In step D771, the current symbol display editing process (described later) is executed for the right symbol on the basis of the setting in step D770. Similarly, in step D772, the next symbol display editing process (described later) is executed for the right symbol.

  The “current symbol” is a special symbol displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the center) in the scroll direction, and the “next symbol” is a special symbol displayed at the predetermined position next to the current symbol. The “previous symbol” is a special symbol displayed at the predetermined position in front of the current symbol. In this routine (and other related routines), only the “current symbol” and “next symbol” processes are illustrated and described for the sake of simplicity, but the symbols in the same column are displayed on the screen. In the case of a model that can be seen by symbols, display editing processing of “previous symbols” needs to be executed in the same manner. This point needs to be adaptable depending on model specifications, and there can be various aspects. For example, in the case of a model that can be seen more than 4 symbols, the display editing process is further increased.

[Design information expansion processing]
Next, details of the symbol information expansion process executed in step D762 in the above-described symbol edit process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D781 whether the data in the left symbol variation table area (that is, address information for specifying the symbol control table for the left symbol) is NULL (no setting). In step D785, if not NULL, steps D782 to D784 are sequentially executed, and then step D785 is executed.

In step D782, the table address indicated by the data in the left symbol variation table area is set in the left symbol control area. Specifically, the table address (left symbol variation table in the initial variation table) indicated by the data of the symbol variation table region is indicated in each variation table region (for the early variation table, for the first variation table, and for the second variation table) in the left symbol control area. Address, left symbol variation table address in the first half variation table, and left symbol variation table address in the second half variation table).
In step D783, NULL is set in the left symbol variation table area.
In step D784, various control parameters for the left symbol are obtained and stored from the symbol control table for the left symbol designated by the table address set in the left symbol control area in step D782.
Here, as described in the description of the symbol control table, the various control parameters of symbols include the operation pattern, symbol update information, the number of control frames, the number of control repeats, the X coordinate table pointer, the Y coordinate table pointer, and the transparent table. There are pointers. Here, the symbol update information is information for controlling whether or not the symbol is updated, and the number of control frames and the number of control repeats are parameters used in a variable parameter update process described later.

Proceeding to step D785, it is determined whether the data in the middle symbol variation table area (that is, address information designating the symbol control table for the middle symbol) is NULL (no setting), and if it is NULL, the procedure proceeds to step D789. If it is not NULL, Steps D786 to D788 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D789.
In step D786, the table address indicated by the data in the middle symbol variation table area is set in the middle symbol control area. Specifically, the table address indicated by the data in the symbol variation table area (the middle symbol variation table in the early variation table) is stored in each variation table region (for the early variation table, for the first variation table, and for the second variation table) in the middle symbol control area. , The address of the middle symbol variation table in the first half variation table, and the address of the middle symbol variation table in the second half variation table).
In step D787, NULL is set in the middle symbol variation table area.
In step D788, various control parameters for the middle symbol are acquired from the symbol control table for the middle symbol designated by the table address set in the middle symbol control area in step D786 and stored.

Proceeding to step D789, it is determined whether the data in the right symbol variation table area (that is, the address information specifying the symbol control table for the right symbol) is NULL (no setting). If NULL, the process returns and is not NULL. In this case, the process returns after sequentially executing steps D790 to D792.
In step D790, the table address indicated by the data in the right symbol variation table area is set in the right symbol control area. Specifically, the table address indicated by the data in the symbol variation table area (the right symbol variation table in the early variation table) is stored in each variation table region (for the early variation table, for the first variation table, and for the second variation table) in the right symbol control area. , The address of the right symbol variation table in the first half variation table, and the address of the right symbol variation table in the second half variation table).
In step D791, NULL is set in the right symbol variation table area.
In Step D792, various control parameters for the right symbol are acquired from the symbol control table for the right symbol designated by the table address set in the right symbol control area in Step D790 and stored.

[Current symbol display editing process]
Next, the details of the current symbol display editing process executed in steps D765, D768, and D771 in the symbol editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D801 to 803 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D804.
In step D801, the CG number (image data ID) corresponding to the symbol number (the symbol number to be displayed on the display device 41 as the current symbol) is set as the CG number of the current symbol. In the case of a symbol only figure, this setting is changed in step D821 described later.
In step D802, the width and height data at the normal size and the data without transparency are set for the current symbol. Note that the setting here is a setting as a default value, and is changed when step D816 or the like to be described later is executed.

In step D803, X coordinate and Y coordinate data in the symbol control table corresponding to the control table pointer (data corresponding to the X coordinate table pointer and Y coordinate table pointer acquired in step D784 described above) are acquired and set. To do. The setting here is a setting as a default value, and is changed when step D817 or the like to be described later is executed. The X coordinate and Y coordinate data are data for determining the display position on the screen of the display device 41.
As the coordinate data (X-coordinate and Y-coordinate data), in principle, symbol display position data (absolute coordinate data) for each frame unit is a coordinate table (X-coordinate table, Y-coordinate table). There are as many frames as required above. Here, if all the coordinate data for the number of frames for the entire production time are defined in a form that is enumerated, it is only necessary to sequentially use the data, so that the control of the coordinates can be performed very easily (for example, the control process is simplified). Become). However, in this case, since there is a demerit that the data amount of the coordinate table becomes enormous, in this embodiment, the table is defined separately for each part where the movement is repeated periodically, and the table corresponding to the operation Is appropriately selected and used. With this configuration, processing to set the table according to the situation and control to repeat the same operation must be performed, but the amount of coordinate data can be greatly reduced, and the capacity of expensive memory (ROM) can be significantly reduced. There are advantages such as being able to greatly contribute to cost reduction. For example, since the same movement is repeated for a while during the period in which the symbol is scrolled downward at high speed, a coordinate table defining one set of coordinate data for the number of frames when moving from top to bottom is provided. Since it is sufficient to use the coordinate table repeatedly during the high-speed scroll period, the amount of data can be greatly reduced. In either configuration, the coordinate control of the symbol is possible, but as described above, in this embodiment, the latter configuration is used. In this embodiment, the X coordinate and Y coordinate tables are defined separately, and each table is selected as necessary (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are arranged at high speed). When scrolling downward, the X coordinate of each symbol is different, but the Y coordinate is the same, so a different table is used for each X coordinate table, and the same table can be used for the Y coordinate table. However, the X and Y coordinates and other display parameters may be defined in the same table. In addition, although an example in which control is performed using absolute coordinates has been presented, a configuration in which control is performed using relative coordinate data (movement amount data from a previous position, distance data from a reference object, or the like) may be employed. The coordinate control configuration (coordinate table configuration, etc.) described above is not limited to the design, and the same applies to the coordinate control of all objects (characters) displayed on the screen.
In step D804, it is determined whether or not the data of the operation pattern acquired in step D784 described above indicates non-display.

In step D805, it is determined whether the data of the operation pattern indicates a reduced screen corner display. If the reduced screen corner display, no further setting is necessary, and the process returns. Proceed to D806.
In step D806, it is determined whether or not the data of the operation pattern indicates enlarged display. If enlarged display, steps D816 and D817 are sequentially executed, and then the process advances to step D809.
In step D816, the width and height data in the enlarged size are set for the current symbol.
In step D817, Y coordinate data at the time of enlargement is calculated and set for the current symbol.

In step D807, it is determined whether or not the data of the operation pattern indicates a return operation to the normal size. If it is not a return operation, the process proceeds to step D808.
In step D818, the width and height data corresponding to the current size are calculated and set for the current symbol.
In step D819, Y coordinate data corresponding to the current size is calculated and set.

When the process proceeds to step D808, it is determined whether or not the data of the motion pattern indicates only a number. If the number pattern is only a number, steps D820 and D821 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D809. Proceed to
In step D820, width and height data are set for only numbers.
In step D821, only the number corresponding to the symbol number is changed to the symbol CG number.

Proceeding to step D809, it is determined whether or not the transmission data of the current symbol is NULL. If it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D811, and if it is not NULL, transmission data (set in step D784 etc.) is acquired in step D810. Thereafter, the process proceeds to Step D811. When the process proceeds to step D811, steps D811 to D815 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D811, an instruction to load the current symbol image data (corresponding to the CG number set in step D801 or D821) to the VRAM is issued.

In step D812, attributes (number of colors, color palette, coordinates, etc.) of the image data are set based on the processing results so far.
In step D813, the transmission parameter of the image data is set based on the transmission data.
In step D814, a drawing effect for the image data is set.
In step D815, the sprite of the image is pasted in the virtual drawing space.
Through the above processing, the VDP 312 for rendering (displaying) the “current symbol” (left symbol, middle symbol, or right symbol) corresponding to the data of the various control parameters stored in steps D784, D788, and D792 described above. The command is edited.

[Next symbol display editing process]
Next, details of the next symbol display editing process executed in steps D766, D769, and D772 in the symbol editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D831, the symbol number (for example, the number next to the symbol number of the current symbol in step D801) is loaded as the number of the next symbol, and then the process proceeds to step D832.
In step D832, it is determined whether the number obtained by adding 1 to the symbol number loaded in step D831 is larger than the symbol number upper limit value. If not, the procedure proceeds to step D834. After the symbol number loaded in step D831 is changed to 0, the process proceeds to step D834.

When the process proceeds to Step D834, Steps D834 to D836 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D837.
In step D834, the CG number (image data ID) corresponding to the load value is set as the CG number of the next symbol.
In step D835, the width and height data at the normal size and the data without transparency are set for the next symbol. Note that the setting here is a setting as a default value, and is changed when step D849 or the like to be described later is executed.

In step D836, the X coordinate and Y coordinate data of the next symbol are relatively calculated and set based on the coordinate data of the current symbol set in the current symbol display editing process. The setting here is a setting as a default value, and is changed when step D850 or the like to be described later is executed.
In step D837, it is determined whether or not the data of the operation pattern acquired in the above-described step D784 indicates non-display.

Proceeding to step D838, it is determined whether the data of the operation pattern indicates a reduced screen corner display. If the reduced screen corner display, no further setting is necessary, and the process returns. Proceed to D839.
When the process proceeds to step D838, it is determined whether or not the data of the operation pattern indicates only a number. If the number pattern is only a number, no further setting is necessary, and the process returns. .

In step D840, it is determined whether the data of the operation pattern indicates enlarged display. If enlarged display, steps D849 and D850 are executed in sequence, and then the process advances to step D842. If not, the process advances to step D841.
In step D849, the width and height data in the enlarged size are set for the next symbol.
In step D850, the Y coordinate data at the time of enlargement is calculated and set for the next symbol.

When the process proceeds to step D841, it is determined whether the data of the operation pattern indicates a return operation to the normal size. If it is the return operation to the normal size, steps D851 and D852 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D842. If it is not a return operation to step S851, the process proceeds to step D842 without executing steps D851 and D852.
In step D851, the width and height data corresponding to the current size are calculated and set for the next symbol.
In step D852, Y coordinate data corresponding to the current size is calculated and set for the next symbol.

When the process proceeds to step D842, it is determined whether or not the transmission data of the next symbol is NULL. If it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D844, and if it is not NULL, the transmission data is acquired in step D843 and then the process proceeds to step D844. When the process proceeds to Step D844, Steps D844 to D848 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D844, an instruction to load image data of the next symbol (corresponding to the CG number set in step D834) to the VRAM is instructed.

In step D845, the attributes (number of colors, color palette, coordinates, etc.) of the image data are set based on the processing results so far.
In step D846, the transmission parameter of the image data is set based on the transmission data.
In step D847, the image data drawing effect is set.
In step D848, the sprite of the image is pasted in the virtual drawing space.
By the above processing, the “next symbol” (left symbol, middle symbol, or right symbol) for the “current symbol” corresponding to the data of the various control parameters stored in the aforementioned steps D784, D788, D792 is drawn (displayed). A command to the VDP 312 for editing is edited.

[Preliminary Editing Process 1]
Next, details of the advance notice editing process 1 executed in step D556 in the aforementioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. In this routine, the display setting of the notice character displayed on the front surface of the special drawing and the rear surface of the hold display is performed.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D861 whether or not the notice display control is in progress. If the notice display control is not being executed (that is, if the notice effect is not being executed), the process returns. If the notice effect is being executed), the address of the notice information area is set in step D862, and the process proceeds to step D863.
Here, the notice information area is an area in which notice data (for example, information on the start address of the notice control table) used for notice display in the above-described initialization process 2 for each received command is set.

In step D863, it is determined whether or not the above notice data is set in the notice information area. If there is notice data set, steps D864 and D865 are sequentially executed based on the notice data, and then the process proceeds to step D866. If it is not set (if NULL), the process proceeds to step D866 without executing steps D864 and D865.
In step D864, the above-described notice information update determination process is executed. In step D865, the above-described notice display data editing process is executed.
When the process proceeds to step D866, the address is updated to the address of the next notice information area. Next, in step D867, it is determined whether editing has been completed for all the notice information areas, and if completed, the process returns. Return to D863 and repeat the process.

[Hold edit processing]
Next, details of the pending editing process executed in step D557 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step D871, a special figure 1 hold display editing process (to be described later) for executing the hold display of the start memory of FIG. 1 is executed, and then at step D872, the special figure is displayed. The special figure 2 hold display editing process for executing the hold display of start memory 2 is executed, and then the process returns. The difference between the special figure 1 hold display editing process and the special figure 2 hold display edit process is the difference in the type of decorative special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2). Description of is omitted.

[Special Figure 1 Hold Display Edit Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 hold display edit process executed in step D871 in the above-described hold edit process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D881 whether or not hold display control is in progress (that is, hold display is being executed). If hold display control is being executed, step D882 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D883. Returns if not under control.
In step D882, the width and height data of the reserved image data are set.

When the process proceeds to step D883, steps D883 to D895 are repeatedly executed until the value of num is incremented by 1 from the initial value −1 until the final value becomes 4, and then the process returns. That is, in step D883, immediately after the routine starts, the value of num is set to 1, and the process proceeds to step D3884. In step D895, if the value of num is less than 4, the process returns to step D883, and if the value of num is 4, the process returns. Then, when returning to step D883, the value of num is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step D884.
In this example, in order to display the same type of decorative display on both sides of the four hold displays (actual hold), the processing of steps D883 to D895 is repeated a total of six times.
Hereafter, each process of step D884 thru | or D894 is demonstrated.

In step D884, a hold display pattern editing process (described later) is executed.
In step D885, a CG number corresponding to a display pattern for hold display or decoration display is set corresponding to the value of num.
In step D886, an instruction to load image data (character data of the CG number) to the VRAM is issued.
In step D887, the attribute of the image data is set.
In step D889, the image data drawing effect is set.
In step D890, X-coordinate, Y-coordinate, width, and height data of the image data are calculated corresponding to the value of num.

In step D891, it is determined whether there is a movement of the holding coordinates (holding display movement control described above). If there is a movement, steps D892 and D893 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D894. If there is no movement, steps D892 and D893 are executed. Do not proceed to step D894. Note that the hold display movement control is set to none in the above-described steps D203, D210, D235, D259, D276, and the like.
In step D892, the coordinates of the image data are changed in correspondence with the pending movement table pointer. The holding movement table pointer is a pointer for controlling the holding display, like the above-described symbol variation table pointer.
In step D893, if the data of the pending movement table pointer is not the end of the table, the pending movement table pointer is updated.
In step D894, the sprite of the image data is pasted in the virtual drawing space.
In step D895, as described above, when the value of num is less than 4, the process returns to step D883, and when the value of num is 4, the process returns.

[Hold display pattern editing process]
Next, details of the hold display pattern editing process executed in step D884 in the above-described special figure 1 hold display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is executed for one hold display (or decoration display) corresponding to the value of num described above.
When this routine is started, first, in step D901, a display pattern for holding off is set for the holding display (or decoration display) corresponding to the value of num. In this routine, when a display pattern for turning off the hold (character information indicating a state where there is no hold) is set, a character indicating a state where there is no hold is displayed, and when a later-described step D906 of this routine is executed, the hold is performed. A lighting display pattern (character information indicating a state where there is a hold) is set, and a character indicating a state where there is a hold is displayed. Note that, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, there is a mode in which the holding character is displayed only when there is a holding to be controlled, and the holding character is not displayed when there is no holding to be controlled. In such an aspect, when a display pattern for holding off is set, there may be an aspect in which the control relating to the character display of the target holding number is not executed after exiting this routine.

After step D901, the process proceeds to step D902, where it is determined whether the input parameter (num value) is in the actual pending range. As described above, since there are four actual holds excluding both sides, the actual hold is within the range of 0 to less than 3. If it is not in the range of actual hold, it can always be turned off, and the process returns. If it is in the range of actual hold, the process proceeds to step D903.
When the processing proceeds to step D903, it is determined whether the current number of holdings (the latest value of the number of holdings of start memory commanded by a command from the main board) is larger than the input parameter (num value). If it is larger than the value of num, the process proceeds to step D904. On the other hand, if the current number of holds is equal to or less than the value of num, the process returns because the actual hold corresponding to the value of num should not be lit.

In step D904, a display pattern is loaded from the hold information area (corresponding to the color information area in step D265 described above) corresponding to the input parameter (num value), and the display pattern loaded in the determination in the next step D905 is held off. If it is, the process returns, and if the loaded display pattern is not turned off, the process proceeds to step D906.
Then, when proceeding to Step D906, a display pattern of on-hold normal lighting is set for the on-hold display (or decoration display) corresponding to the value of num, and then the process returns.
Here, in the hold information area, display pattern data (hold off or hold on) based on the latest value of the number of holds in the start memory commanded by the command from the main board by the processing of step D265 described above. (Including such information) is updated and registered as appropriate.
In step D906, such a hold is made by setting the lighting color of the hold display using the setting in step D268 described above, or changing the hold display to a character shape different from the normal one. A pre-reading effect (an effect of notifying a big hit or the like) by a difference in display may be performed.

[Preliminary Editing Process 2]
Next, details of the advance notice editing process 2 executed in step D558 in the aforementioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. In this routine, the display setting of the notice character displayed on the front side of the hold display and the rear side of the reduced symbol or the fourth symbol is performed. Although it is an effect display pushed out to the front to make it stand out as a notice, it is behind the reduced symbol and the 4th symbol, so that the player can see the symbol while performing this effect Has been.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D911 whether front notice display control is being performed (that is, front notice effect is being executed). If front notice display control is not in progress, the process returns. To set the address of the front notice information area and proceed to step D913.
Here, the front notice information area is an area in which, for example, front notice data (for example, information on the start address of the front notice control table) used for the front notice display in the initialization process 2 for each received command described above is set. .

Proceeding to step D913, it is determined whether the front notice data is set in the front notice information area (for example, the setting in step D425 described above). If there is front notice data set, step D914 is performed based on the front notice data. , D915 is executed after sequential execution, and if the front notice data is not set (that is, if NULL), the process returns without executing steps D914 and D915.
In step D914, the notice information update determination process described above is executed. In step D915, the notice display data editing process described above is executed.

[Inter-sub link advance notice editing process]
Next, details of the inter-sub-linkage advance notice editing process executed in step D559 in the aforementioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, this routine is arranged so that the inter-sub-linked notice is displayed before the front notice with the intention of making the notice noticeable from the front notice (by the notice editing process 2). The character display of the linked advance notice is not limited to this position. The inter-sub-linked announcement may be an effect form in which a character appears in the background, for example, or may be an effect form entwined with a special figure. In the case where an effect such as displaying a message for a player is performed as an inter-sub-linkage advance notice, there is an advantage that the message is not hidden by a symbol or the like if the display position is set as in this embodiment.

When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D921 whether the inter-sub-linked notice display control is being performed (that is, the inter-sub-linked notice display control is being executed). If the notice display control is being performed, the address of the inter-sub-linked notice information area is set in step D922, and the process proceeds to step D923.
Here, the inter-sub-link advance notice information area is, for example, inter-sub-link advance notice data (for example, information on the start address of the inter-sub-link advance notice control table used in the inter-sub-link advance notice display in the initialization process 2 by received command described above). ) Is set.

Proceeding to step D923, it is determined whether or not the inter-sub linked advance notice data is set in the inter-sub linked advance notice information area. Are sequentially executed, and if the inter-sub-linkage advance notice data is not set (that is, if NULL), the process returns without executing steps D924 and D925.
In step D924, the notice information update determination process described above is executed. In step D925, the notice display data editing process described above is executed.

[Reduced symbol editing process]
Next, the details of the reduced symbol editing process executed in step D560 in the aforementioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the reduced symbol is a decorative symbol (for example, a normal symbol that is reduced in size) that is displayed in a small size to clearly indicate that the image is changing at the corner of the screen of the display device 41 during a movie effect during reach. And there are left, middle and right symbols). This routine is a process for variably displaying the reduced symbols.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D931 whether the reduced symbol display control is in progress (ie, the reduced symbol display is being executed). If the reduced symbol display control is not in progress, the process returns. If the reduced symbol display control is in progress, step D932 is performed. To D937, after executing sequentially.

In step D932, the start address of the left symbol control area is set.
In step D933, a reduced symbol display editing process (not shown) is executed for the middle symbol based on the setting in step D932.
In step D934, the start address of the above-described middle symbol control area is set.
In step D935, a reduced symbol display editing process (not described) is executed for the middle symbol based on the setting in step D934.
In step D936, the start address of the right symbol control area is set.
In step D937, a reduced symbol display editing process (not shown) is executed for the right symbol based on the setting in step D936.

[4th symbol editing process]
Next, details of the fourth symbol editing process executed in step D561 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. The 4th symbol is a decorative symbol (in a different form from a normal symbol) that is displayed in a small size to clearly indicate that it is changing on the screen edge of the display device 41 during movie production. In this example, there is a pair of upper and lower symbols for Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 (that is, Special Fig. 1 on the 4th symbol, Special Fig. 1 on the 4th symbol, Special Fig. 2 on the 4th symbol, Special Fig. 2 on the 4th. There is a pattern below).
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D941 whether the 4th symbol display control is in progress (ie, the 4th symbol display is being executed). If the 4th symbol display control is not in progress, the process returns. If so, the process proceeds to step D942. If the 4th symbol status is set to change in the above-mentioned step D275, it is determined in the above step D941 that the 4th symbol display is being controlled.

When the process proceeds to step D942, it is determined whether or not the variable initialization flag (the flag set in step D274 of the reception command-specific initialization process 2 described above) is set. If not, the process proceeds to step D945 and is set. Then, after executing steps D943 and D944 in sequence, the process proceeds to step D945.
In step D943, the variable initialization flag is cleared.
In step D944, the fourth symbol variation parameter (fourth symbol variation timer, variation symbol number) is initialized.

When the process proceeds to step D945, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 figure 4 (on the special figure 1 figure 4 and the special figure 1 figure 4 figure below) is changing. After setting the CG number corresponding to the number, the process proceeds to step D947. If not changing, the CG number corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol number is set in step D946, and then the process proceeds to step D947.
Proceeding to step D947, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 4th symbol (on the special figure 2 4th symbol and the special figure 2 4th symbol below) is fluctuating. After setting the CG number corresponding to the number, the process proceeds to step D949. If not changing, the CG number corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol number is set in step D948, and then the process proceeds to step D949.

If it progresses to step D949, the 4th symbol fluctuation | variation timer will be updated to increase by 1, and it will progress to step D950.
In step D950, it is determined whether the value of the fourth symbol variation timer is larger than the switching determination value. If larger, the process proceeds to step D952 after executing step D951, and otherwise proceeds to step D961.
In step D951, updating is performed to increase the symbol number for change by one.
When the flow proceeds to step D952, it is determined whether or not the variation symbol number is larger than the upper limit value. When the variation symbol number is larger, the variation symbol number is set to 0 at step D953 and then the procedure proceeds to step D961. Do not proceed to step D961.

When the process proceeds to Step D961, Steps D961 to D980 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D961, coordinates (X-coordinate and Y-coordinate data) on the 4th pattern of Fig. 1 are set.
In step D962, the VDP 312 is instructed to load the image data on the 4th pattern of FIG. 1 (image data having the CG number set in step D946 or D954) into the VRAM.
In step D963, the attribute of the image data is set.
In step D964, a drawing effect used for displaying the image data is set.
In step D965, the sprite of the image data is pasted into the virtual drawing space.
The data set in steps D961, D963, and D964 is, for example, data set in advance as a specified value (hereinafter, the same applies to other fourth symbols).

At step D966, the coordinates under the 4th symbol in Fig. 1 are set.
In step D967, the VDP 312 is instructed to load the image data under the 4th symbol in FIG. 1 (image data having the CG number set in step D946 or D954) into the VRAM.
In step D968, the attribute of the image data is set.
In step D969, a drawing effect used for displaying the image data is set.
In step D970, the image data sprite is pasted into the virtual drawing space.

In step D971, the coordinates on the 4th pattern of the special figure 2 are set.
In step D972, the VDP 312 is instructed to load the image data on the special figure 2 FIG.
In step D973, the attribute of the image data is set.
In step D974, a drawing effect used for displaying the image data is set.
In step D975, the sprite of the image data is pasted into the virtual drawing space.

In step D976, the coordinates under the 4th symbol in the special figure 2 are set.
In step D977, the VDP 312 is instructed to load the image data under the 4th symbol in the special figure 2 (image data having the CG number set in step D948 or D955) into the VRAM.
In step D978, the attribute of the image data is set.
In step D979, a drawing effect used for displaying the image data is set.
In step D980, the image data sprite is pasted into the virtual drawing space.

[Big hit round editing process]
Next, the details of the big hit round editing process executed in step D562 in the aforementioned effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is a process for a big hit effect including a big hit fanfare, an interval, and an ending effect in addition to the big hit round. Further, the processing of this routine is processing for controlling the time value and the like of each scene rather than editing what is to be drawn. Even during the same round, there is a flow of effects such as displaying a message or playing an animation, and this is a process for controlling this flow. The data that needs to be set varies depending on the contents of the effect. If the effect is a big hit, there are a moving image change instruction, a sound change instruction, and the like, and this routine controls the flow.

When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D991 whether round display control is being performed (that is, whether a big hit effect including fanfare, interval, and ending is being performed). If it is under control, the process proceeds to Step D992.
In step D992, the content of the presentation (ie, the pointer indicating the position of the control data in the control table for jackpot set in the above-described initialization process 2 for each received command) (that is, by the round control pointer). It is determined whether or not the production content determined by the above-mentioned control data is a big hit production start. If the production is not started, the process proceeds to step D996.

In step D993, updating is performed to increase the value of the round control pointer by one.
In step D994, the value of the demo control timer corresponding to the round control pointer is set.
In step D995, various other data corresponding to the round control pointer are set.
In step D996, the value of the demo control timer is updated to be decreased by 1. In the next step D997, the value of the demo control timer is determined. If it is not 0, the process returns. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step D998.

In step D998, it is determined whether the value of the round control pointer specifies the last data in the jackpot control table. If the value is the last data, the round control pointer is set to the effect return position value in step D1000. After setting, the process proceeds to step D1001, and if it is not the last data, the process proceeds to step D1001 without executing step D1000.
In step D1001, the value of the demo control timer corresponding to the round control pointer is set, and in step D1002, various other settings corresponding to the round control pointer are performed.

[Variation parameter update processing]
Next, details of the variable parameter update process executed in steps D565, D567, and D569 in the effect display editing process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. This routine is a process for updating the parameter in the design fluctuation.
When this routine is started, first, in step D1011, it is determined whether the data in the symbol variation table area (for example, information on the top address of the symbol variation table) is NULL (no setting). If NULL, the process returns and NULL is returned. If not, steps D1012 to D1015 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D1016.

In step D1012, operation pattern data is loaded from the operation pattern area of the symbol control area set in the immediately preceding step (any one of steps D564, D566, and D568) in the above-described effect display editing process.
In steps D1013 to D1015, symbol update information, control frame number, and control repeat number data are loaded from the corresponding region of the symbol control region.

In step D1016, the data of the X coordinate table pointer is read from the X coordinate table area of the symbol control area. If the data is NULL, the process proceeds to step D1018. If not, the process proceeds to step D1017.
In step D1017, if the control data in the X coordinate table specified by the value of the X coordinate table pointer at that time is not the last data in the X coordinate table, the value of the X coordinate table pointer is incremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step D1018. By this update, the designated position in the X coordinate table becomes the next position, and the control data of the next position in the X coordinate table is designated.

In step D1018, the data of the Y coordinate table pointer is read from the Y coordinate table area of the symbol control area. If the data is NULL, the process proceeds to step D1020, and if not, the process proceeds to step D1019.
In step D1019, if the control data in the Y coordinate table specified by the value of the Y coordinate table pointer at that time is not the last data in the Y coordinate table, the value of the Y coordinate table pointer is incremented by 1. Then, the process proceeds to step D1020. By this update, the designated position in the Y coordinate table becomes the next position, and the control data of the next position in the Y coordinate table is designated.

In step D1020, the data of the transparent table pointer is read from the transparent table area of the symbol control area. If the data is NULL, the process proceeds to step D1022, and if it is not NULL, the process proceeds to step D1021.
In step D1021, if the control data in the transparent table specified by the value of the transparent table pointer at that time is not the last data in the transparent table, the value of the transparent table pointer is updated by 1, and then updated. Proceed to step D1022. By this update, the designated position in the transparent table becomes the next position, and the control data at the next position in the transparent table is designated.

When the process proceeds to step D1022, the number of control frames is updated by 1 and then the process proceeds to step D1023. Note that the number of control frames is the value loaded in step D1014.
In step D1023, it is determined whether the number of control frames is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step D1024, and if it is not 0, the process proceeds to step D1031.
In step D1024, updating is performed to reduce the number of control repeats by 1. Next, in step D1025, the X coordinate table pointer, Y coordinate table pointer, and transparent table pointer are initialized (that is, for example, the top position of each table is set). After executing the processing (reset to the initial value to be designated), the process proceeds to step D1026. The control repeat number is the value loaded in step D1015.

In step D1026, the symbol update information data loaded in step D1013 is read. If the symbol update information data is 1, the procedure proceeds to step D1027. If it is not 1, that is, 0 in this example. Proceed to step D1030. Here, the data of the symbol update information indicates the added value of the display symbol number for switching the symbol that fluctuates (for example, scrolls up and down) to the next symbol. In this example, the value is either 1 or 0. It is. For example, while the scrolling is in progress, the main symbol switching operation for displaying the next symbol is repeated. In this example, the value to be added is set to 1. Thereby, it switches so that each symbol may become main sequentially. And, when it is not time to switch symbols, when the same symbol is scrolled, or when the same symbol is fluctuating so as to fluctuate, the symbol update information is set to 0 and the symbol is not switched. It has become. The symbol update information may have two or more values. For example, when the value of the symbol update information becomes 2, it may be configured such that one symbol is skipped.
When it proceeds to step D1027, it updates the symbol number of the symbol to be displayed by 1, and then, in step D1028, it is determined whether the symbol number exceeds the symbol upper limit value. If it exceeds, the symbol number is updated in step D1029. After setting to 0, the process proceeds to step D1030, and when not exceeding, the process proceeds to step D1030 without executing step D1029. In addition, the display of the symbol fluctuation | variation which a symbol switches, for example, scrolls up and down is implement | achieved by the update (switch of a symbol) of this step D1027, and the update (shift of a symbol position) of said step D1017 or D1019. Steps D1028 and D1029 are processes for returning to the first symbol when the symbol change is completed.

In step D1030, data of the number of control frames is acquired and stored from the corresponding position in the symbol control table. Next, in step D1031, it is determined whether the number of control repeats is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step D1041. If not, return.
When the process proceeds to step D1041, the symbol variation table pointer is updated, and then the process proceeds to step D1042. When the symbol variation table pointer is updated, each parameter (operation pattern, symbol update information,...) Is switched to the next position (next row) in the symbol control table. In this example, as can be seen from the above description, the number of control repeats decreases in step D1024 every time the number of control frames becomes zero, and when the number of control repeats becomes zero as a result, the process proceeds to step D1041 and subsequent steps. Therefore, the symbol variation table pointer is updated by proceeding to step D1041 when the number of control frames and the number of control repeats become zero.

In step D1042, it is determined whether the operation pattern is a table replacement code (first half). If the table replacement code (first half), the process proceeds to step D1043. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D1044. The operation pattern here is the value loaded in step D1012.
In step D1043, the symbol variation table is switched to the first half variation table corresponding to the data of the operation pattern, the data at the head address of the first half variation table is set as the value of the symbol variation table pointer, and then the procedure proceeds to step D1044. .

In step D1044, it is determined whether the operation pattern is the table replacement code (second half). If the table replacement code (second half), the process proceeds to step D1045. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D1046.
In step D1045, the symbol variation table is switched to the latter half variation table corresponding to the data of the operation pattern, the data at the head address of the latter half variation table is set as the value of the symbol variation table pointer, and then the procedure proceeds to step D1046. .

  In step D1046, it is determined whether the operation pattern is a symbol replacement code. If it is a symbol replacement code, the process proceeds to step D1047. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D1050.

When the process proceeds to Step D1047, Steps D1047 to D1049 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D1050.
In step D1047, the symbol number to be replaced is calculated backward from the stopped symbol based on the symbol feed number.
In step D1048, the symbol number calculated in step D1047 is stored in the display symbol area.
In step D1049, the symbol variation table pointer is updated.

In step D1050, it is determined whether the operation pattern is a reach line display code. If the operation pattern is a reach line display code, the process proceeds to step D1051.
When the process proceeds to Step D1051, Steps D1051 to D1052 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D1053.
In step D1051, the symbol variation table pointer is updated.
In step D1052, a decorative symbol advance editing process (detailed explanation is omitted) for displaying a reach line is executed.

In step D1053, it is determined whether the operation pattern is a hold display movement code. If the operation pattern is a hold display movement code, the process proceeds to step D1054. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D1056.
When the process proceeds to Step D1054, Steps D1054 to D1055 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D1056.
In step D1054, a hold display movement table (corresponding to the above-described hold movement table) for performing hold display movement control is set. Thereby, for example, it is determined in step D891 described above that there is a holding coordinate movement, and the movement of the holding coordinate (that is, holding display movement control) is executed.
In step D1055, the symbol variation table pointer is updated.

When the process proceeds to step D1056, it is determined whether or not the operation pattern is a hold display off code. If the operation pattern is a hold display off code, the process proceeds to step D1057. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D1059.
When the process proceeds to Step D1057, Steps D1057 to D1058 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D1059.
In step D1057, the data in the hold display table is set to NULL. Thus, for example, it is determined in step D881 that the hold display control is not being performed, and the hold display is not performed.
In step D1058, the symbol variation table pointer is updated.

In step D1059, it is determined whether the operation pattern is a reach name display code. If the reach pattern is a reach name display code, the process proceeds to step D1060. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D1062.
When the process proceeds to Step D1060, Steps D1060 to D1061 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D1062.
In step D1060, the reach name display table corresponding to the reach type number is set in the front notice information area. Accordingly, the reach name display is executed by the preview editing process 2.
In step D1061, the symbol variation table pointer is updated.

Proceeding to step D1062, it is determined whether the data of the symbol variation table indicated by the symbol variation table pointer updated by steps D1041, D1049, D1051, D1055, D1058, and D1061 is NULL (no setting). If it is not NULL, the process proceeds to step D1063.
In step D1063, it is determined whether or not the motion pattern pointer is table final data (that is, whether or not the data position of the motion pattern currently specified in the motion pattern item of the symbol control table is the last). If it is, in step D1064, the value of the symbol variation table pointer is updated by 1 and then the process proceeds to step D1065. If it is not the final data, the process proceeds to step D1065 without executing step D1064. Here, according to steps D1063 and D1064, when the process proceeds to the final data, control is performed so that the operation returns to the position of the second line from the last line and the operation of the second line is repeated. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the return position may be set so as to be different for each operation. In the case of this aspect, in step D1064, for example, a process of “setting the symbol variation table pointer to the return position value” is executed.

In step D1065, data of various control parameters (operation pattern, symbol update information,...) Is acquired and stored from the corresponding position in the symbol control table (that is, the position specified by the symbol variation table pointer). In step D1066, it is determined whether there is a sound request. If it is determined in step D1066 that there is a sound request, the process returns after executing step D1067. If it is determined that there is no sound request, the process returns without executing step D1067.
In step D1067, a corresponding design sound output request is set.
According to step D1065, each time the symbol control table row changes (that is, every time the symbol variation table pointer is updated), the symbol control table row data is stored in ROM (in this example, PROM 321). To RAM (in this example, the RAM in the CPU 311) is copied to the symbol control area. Thereafter, necessary data (including pointer data) is taken out (loaded) from the symbol control area of the RAM until the next line of the symbol control table is moved, and symbol display control processing is performed based on the data. This is because the table address value, timer value, and the like currently being processed cannot be updated unless they are in the RAM.

  The routine described above gives examples of setting various effects linked to the movement of the symbol during symbol variation. For example, the operation of changing the symbol at the moment when the high-speed fluctuation ends and the symbol becomes slow (if it is a specification to send 3 symbols after slowing down is replaced with the symbol number three symbols before the stop symbol) is realized by the above steps D1046 to D1048, etc. Is done. Moreover, a stop sound can be sounded at the time of a stop by step D1066, D1067, etc. Other than this example, there may be a mode in which a character such as a person appears.

[Sound control processing]
Next, the details of the sound control process executed in step D30 in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, four channels from 0 to 3 are used, and two tracks are used for each channel to form a stereo.
When this routine is started, steps D1071 to D1080 are repeatedly executed until the channel number is incremented by 1 from the initial value 1 until the final value is 3, and then the process returns. That is, in step D1071, the channel number is set to 1 immediately after the routine starts, and the process proceeds to step D1072. In step D1080, if the channel number is less than 3, the process returns to step D1072, and if the channel number is 3, the process returns. Then, when returning to step D1071, the value of the channel number is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step D1072.

In step D1072, the song number is loaded from the song information area corresponding to the channel number. Next, in step D1073, it is determined whether or not the loaded song number is 0. After sequentially executing D1074 to D1075, the process proceeds to step D1076.
In step D1074, the music information area is cleared to zero.
In step D1075, sound output processing (described later in detail) for setting sound output to the tone generator LSI 313 is executed based on the song number loaded in step D1072.

Proceeding to step D1076, the sound effect number (ie, effect number) is loaded from the effect information area corresponding to the channel number, and then it is determined whether or not the effect number loaded at step D1077 is 0. If it is 0, the process goes to step D1080. If it is not 0, Steps D1078 to D1079 are sequentially executed, and then the procedure goes to Step D1080.
In step D1078, the effect information area is cleared to zero.
In step D1079, sound effect output processing (details will be described later) for setting sound effect output to the tone generator LSI 313 is executed based on the effect number loaded in step D1076.
In step D1080, as described above, when the channel number is less than 3, the process returns to step D1071, and when the channel number is 3, the process returns.

[Sound output processing]
Next, details of the sound output process executed in step D1075 in the sound control process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D1091 to D1095 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D1096.
In step D1091, the track number is calculated by doubling the channel number. Since two tracks are used in stereo, in the case of stereo, odd tracks are left channels and even tracks are right channels.

In step D1092, the phrase number corresponding to the sound number (corresponding to the music number loaded in step D1072 described above) is acquired.
In Step D1093, monaural / stereo information corresponding to the sound number is acquired.
In step D1094, loop information corresponding to the sound number is acquired.
In step D1095, voice fade information corresponding to the sound number is acquired.
In step D1096, it is determined whether the channel number is 0. If it is not 0, the process proceeds to step D1099.

In step D1097, it is determined whether the phrase corresponding to the phrase number acquired in step D1092 is the same as that currently output. If the phrase is the same, the setting is unnecessary and the process returns. If not, the process returns to step D1098. After the phrase number is stored as the current output phrase, the process proceeds to step D1099. When step D1098 and step D1107 described later are executed, the output is switched to the phrase corresponding to the phrase number.
When the process proceeds to step D1099, steps D1099 to D1108 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.

In step D1099, the track number calculated in step D1091 and loop data corresponding to the loop information acquired in step D1094 (data for loop reproduction for repeating sound) are set.
In step D1100, the track number and M / S data corresponding to the monaural / stereo information acquired in step D1093 (data for controlling monaural or stereo) are set.
In step D1101, a left channel volume corresponding to the track number is set.
In step D1102, the right channel volume corresponding to the track number is set.

In step D1103, the reproduction of the corresponding track is stopped. The stop here means the end of the old voice. In step D1107, which will be described later, new audio is set, and in the next step D1108, reproduction of new audio is started.
In steps D1104 to D1107, the loop data, the M / S data, the audio fade information, and the phrase number are set in the registers of the tone generator LSI 313, respectively.
In step D1108, reproduction of the corresponding track is started.

[Sound effect output processing]
Next, details of the sound effect output process executed in step D1079 in the sound control process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the channel number is doubled in step D1111 to calculate the track number, and then the process proceeds to step D1112.
In step D1112, it is determined whether the effect number is 1 (reproduction stop). If it is 1, reproduction of the corresponding track is stopped in step D1115, and then the process proceeds to step D1116. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D1113.
In step D1116, it is determined whether the channel number is 0. If it is not 0, the process returns. If it is 0, the sound effect number (ie, effect number = 1) is stored as the sound effect number of the current output phrase in step D1117. Return.

In step D1113, it is determined whether the effect number is 2 (fade in). If it is 2, the process proceeds to step D1118.
In step D1118, fade interval data is set in the register. Next, in step D1119, the sound source LSI 313 is instructed to execute fade-in of the corresponding track, and the process returns.
In step D1114, it is determined whether the effect number is 3 (fade out). If it is 3, the process proceeds to step D1120.
In step D1120, fade interval data is set in the register. Next, in step D1121, the sound source LSI 313 is instructed to execute fade-out of the corresponding track, and the process returns.

[Inter-sub receive interrupt processing]
Next, the inter-sub receive interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this routine, for example, one reception data (in this example, one byte of data) from the wireless module 360 is stored in the serial reception buffer (not shown) of the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300, and the reception flag is set. To generate an interrupt. The reception flag is a register inside the CPU 311 and is set when reception data is stored in the serial reception buffer (that is, data indicating that the flag is set is set in the register).
When this routine is started, first, in step D1131, one piece of received data is read from the serial reception buffer, and the process proceeds to step D1132.

  In step D1132, it is determined whether or not the reception number is exceeded by accepting the reception data read in step D1131. If the reception number is over, the process proceeds to step D1135. If the reception number is not over, the process proceeds to step D1133. move on. The number of receptions is exceeded when the data capacity of all received data (the number of received data corresponding to the value of the reception counter described later) exceeds the capacity of the inter-sub-communication data buffer area for writing the received data by inter-sub-communication. is there. The capacity of the inter-sub-communication data buffer area may be equal to or larger than the packet size (12 bytes in this example) of data transmitted / received in inter-sub-communication (that is, inter-sub-communication data). In the case of this example, the capacity of the inter-sub-communication data buffer area may be 12 bytes or more. For example, N × sub-sub-communication data may be stored and held simultaneously as 12 × N bytes.

  In step D1133, the data read in step D1131 is stored at the address of the inter-sub-communication data buffer area corresponding to the reception counter. Next, in step D1134, the value of the reception counter is updated by 1, and then the step D1135 is performed. Proceed to The reception counter is a counter that counts the number of valid reception data for inter-sub-communication, and is initially set to 0 immediately after the presentation control device 300 is activated. The address of the inter-sub-communication data buffer area corresponding to the reception counter is, for example, the first 1 byte in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area when the value of the reception counter is 0 (when the number of valid received data is 0). If the value of the reception counter is 1 (when the number of valid received data is 1), it is the address of the second 1-byte area in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area. When the value of the counter is M (when the number of valid received data is M), it is the address of the M + 1 first byte area in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area.

  In step D1135, an initial value is set in the received packet index, and the flow advances to step D1136. The received packet index is a pointer for designating in which address of the inter-sub-communication data buffer area the head data (STX) of the inter-sub-communication data is located. In other words, the received packet analysis process described later is executed on the assumption that the inter-sub-communication data head data (STX) exists at the address specified by the received packet index. Therefore, in this step D1135, for example, the first 1-byte address (that is, the head address) in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area is set as the initial value of this received packet index.

In step D1136, a received packet analysis process is executed for the received data specified by the received packet index, and the process proceeds to step D1137.
In the received packet analysis process, it is analyzed whether the received data is normal as inter-sub-communication data and whether normal data for one packet (12 bytes in this case) has not been received. If it is not normal, at least the reception counter subtraction value is returned to discard the data received at step D1151, and if it is normal but the data for one packet has not been received yet, it is received as the reception should be continued. Returns a continuation code. If it is normal and data for one packet has been received, the reception data is registered (copied to a predetermined area) and 0 is returned as a reception counter subtraction value (details will be described later).

In step D1137, it is determined whether the analysis result of the received packet analysis process in step D1136 is reception continuation (that is, whether a reception continuation code is returned). Proceed to D1138.
In step D1138, an operation of subtracting the reception counter subtraction value returned from the reception packet analysis processing in step D1136 from the current reception counter value is set as a new reception counter value, and then step D1139 is performed. Proceed to

When it proceeds to step D1139, it is determined whether or not the value of the reception counter has become 0. If it is 0, there is no valid received data, so the process proceeds to step D1141, and if it is not 0, the value of the received packet index is set to the next analysis position in step D1140. After updating to (position shifted in the direction away from the head by one packet), the process returns to step D1136 to repeat the process.
In step D1141, it is determined whether the received packet index is updated in step D1140 as a result of the analysis in step D1136. If updated, the process returns after executing steps D1142 and D1143. Returns without executing steps D1142 and D1143.

In step D1142, the valid data in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area is prepended. That is, when the process proceeds to step D1142, the reception data on the head side from the address indicated by the value of the reception packet index updated in step D1140 in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area has been analyzed and registered as necessary. However, since the unnecessary received data is overwritten, all the data after the address is shifted to the head side by the unnecessary data and stored again.
In step D1143, the above-described reception flag is cleared (that is, data indicating that the flag has been cleared is set in the register).

[Received packet analysis processing]
Next, details of the received packet analysis process executed in step D1136 in the above-described intersub receive interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D1151, the value of the received data (in this example, 1 byte of data) in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area corresponding to the value of the received packet index is loaded, and in step D1152 move on.

  When the process proceeds to step D1152, it is determined whether the value of the received data loaded at step D1151 is a specified value (for example, 02H) of the packet start code (STX). If the value is a specified value, the process proceeds to step D1153. For example, in order to discard one piece of received data, the process returns after returning 1 as a reception counter subtraction value in step D1162.

  In step D1153, it is determined whether the value of the reception counter is less than 2 (that is, 1 or less). If it is less than 2, there is only one valid reception data (only data with a packet start code (STX)). Therefore, the process returns after returning the reception continuation code in step D1163, and if it is not smaller than 2 (that is, 2 or more), the process proceeds to step D1154.

  The reception counter subtraction value returned in step D1162 is used in the above-mentioned step D1138, and the value of the reception counter is decreased by that amount, and new reception data is stored in the above-mentioned step D1133 by this reception counter subtraction value. Since the storage position is shifted to the head side, the received data is substantially overwritten by new received data and discarded by that value. However, if the determination result in step D1152 is YES, the received data is not discarded in step D1162.

  For example, when the reception data is only the first one in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area (the value of the reception counter is 1), if this value is not the specified value (for example, 02H) of the packet start code (STX), the reception counter 1 is subtracted to become 0, and the received data read in step D1131 is overwritten at the head again in step D1133, and the data at the head (data that is not the packet start code (STX)) Is discarded. However, in this case, if the determination result in step D1152 is YES, step D1163 is executed after step D1153, and reception is continued. Next, the reception data read in step D1131 is stored next to the head in step D1133. Therefore, the top data (data that is the packet start code (STX)) is not discarded. Note that the operation of discarding received data by subtracting the reception counter in this manner is the same in steps D1164, D1166, D1167, D1180, and D1182 described later.

  In step D1154, the data length value (that is, the value of the number of inter-sub transmission data (SIZE)) is loaded from the data length area in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step D1155. The address of the data length area in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area is obtained as a relative position with respect to the address (packet start code (STX) storage position) indicated by the received packet index. That is, in one packet of inter-sub-communication data, the relative positional relationship (transmission order) of each data is constant as shown in FIG. 158 described later, and therefore the number of inter-sub-transmission data (SIZE) is determined from this relative positional relationship. ) Is naturally stored (the same applies to other data areas). In this case, the data length area is one byte behind (in the direction away from the head) the address (packet start code (STX) storage position) indicated by the received packet index.

In step D1155, it is determined whether or not the value loaded in step D1154 is a specified value (in this example, 12 bytes). It returns after returning 1 as a subtraction value.
When the processing proceeds to step D1156, it is determined whether the capacity of all received data obtained from the value of the reception counter is smaller than the specified value of the data length for one packet of inter-sub-transmission data (in this example, 12 bytes). In this case, the reception data is insufficient (the reception data for 12 bytes has not yet been stored), so the process returns after returning the reception continuation code in step D1165. If it is not small, the reception data for one packet or more is returned. Since there exists, it progresses to step D1157.

In step D1157, the packet end code (ETX) value is loaded from the ETX area in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area, and then the process proceeds to step D1158.
In step D1158, it is determined whether the value loaded in step D1157 is a specified value (for example, 03H). If the value is a specified value, the process proceeds to step D1159. Return after returning.
In step D1159, a checksum from the beginning of the packet of received data to the data length -2 (that is, a checksum of data from STX to STS) is calculated. Load the checksum (SUM) data from the area, and then go to Step D1161.

In step D1161, the data loaded in step D1160 and the data calculated in step D1159 are compared with each other in order to check the checksum, and it is determined whether they match. If they match, it is determined that the received data is normal. If the data does not match, the entire packet for the specified data length of the received data is abnormal, so that the data length specified value (12 in this example) is returned as the reception counter subtraction value in step D1167, and the process returns. In step D1167, all received data for one packet is discarded.
Proceeding to step D1171, the data of the transmission destination ID (DID) is loaded from the transmission destination ID area of the inter-sub-communication data buffer area, and the upper bits of the loaded data are extracted as the group ID, and the lower bits are the terminal Extract as ID, then go to step D1172.

In step D1172, it is determined whether the value of the group ID extracted in step D1171 is a specified value of the group ID. If it is a specified value, the process proceeds to step D1173, and if not, the process proceeds to step D1182. Here, in step D1172, it is checked whether or not the received data is from a gaming machine in the same group as itself. In the case of received data from a gaming machine that is not in the same group as itself (for example, a machine of another manufacturer or a different model of the same manufacturer), in this embodiment, the process proceeds to step D1182, and all received data is discarded. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when an in-house gaming machine (or a gaming machine of a different type) is installed, such a gaming machine is determined by a manufacturer code, a model code, etc. In the case of received data from a gaming machine, do not discard it, but add an additional effect corresponding to the received data (inter-sub-linked effect, for example, it affects the normal effect such as the effect that the reach type increases in the distribution by the sub board) May also be performed). In this way, you can purchase multiple types of your own gaming machines and install them in the game hall (or purchase your own gaming machine that has undergone a model change and the old in-house gaming machine before the model change. Benefits).
Proceeding to step D 1173, it is determined whether the terminal ID value extracted at step D 1171 matches the own terminal ID. If they match, it is normal and steps D 1175 to D 1181 are performed in order to produce an effect corresponding to the received data. Is executed, and if there is a discrepancy, the process proceeds to step D1174.

  When the process proceeds to step D1174, it is determined whether the value of the terminal ID extracted in step D1171 is a broadcast code (data to be transmitted by all terminals in the same group (that is, all pachinko machines)). Therefore, after executing Steps D1175 to D1181 to perform an effect corresponding to the received data, the process returns, and if it is not a broadcast code, the process proceeds to Step D1182.

In step D1175, the data of the transmission source ID (SID) is copied from the transmission source ID area of the inter-sub-communication data buffer area to the inter-sub-command transmission source ID area.
In step D1176, the inter-sub command MODE (SB_MODE) data is copied from the sb_mode area of the inter-sub-communication data buffer area to the SB_MODE area.
In step D1177, the inter-sub command ACT (SB_ACT) data is copied from the sb_act area of the inter-sub-communication data buffer area to the SB_ACT area.
In step D1178, the game state STS data is copied from the game state area in the inter-sub-communication data buffer area to the inter-sub-command game state area.

In Step D1179, an inter-sub-reception request flag (flag used in Step D471 described above) is set.
In step D1180, a calculation is performed to subtract the specified value of the data length (12 in this example) from the current reception counter value, and the calculation result is set as a new reception counter value. As a result, the received data (normal data) that has been processed by the processing up to step D1179 is discarded for one packet.
In step D1181, 0 is returned as the reception counter subtraction value.
When the process proceeds to step D1182, the data length specified value (12 in this example) is returned as the reception counter subtraction value, and then the process returns. Since the process proceeds to step D1182 when the received data is abnormal invalid data, the data length specified value is returned as the received counter subtraction value in order to discard all the received data (1 packet, 12 bytes). ing.

[Inter-submission interrupt handling]
Next, the intersub transmission interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this routine, for example, the serial transmission buffer (not shown) of the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 is emptied (that is, all the transmission data in the serial transmission buffer is transmitted and erased by the serial communication function of the CPU 311), and the transmission flag When is set, an interrupt is generated and started. The transmission flag is a register inside the CPU 311 and is set when the serial transmission buffer becomes empty (that is, data indicating that the flag has been set is set in the register).

  When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D1191 whether the number of data transmissions to be transmitted (the number of transmission data in 1-byte units) is 0, and if it is 0, the inter-subtransmission interrupt is disabled in step D1196 and the process returns. If it is not 0, steps D1192 to D1195 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns. Note that the inter-sub-transmission interrupt that starts this routine is permitted in the above-described step D465 when inter-sub-transmission is required.

  In step D1192, the inter-sub transmission buffer area data corresponding to the inter-sub transmission pointer is written into the serial transmission buffer. Here, the data written in the serial transmission buffer is transmitted to the effect control device of another pachinko machine via the wireless module 360 by the serial communication function of the CPU 311. The inter-sub transmission pointer is a pointer in which the address of the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 is set as an initial value in step D514 described above. The inter-sub transmission buffer area is a buffer area including the inter-sub transmission buffers 0 to 11 described in the above-described steps D501 to D510.

In step D1193, in order to transmit the data at the next address in the inter-sub transmission buffer area, updating is performed to increase the inter-sub transmission pointer value by one.
In step D1194, since one piece of 1-byte data has been transmitted, updating is performed to reduce the number of data transmissions determined in step D1191 by one.
In step D1195, the transmission flag is cleared.

[Packet configuration example for inter-sub communication]
Next, a packet configuration example of inter-sub-communication will be described with reference to FIG.
The packet configuration of inter-sub-communication in this example is a data configuration as shown in the upper table of the figure. A description of each data is given at the bottom of the figure. That is, 1-byte data is No. 1 to No. The total capacity (capacity of one packet) is 12 bytes.

No. 1 is data (for example, 02H) of a packet start code (STX) indicating the packet head.
No. 2 is the packet size, that is, the data of the number of inter-sub-transmission data (SIZE) (in this case, data indicating 12 bytes).
No. Reference numeral 3 denotes data of a transmission source ID (SID) (terminal ID and group ID).
No. Reference numeral 4 denotes transmission destination ID (DID) data (terminal ID and group ID). Note that, in the data of the transmission source ID (SID) and the transmission destination ID (DID), the upper bit of one byte is the group ID, and the lower bit is the terminal ID (and broadcast). Here, the range of the terminal ID is, for example, a range of 00 to 0E in hexadecimal, and when the lower bit data is 0F, the terminal ID is handled as the data of the broadcast code.

No. Reference numeral 5 denotes inter-sub-maker code (MAKER) data.
No. 6 is the data of the year code (YEAR) (for example, the last two digits of the year).
No. Reference numeral 7 denotes inter-sub-model code (TYPE) data.
No. 8 is the data of the inter-subcommand MODE (SB_MODE).
No. 9 is data of the inter-sub command ACT (SB_ACT).
No. Reference numeral 10 denotes STS data representing the game state of the player.
No. Reference numeral 11 denotes a checksum of data from STX to STS.
No. 12 is data (for example, 03H) of a packet end code (ETX) indicating the end of the packet.
The inter-sub-communication packet configuration example described above is merely an example, and there may be various modes. For example, the data may not have a 1-byte configuration (for example, the model code has a plurality of bytes), and the sending order is not limited to the above configuration example. In addition, there may be data having other meanings, and conversely, the number of data may be smaller than in the above configuration example. Further, for example, a “maker code” may be brought second in the transmission order. In this mode, commands from other manufacturers' gaming machines can be discarded efficiently, or conversely, in order to collaborate with other manufacturers, branching to the corresponding reception process (other manufacturer's command reception process) allows efficient processing. Can be. Here, the other manufacturer command reception process is a process for receiving a command corresponding to the command form of another manufacturer when the command form is different for each manufacturer.

[Details and effects of characteristic functions of production control device]
By each program as described above, a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and each effect means (display device 41, board decoration device 42, frame decoration device) is controlled by the effect control device 300 based on this command. 43, the board effect device 44, the frame effect device 45, the speakers 12a, 12b, etc.).

Here, in this embodiment, not only the presentation by the display device 41 or the like by one pachinko machine 1 but also the communication between sub-games among a plurality of gaming machines installed on the island is performed to each machine. Since the control of synchronizing the effects of the display device 41 is performed, it will be described in detail.
As described above, inter-sub-communication is communication (in this example, wireless communication) that is performed using the wireless module 360 between sub-boards (in this example, the effect control device 300) of pachinko machines with different game rooms. Communication).
The following programs are related to intersub communication.
The followings are mainly for inter-sub-communication.
-Intersubmission transmission start processing (FIG. 118)
-Inter-subtask reception task processing (Fig. 119)
・ Inter-submission transmission data editing processing (Fig. 120)
-Inter-sub ack response task processing (Fig. 121)
-Inter-submission effect setting processing (FIG. 122)
・ Inter-sub linked advance notice editing process (Fig. 144)
・ Inter-submission reception interrupt processing (Fig. 154)
-Inter-subtransmission interrupt processing (Figure 157)
Received packet analysis processing (Fig. 155)
Received packet analysis processing (Fig. 156)
Some of the routines related to inter-sub-communication are as follows.
・ Initialization processing 1 for each received command (FIG. 103)

Next, specific examples of effects using inter-sub-communication will be described.
There are various types of effects using inter-sub-communication, but first, the simultaneous transmission without specifying the other party will be described.
The simultaneous transmission process is as follows.
When the production control device 300 receives a “customer waiting demo command” or a “power-on command” from the game control device 100 (main board) (that is, own game machine, self-game machine, or self-machine, own machine, The “customer wait timing adjustment command” is transmitted wirelessly by inter-sub-communication using the wireless module 360 to the effect control device 300 of other nearby gaming machines (also referred to as other devices). This is performed by simultaneous transmission (broadcast transmission) without specifying the other party.
Since the production control device 300 (sub board) is equipped with the wireless module 360, data can be exchanged with other production control devices of other gaming machines in the surroundings, but data communication for production is only required. Therefore, the game result cannot be affected (for example, it is not possible to easily make a big hit).

In addition, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) that performs simultaneous transmission is its own gaming machine as described above, which is also referred to as a self-gaming machine, its own machine, its own machine, or simply self, and other games in the vicinity. The machine is called another machine, another game machine, or another game machine.
“Other game machines in the vicinity” are a plurality of game machines different from the self. In this embodiment, it refers to other gaming machines that are installed in the same island as the own machine, and basically have the same gaming machine manufacturer and the same model. This is because if the same model is used, commands and effects transmitted and received between the own machine and other gaming machines are unified, and control is easy.
Furthermore, in the market, if the gaming machine is the same model, the program of the effect control device 300 is the same, and all the processes related to the inter-sub-communication are included in the program of one model.

However, even with a game machine with the same name, the performance is different (for example, a game machine with the same name, “CRXXX FA” and “CRXXX GL” , which has a slight difference in performance) If there is, the program of the production control device 300 may not be the same program. In this case, the programs accompanying the specific performances and the like due to the difference in performance are basically different, and the parts related to inter-sub communication are basically the same, but it cannot be said that there is no possibility of change. Accordingly, gaming machines having different parts related to inter-sub-communication are not used for effects using inter-sub-communication according to the present embodiment.
In addition, on the island, game machines are often installed on both sides of the island with the back side facing the inside of the island, and in that case, the game machines in which the production screens of each unit are facing the same direction toward the aisle side Since it is desirable that they are the same production screen, usually the same type of gaming machines that are arranged in parallel on the island passage side perform the production using inter-sub-communication and synchronize the production screen (or Synchronize only when necessary).

Now, returning to the main subject, when the production control device 300 receives the “customer waiting demo command” or the “power-on command” from the game control device 100 of its own gaming machine, “Customer wait timing adjustment command” is transmitted by inter-sub-communication, but such “customer wait timing adjustment command” is set and transmitted by its own gaming machine, The processing location of the program of the production control device 300 when “is received” is as follows.
First, when the production control device 300 receives the “customer waiting demonstration command” from the game control device 100 of its own gaming machine, it communicates “customer waiting timing adjustment command” to the production control devices of other neighboring gaming machines. The process when transmitting by will be described.
<Implementation location when receiving "customer waiting demo command" on own machine>
Location where command is set: Step D203a to Step D203f in FIG. 103, FIG.
-Command transmission location: FIGS. 118 and 157
Ack response: Step D480a to Step D491 in FIG. 119, Step D203d in FIGS. 120 and 103

That is, when the production control device 300 receives the “customer waiting demo command” from the game control device 100 by itself, first, in steps D203a to D203f of the received command initialization processing 1 shown in FIG. Prepare inter-sub command (broadcast transmission setting) of (Inter-sub synchronization in customer waiting demonstration display), edit the prepared inter-sub command (inter-sub transmission data editing processing: FIG. 120), and set initial value to ack waiting timer Is set, the inter-submission production start wait timer is set, and the inter-sub transmission request flag is set.
In this way, the setting of the inter-sub command for the customer waiting demo synchronization is performed.
The inter-sub-command for the customer waiting demo synchronization corresponds to a “customer waiting timing adjustment command”. Therefore, here, the explanation will be made as “customer waiting demo synchronization inter-subcommand” = “customer waiting timing adjustment command”.

  Next, in the process of simultaneously transmitting the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” from its own gaming machine, the inter-sub transmission start process shown in FIG. 118 and the inter-sub transmission interrupt process shown in FIG. 157 are executed. As a result, the “customer wait timing adjustment command” is simultaneously transmitted from the own gaming machine to the presentation control device 300 of other neighboring gaming machines by inter-sub-communication.

Here, whether or not the sub board (production control device) of another gaming machine that has received the inter-sub command returns ack to the sub board of the own machine that has transmitted the inter-sub command varies depending on the type of command. In the present embodiment, the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” includes the content for requesting the return of ack. That is, in this embodiment, the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is a command that requires an ack response.
That is, as a program related to the ack response, steps D480a to D491 of the inter-subtask reception task processing shown in FIG. 119, inter-sub-station transmission data editing processing shown in FIG. According to these programs, the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is a command that requires an ack response.
In the present embodiment, the “customer wait timing adjustment command” is a command that requires an ack response, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured not to require an ack response, for example.
Also, even if an ack response is returned, in this embodiment, nothing is done in principle, but the “customer wait timing adjustment command” is again issued to other gaming machines that do not return an ack response. You may make it the structure which sends.

Next, the processing of the program of the effect control device when another gaming machine receives the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is performed as follows. Although an effect control device for other gaming machines is not shown in the drawing, there is a case where the own game machine may operate as another game machine. Will be explained.
<Reception / synchronization of customer waiting timing adjustment commands of other gaming machines>
-Command receiving location: FIGS. 154 to 156
-Location for command analysis and various settings according to the command: FIG.
-Location where customer waiting synchronization is set: Step D535 to Step D543 in FIG.
-Subsequent processing: Customer waiting display editing processing of FIG.

That is, when another gaming machine receives the “customer waiting timing adjustment command”, first, the inter-sub receive interrupt process shown in FIG. 154 and the received packet analysis process shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 are performed. As a result, the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is received.
Next, the inter-sub-task reception task process shown in FIG. 119 is performed. Thereby, the setting according to the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is performed.
The customer waiting timing adjustment command is analyzed as a command for performing an effect of matching the timing of the customer waiting demonstration display with a plurality of pachinko machines performing inter-sub-communication, and in this case, customer waiting A is executed from the beginning.

Next, steps D535 to D543 of the inter-sub-effects setting process shown in FIG. 122 are executed. Thereafter, it is left to the customer waiting display editing process shown in FIG.
Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demonstration is being performed (that is, whether or not a customer waiting demonstration is being performed). I do. The demo status of the pachinko machine (that is, another gaming machine) that has received the inter-sub command (information indicating the type of the customer waiting demonstration effect, etc.) is the symbol display (customer waiting A described above). If the symbol is displayed (customer waiting A), the demo control timer is initialized to the symbol display start value. When the demo control timer is initialized to the symbol display start value, the customer waiting demonstration effect on the currently executing symbol display (customer waiting A) is terminated halfway, and the customer waiting demonstration effect on the symbol display (customer waiting A) is started from the beginning. Be started.
On the other hand, if it is not the symbol display (customer waiting A) (that is, if the movie display (customer waiting B) is being executed), the demo control timer is set to the value of the movie immediate end. When the demonstration control timer is set to the value of the movie immediate end, the movie display (customer wait B) as the customer wait demonstration display is immediately ended, and the customer wait demonstration effect of the symbol display (customer wait A) is started.

  Thus, the customer waiting demonstration effect is synchronized from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A) between the transmission source gaming machine that has transmitted the customer waiting timing adjustment command and the other gaming machine that has received this customer waiting timing adjustment command. Will be started. In addition, the customer waiting demonstration effect thus started is controlled by the customer waiting display editing process shown in FIG. 124. When the specified time elapses, the symbol display (customer waiting A) is switched to the movie display (customer waiting B). As time passes, the movie display (customer waiting B) is switched to the symbol display (customer waiting A), and so on, as long as the customer waiting demonstration effect is continued, two types of customer waiting demonstration effects are executed alternately. .

In the above description, when the production control device 300 receives the “waiting customer demonstration command” from the game control device 100 of its own gaming machine, the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is sent to the other production machine production control devices in the vicinity. Since the processing in the case of transmission by communication has been described, when the presentation control device 300 receives the “power-on command” from the game control device 100 of its own gaming machine, the presentation control device of other neighboring gaming machines Next, the processing when the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is transmitted by inter-sub-communication will be described.
The processing when the production control device 300 receives the “power-on command” from the game control device 100 is basically the same as the processing when the “customer waiting demo command” is received from the game control device 100, However, the “power-on command” is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 when the game control device 100 is activated by the RAM clear.
Here, the RAM clear means that the RAM clear switch 504 for initializing the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 101 is turned on when the power is turned on, based on the configuration of the first embodiment. The game state data up to is cleared, and the gaming machine is reset to the initial state.
Specifically, if the RAM clear switch 504 is turned on when the power is turned on and immediately after the program of the game control device 100 is activated, the RAM area such as the user work RAM in the game microcomputer 101 and Information stored in a similar RAM area in the payout control device 200 is initialized.

It should be noted that the time when the gaming machine is turned on is different from the time when the power failure is restored, and is distinguished as follows.
-When power is turned on: Refers to the time when the game control device 100 starts up with RAM clear
-At power failure recovery: Refers to the time when the game control device 100 recovers from the previous power-off state and starts up.
Here, when the power failure is restored or when the business starts in the morning, the island power supply is turned on at the same time, so the recovery operation from the power failure is performed, and the stand-by demonstration for each customer starts simultaneously and synchronizes automatically. It will be.
Therefore, it can be said that it is unnecessary to synchronize the customer waiting demonstration effect by the “customer waiting timing adjustment command”.
On the other hand, if a customer wait timing adjustment command is sent from each unit without sub-conversation even if it starts a customer-waiting demonstration production, all units will start transmission by sub-sub communication at the same time. As a result, communication congestion occurs.
For this reason, in this embodiment, when the power failure is restored, the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is not transmitted to another vehicle so as to avoid the congestion of inter-sub-communication. In particular, unlike when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), all the units are activated at the same time when the power failure is restored. .
In addition, when a commercial power supply suddenly fails due to a lightning strike during the operation of a game store, it is necessary to maintain the game situation of each unit, restore the game state before the power failure, and resume the business. For this reason, when the power failure is restored, the game state before the power failure is restored without clearing the RAM, so that the state of each vehicle is individually different. Therefore, it is not necessary to synchronize the performance of each unit when recovering from a power failure after a commercial power supply suddenly fails due to a lightning strike. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered in such a case, the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is not transmitted from the own gaming machine to other neighboring gaming machines.
In addition, when the RAM is cleared, it is necessary to manually press the RAM clear switch 504, so that one unit is activated. In the case of turning on the power with the RAM clear that the start timings are different, processing for synchronizing the effects of each unit is performed. A detailed specific example using the drawings will be described later with respect to the synchronization of the effects of the respective units when the power is turned on.

Next, the procedure for matching (synchronizing) the customer waiting demonstration effect with the own gaming machine and other neighboring gaming machines will be described in detail.
First, in the customer waiting demonstration effect, two types of screens, a symbol display period and a movie period, are alternately displayed at each specified time.
In practice, there is a division such as whether or not the background music (BGM) is sounded and whether or not the effect button 9 is valid and invalid. Since there are two types of appearances, the following description will be given on the assumption that two types of screens of a symbol display period and a movie period are alternately displayed at each specified time.

As described above, when the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is transmitted from the own gaming machine to other neighboring gaming machines by inter-sub-communication, the sender of the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” (own gaming machine) It is only necessary to start the customer waiting demonstration effect on the display device 41.
On the other hand, the other gaming machines in the vicinity to which the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is sent will perform processing for synchronizing each customer waiting demonstration effect with the customer waiting demonstration effect of the sender (own game machine). .
In this case, when another gaming machine receives the “customer waiting timing adjustment command”, if the player (in this case, another gaming machine) is executing a customer waiting demonstration effect, the same effect is sent to the owner (own game machine). ) (Synchronize) with (thing).
Note that if the special figure is in an effect that cannot be handled, such as during variable display, no response (processing) is performed to synchronize the effect with the customer waiting demonstration effect of the sender (own game machine). In step D540 of the inter-submission effect setting process shown in FIG. 122, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed (that is, whether or not the customer waiting demonstration effect is being performed). If not, the customer waiting timing adjustment should not be performed, so the process proceeds to step D537 (in step D537, the inter-substage production request flag is cleared and returned). If the customer waiting demonstration production is being performed, the customer waiting timing adjustment is performed. This is because the process proceeds to step D541 to carry out.

On the other hand, as described above, when another gaming machine receives the “customer waiting timing adjustment command”, if the player (in this case, another gaming machine) is executing a customer waiting demonstration effect, The following process is performed in order to synchronize with the sender (own game machine).
As described above, the customer waiting demonstration production received the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” because the two types of screens, the symbol display period and the movie period, are displayed alternately at each specified time. Depending on the timing, it is divided into either case. These will be described as (A) and (B).
(A) When the symbol is being displayed When the “customer wait timing adjustment command” is received during symbol display, the timer during the symbol display period is reset to the initial value and displayed again from the beginning. The production is temporarily stopped and the design display production is started again from the beginning). Therefore, for the player, the appearance of the screen of the display device 41 seems to extend the symbol display period.
That is, in this case, the demonstration control timer is initialized to the symbol display start value in step D543 of the inter-subtitle effect setting process shown in FIG. Thus, the symbol display effect is started again from the beginning.

(B) During movie When the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is received during the movie period, the timer during the movie period is set to the end value, and the process immediately shifts to the symbol display period.
That is, in this case, the demonstration control timer is set to the immediate movie end value in step D542 of the inter-sub effect setting process shown in FIG. 122, and then the process proceeds to step D537 (in step D537, the inter-sub effect request flag is cleared. Therefore, the timer during the movie period is set to the end value, and the symbol display period is immediately started.
When the demonstration control timer is set to the value of the movie immediate end, the movie display (customer waiting B) as the customer waiting demonstration display is immediately ended, and the customer waiting demonstration effect of the symbol display (customer waiting A) is started.
Therefore, for the player, the screen of the display device 41 looks as if the movie is forcibly terminated.
Note that the processing of enabling / disabling the effect button 9 and sounding / not sounding the effect button 9 and BGM (background music) will be appropriately handled.

  In this way, the customer waiting demonstration production is designed so that two types of screens, the symbol display period and the movie period, are displayed alternately at each specified time. In any game machine, regardless of the effect (symbol display or movie) during the reception timing, the display is restarted from the effect of the symbol display (that is, the demo display effect of the customer waiting for the symbol display (customer waiting A)). It will be. Therefore, the other game machines in the vicinity that have received the simultaneous transmission of the “customer wait timing adjustment command” in the inter-sub-communications restart from the customer wait demonstration production on the symbol display (customer wait A), so that The production will be synchronized to the production.

<Background explanation>
Next, a description will be given of a production problem that is the background of the present embodiment.
Demo production has the following general issues.
At game stores, game machines that are not played by the player are generally provided with a demonstration display (for example, a demonstration of waiting for a customer). However, the demonstration display is based on the time when the previous player finished the game. Because the timing of starting the production is different and each stand is independent, even if the display content is the same, it was a demonstration display effect that was shifted apart.
Also, if you clear the RAM of only one gaming machine on the amusement island at the start of the game store, the timing of the demonstration display effect for that one is different from other gaming machines, and the uniformity of the island waiting for the player The problem is that it cannot be removed, and it looks unpleasant and annoying.
In particular, in so-called pachislot machines (rotating slot machine machines), the gaming machine where the settings have been changed is known at a glance (the timing of the demonstration display effect is different from other pachislot machines, etc.) There is also a possibility that it will have an effect on you.
The setting for pachislot machines is a function that can change the probability of bonuses / pockets of pachislot machines (within a pre-programmed range) and raise or lower the final payout rate (machine discount). This is a function having the same meaning as nail adjustment in a gaming machine, for example. When the setting is changed, the state of the table (pachislot machine) is reset (RAM is cleared).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-described problem is solved by performing inter-sub-communication between a plurality of gaming machines installed on the island and synchronizing the effects of the display devices 41 of each unit. I am doing so.

Next, a specific operation of the customer waiting demonstration effect including the RAM clear stand will be described.
<Conventional example>
First, the conventional production operation will be described.
FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining a conventional effect operation, and this operation is typical as a case of a normal business in an amusement store (that is, from the previous business day to the current business day). In that case, the power supply of each unit was turned off at the same time at the end of the previous day and turned off, and then the power supply to each unit was started before the next day (that is, the current day). In this case, the RAM is cleared for the gaming machine.
The stand that performs RAM clearing is, for example, a case in which a gaming machine that has been in a gaming state such as a big hit or a probability variation state when the gaming store is closed is initialized the next day to prepare for normal business. This is because if such a stand is not initialized by clearing the RAM, it will be recovered in the gaming state such as the big hit of the previous day or the probability variation state, and will not match the business form.
It should be noted that the commercial power supply suddenly failed and the power supplies of all units were all at once, and then the power supply was restored. However, even in the case where it is necessary to clear RAM for one gaming machine, FIG. The operation is as shown below.

Here, as an explanation of the operation, the power supply of all the units went out of power all at once, and then the power supply was restored, but it is easier to understand the case where RAM clear was performed for one gaming machine, so in that case The operation will be described. Of course, the normal operation at the game store started supplying power to each unit before the start of business on the day, but the operation in the case where RAM clear is performed for one gaming machine is the same.
When gaming machines A to F were installed on the island, there was a power failure and the power to all units was cut off (timing (A)). Thereafter, when the power supply is restored, for example, a customer waiting command is transmitted from the game control device to the effect control device all at once in response to the power failure recovery command (timing (B)).
Upon receiving the customer waiting command, all the production control devices start displaying “waiting for customer A” as a customer waiting demonstration effect on the screen of the display device. Thereby, the effect of “waiting for customer A” is performed on all the display devices.
Here, it is assumed that a demonstration effect is prepared for symbol display (customer waiting A) and movie display (customer waiting B). The customer waiting A is 120 s (s is seconds), and the customer waiting B is 150 s long. Then, first, the customer waiting demonstration effect starts from the symbol display (customer waiting A).

Next, assuming that the RAM clear of the game control device is performed only for the gaming machine C, the following occurs. That is, when the RAM is cleared, as described above, the “power-on command” is transmitted from the game control device to the effect control device. Therefore, at the timing (C) when the RAM is cleared, the gaming machine C transmits a “power-on command” from the game control device to the effect control device, and the effect control device that receives the “power-on command” receives the RAM initial value. The operation of the conversion notification (30 s) and the display of the customer waiting A are started from the beginning. Next, when the RAM initialization notification (30 s) is completed on the display device, the “waiting for customer A” display (remaining 90 s) is executed on the screen of the display device.
In this case, in the gaming machine C, the “RAM initialization notification” + “customer wait A” effect is executed from the beginning from the time (timing (C)) when the effect control device receives the “power-on command”. For this reason, there is a difference in the performance content with other gaming machines.

For example, when compared with the timing (D) when the other gaming machine ABDEF has finished the production of “waiting for customer A” (120s), the gaming machine C is still in the middle of the production of “waiting for customer A” and the production is misaligned. ing. This is because the RAM clearing machine (gaming machine C) executes the effect of “RAM initialization notification” + “waiting for customer A” from the beginning from the “power-on command” reception timing (C) from the beginning. This is because there is a deviation in the production, and the customer waiting demonstration screen is shifted in particular by the time from the reception of the “customer waiting command” to the reception of the “power-on command”. As a result, the effect content of the display device is different from that of the other machine only in the gaming machine C, so that the player can easily grasp that it is a RAM clearing machine.
In particular, in the pachislot machine, if the setting is changed, the state of the stand is reset (RAM clear). Therefore, the setting change was made when the demonstration of the customer waiting demonstration screen was misaligned compared to many other gaming machines. This will have a negative impact on the business of the amusement store.

A specific effect screen of the above-described conventional display device is shown in FIGS. 161 and 162.
161 and 162, reference numerals (A) to (D) represent the above-described timings.
First, in FIG. 161, if there is a power failure at timing (A), the power of all units is cut off, and the operation of all units is stopped. Since the gaming machine C is scheduled to be cleared of RAM, it is described as a RAM clearing stand.
Next, at the timing (B), due to the recovery from the power failure, all the vehicles simultaneously receive the customer waiting command from the game control device at the effect control device. As a result, the display of “waiting for customer A” starts as a demonstration of waiting for a customer on the screen of each display device.

  Next, proceeding to FIG. 162, the RAM of the game control device is cleared for the gaming machine C at the timing (C). At this time, only the gaming machine C is turned on again, and the “power-on command” is controlled by the game control device. The effect control device transmitted to the device and receiving the “power-on command” starts RAM initialization notification (30 s) and starts “waiting for customer A” (120 s) from the beginning. In the RAM initialization notification, for example, a sound “RAM has been initialized!” And a sound effect “Vienna!” Are also output from the speaker.

Next, in the gaming machine C, even if the effect of the RAM initialization notification (30 s) is finished on the display device, the effect of “waiting for customer A” (remaining 90 s) is continuously executed.
At the timing (D) when a predetermined period has elapsed since the presentation of the RAM initialization notification (30 s), the other gaming machine ABDEF finishes the presentation of “waiting for customers A” (120 s) and displays the movie (waiting for customers). Even though B) has started, the gaming machine C is still in the process of producing “Waiting for customer A”, and the production is misaligned.
Therefore, since the content of the effect of the display device is different from that of the other machine only in the gaming machine C, the player can easily grasp that it is the RAM clear table.
Further, since the demonstration display effect of only one of the gaming machines C is different from other gaming machines, there is a problem that the island waiting for the players cannot be unified, and the appearance is unpleasant and troublesome.

<Principle of this embodiment>
Next, the principle of this embodiment will be described.
FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining the principle of this embodiment (synchronous effect).
In this case, as in the conventional example shown in FIG. 160, the power supplies of all the units are blacked out at once, and then the power supply is restored, but the RAM is cleared for one gaming machine.
Again, as in the case described above, the explanation of the operation is that the case where the power supply of each unit was cut off all at once, and then the power supply was restored, but the RAM was cleared for one gaming machine was understood. Since it is easy, the operation | movement in that case is demonstrated. Of course, the normal operation at the game store started supplying power to each unit before the start of business on the day, but the operation in the case where RAM clear is performed for one gaming machine is the same.
When gaming machines A to F were installed on the island, there was a power outage and the power to all units was cut off. After that, when the power supply is restored, a waiting command for customers is transmitted from the game control device to the effect control device all at once (timing (E)).
Upon receiving the customer waiting command, all the production control devices start displaying “waiting for customer A” as a customer waiting demonstration effect on the screen of the display device. As a result, an effect of “waiting for customer A” (120 s) is performed on all display devices.

  Next, it is assumed that the RAM of the game control device is cleared only for the gaming machine C. Then, a “power-on command” is transmitted from the game control device to the effect control device by clearing the RAM. Therefore, at the timing (F) when the RAM is cleared, in the gaming machine C, the “power-on command” is transmitted from the game control device to the effect control device, and the effect control device that receives this “power-on command” receives the RAM. Initialization notification (30 s) and “waiting for customer A” (120 s) are started from the beginning. In the period (30 s) during which both the RAM initialization notification and the customer waiting A are executed, the voice output as the production of the customer waiting A is stopped (customer waiting A) in order to emphasize the RAM initialization notification. May be configured to perform only display effects.

In addition, in the gaming machine C that has cleared the RAM, when the “power-on command” is received from the game control device by the effect control device, the effect control device of the game machine C changes to the effect control device of the other neighboring game machines ABDEF. A “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is transmitted all at once by inter-sub-communication (timing (F)).
On the other hand, in the other gaming machines ABDEF that have received the “customer waiting timing adjustment command”, a control for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect synchronously from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A) is performed (timing (F)).
Then, at the timing (G), the effect of the RAM initialization notification (30 s) in the gaming machine C is finished, and thereafter the effect of “waiting for customer A” is performed for the remaining 90 s. For this reason, the timing (H) at which the production of “waiting for customer A” is finished is the same for all units. Therefore, all the productions are synchronized at the timing (G). When the effect of “waiting for customer A” ends (timing (H)), then the effect of movie display (waiting for customer B) (150 s) is started at the same time.
In this way, in the gaming machine C in which the RAM is cleared, based on the fact that the effect control device receives the “power-on command” from the game control device, the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is sent to the other gaming machines between the sub- By transmitting by communication, it is possible to synchronize the demonstration of waiting for a customer.
Therefore, only the gaming machine C does not cause the display contents of the display device to be different from that of the display device, and it is possible to prevent the player from grasping that the RAM clear table. In addition, the demonstration display effect of only one of the gaming machines C is not different from other gaming machines, it is possible to achieve the uniformity of the island waiting for the player, improve the appearance of the effect, and control the effect. The problem of annoying is also eliminated.

Next, specific operations of the display device according to the first embodiment based on the above principle are shown in FIGS. 164 and 165.
In FIGS. 164 and 165, reference numerals (E) to (H) represent the timing shown in FIG. 163.
In FIG. 164, when the gaming machines A to F are installed on the island, there is a power failure, and after all the power is turned off, the power is restored. Is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (timing (E)).
When all the production control devices 300 receive the customer waiting command, the display of “waiting for customer A” is started on the screen of the display device 41 as the customer waiting demonstration production. Thereby, the effect of “waiting for customer A” (120 s) is performed on all display devices 41. The effect of “waiting for customer A” is a symbol display, and the symbols “2, 4, 1” are displayed on the screens of all the display devices 41, and the same effect content is provided.
Since the gaming machine C is scheduled to be cleared of RAM, it is described as a RAM clearing stand. At the timing (E), the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is not transmitted.

Next, when the RAM of the game control device 100 is cleared for the gaming machine C at the timing (F), only the gaming machine C is turned on again at this time, and a “power-on command” is sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. In response to the “power-on command”, the effect control device 300 starts RAM initialization notification (30 s) and “waiting for customer A” (120 s) from the beginning. However, as described above, the gaming machine C in which the RAM is cleared may be configured to perform only display effects for the customer waiting A during at least the period when the customer waiting A is executed simultaneously with the RAM initialization notification. .
In addition, in the gaming machine C that has cleared the RAM, when the “power-on command” is received from the gaming control device 100 by the rendering control device 300, the rendering control device 300 of the gaming machine C creates the rendering of other peripheral gaming machines ABDEF. A “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is simultaneously transmitted to the control device 300 by inter-sub-communication (timing (F)).
On the other hand, in the other gaming machines ABDEF that have received the “customer waiting timing adjustment command”, a control for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect synchronously from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A) is performed (timing (F)).
Therefore, at timing (F), the gaming machine C that has cleared the RAM starts the RAM initialization notification (30 s) and “waiting for customer A” from the beginning, and the other gaming machines ABDEF display the waiting for a demonstration effect. It will resume from the beginning of (Waiting for customer A).

Next, moving to FIG. 165, when the timing (G) is reached, the RAM initialization notification (30 s) in the gaming machine C ends, and thereafter, the effect of “waiting for customer A” continues for the remaining 90 s. In addition, the effect of “waiting for customer A” is continuing in other gaming machines ABDEF. Therefore, at this time (timing (G)), all of the “waiting for customer A” effects including voice are synchronized in all units. It should be noted that at least the display effects on the display device 41 are synchronized with all the devices from the timing (F).
Next, at the timing (H), the synchronized production of “Waiting for customer A” is finished on all the units, and at the same time, the production of the next movie display (waiting for customer B) (150s) is started simultaneously on all the units. The Thereafter, the effect of movie display (waiting for customer B) continues for 150 s. However, if the player starts the game on any of the units during that time, the effects of all the units are not synchronized, but if the game is not started, the effects of all the units synchronized are continued.

In this way, in the gaming machine C in which the RAM is cleared, based on the fact that the effect control device 300 has received the “power-on command” from the game control device 100, the “customer wait timing adjustment command” is sent to other gaming machines. Can be synchronized with the demonstration of waiting for customers.
In other words, “waiting for customer A” is newly started simultaneously on all the units, and after the production of “waiting for customer A” is finished, all the units are simultaneously transferred to the movie display (waiting for customer B) (150s). Can do.
Therefore, only the gaming machine C does not shift the contents of the presentation on the other device and the display device 41, and it is possible to prevent the player from grasping that the device is a RAM clear table. Also, only one of the gaming machines C does not have a demonstration performance different from other gaming machines, and it is possible to achieve the uniformity of the island waiting for the player, and the appearance of the presentation is improved and the troublesomeness is eliminated. be able to.

Next, a specific operation of the customer waiting demonstration effect other than at the time of activation will be described with reference to FIG.
This is not when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, but in the state where the game is being performed, in one gaming machine, the production control device 300 has received a “customer waiting demo command” from the gaming control device 100. This is an example in the case where the “waiting for customer timing adjustment command” is transmitted to the effect control devices of other nearby gaming machines by inter-sub-communication to synchronize the customer waiting demonstration effect.
When a “waiting customer demo command” is received while a game is being played here, when a player is playing a game on a gaming machine, even if it happens to fire a ball, This is a case where the screen of the display device 41 becomes a customer waiting demonstration effect without winning a prize in the mouths 25 and 26.
The same operation is performed when the player finishes the game on the gaming machine and stands up at the gaming machine.

In FIG. 166, when the gaming machines A to F are installed on the island, the gaming machines A, B, and F are waiting for customers, the gaming machine C is operating (gaming), the symbol is changing, and the gaming machine D is changing the symbol. It is assumed that the game machine E is in operation (game) and is a big hit.
Assuming that the timing at that time is (I), at this timing (I), the gaming machine A waiting for the customer is in a state in which the symbol after the symbol change ends is displayed as it is. This corresponds to the demonstration of waiting for customers in A). The gaming machines B and F are in a state where a customer waiting demonstration is displayed on the display device 41, which corresponds to a customer waiting demonstration effect in a movie display (customer waiting B).
The gaming machine C is changing the symbol, and the symbol is scrolling, and the gaming machine D is immediately after the end of the symbol variation (no hold). The gaming machine E is a big hit, and the big hit effect is performed.
At this timing (I), in the gaming machine D immediately after the end of symbol change (no hold), when the effect control device 300 receives a “customer waiting demo command” from the game control device 100, A “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is simultaneously transmitted to the effect control device of the gaming machine by inter-sub-communication.

At this time, the production control device of each unit operates as follows according to the situation of each unit. This operation timing is defined as (J).
・ Amusement machines A, B, F waiting for customers
In the other gaming machines A, B, and F that have received the “customer waiting timing adjustment command”, control is performed to start the customer waiting demonstration effect synchronously from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A).
In this case, the gaming machine A is in the middle of the customer waiting demonstration effect of the symbol display (customer waiting A), but this is stopped and the waiting demonstration effect is resumed from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A). That is, when the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is received during customer waiting A, the timer during the symbol display (customer waiting A) period is reset to the initial value, and the effect of symbol display (customer waiting A) is started from the beginning. Start.
On the other hand, the gaming machines B and F are in the middle of the customer waiting demonstration effect in the movie display (customer waiting B), but this is stopped and the waiting demonstration effect is resumed from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A). That is, when the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is received during the customer waiting B, the timer during the movie display (customer waiting B) period is set to the end value, and the display immediately shifts to the symbol display (customer waiting A) period. And start it.
Therefore, at the timing (J), the other game machines A, B, and F all start the customer waiting demonstration effects from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A).

・ Game machine C changing design
The other gaming machines C that have received the “customer wait timing adjustment command” are changing in design, and even if they receive the “customer wait timing adjustment command”, no particular action is taken.
Therefore, at the timing (J), the other gaming machine C continues the game whose symbol is changing as it is.
・ Game machine D at the end of symbol change (no hold)
As described above, when the effect control device 300 receives the “customer waiting demo command” from the game control device 100 of its own gaming machine D in the state of the symbol variation end (no hold), other nearby gaming machines The “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is transmitted to the effect control device of the above by inter-sub-communication, but since the gaming machine D itself is the transmission source of the “customer waiting timing adjustment command”, the customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed as a symbol (customer waiting). Control which starts synchronously from the beginning of A) is performed. Therefore, at the timing (J), in the gaming machine D, the symbol display (customer wait A) is started from the beginning as a customer wait demonstration effect.
・ Machine E with a big hit
The other gaming machines E that have received the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” during the big hit performance are in a big hit game, and even if the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is received, no particular action is taken.
Therefore, at the timing (J), the other game machines E continue to produce the big hit game.

  As described above, in all the production control devices except the transmission source, when the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is received, the customer waiting demonstration production is performed on the gaming machines A, B, and F that are not particularly in operation depending on the situation of each machine. Since the symbol display (customer waiting A) is started from the beginning, and the game machine D as a transmission source is also started from the beginning as a customer waiting demonstration effect, Can be synchronized. On the other hand, the operating machines C and E that are in operation continue to operate as they are, and the content of the production remains unchanged. Therefore, even if the customer waiting demonstration effects are synchronized for the non-operating gaming machines A, B, D, and F, there is no effect on the operating gaming machines C and E.

According to the present embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) When the production control device 300 receives a “customer waiting demo command” from the game control device 100 of one gaming machine, the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is Since it is configured to synchronize the customer-waiting demonstration effect by sending it between the communication, depending on the situation of each machine, the symbol display (customer-waiting A) is started from the beginning as a customer-waiting demonstration effect for gaming machines that are not in operation. You can synchronize the waiting demonstration. In addition, the operating machines that are in operation continue to operate as they are, and there is no effect on the operation.
Therefore, unlike the conventional case where each gaming machine is independent and there is no cooperation, in this embodiment, it is possible to produce an effect such that the gaming machines cooperate with each other, and the range of the production can be expanded.
That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of obtaining a new gaming effect technique and performing an effect such that the gaming machines cooperate with each other.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device that produces an effect by the effect means based on a command transmitted from the game control device,
The production control device
Communication means for communicating with other gaming machines;
Synchronization control means for synchronizing effects by the effect means with other gaming machines via communication means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

(2) By simply sending a “customer waiting timing adjustment command” from one gaming machine to other nearby gaming machines by inter-sub-communication, the customer waiting demonstration performance can be synchronized. Is very easy and convenient.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
A gaming machine characterized in that an effect of waiting for a customer by the effecting means is synchronized with another gaming machine by a synchronization control means.

(3) When synchronizing the customer waiting demonstration effects of each unit, when the effect control device 300 receives the “customer waiting demonstration command” from the game control device 100 of one gaming machine, the effects of other neighboring gaming machines By simply sending a “customer wait timing adjustment command” to the control device via inter-sub-communication, it is possible to synchronize the customer wait demonstration demonstration of each unit, so it is easy to control the gaming machine side that intends to synchronize the customer wait demonstration demonstration. That's it.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
A game characterized in that, when receiving information related to an effect waiting for a customer from the game control device, information for synchronizing the effect waiting for a visit by the effect means is transmitted to the other gaming machines via the communication means. Machine.

(4) In other gaming machines that have received the “customer wait timing adjustment command”, simply reset the timer during the symbol display period of the customer wait effect (or the timer during the movie period) to the initial value and display it again from the beginning. Since the customer waiting demonstration effects of each vehicle can be synchronized, the control on the gaming machine side that has received the command for synchronizing the customer waiting demonstration effects can be simplified.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
When receiving information to synchronize the effect of waiting for the customer by the effect means from another gaming machine via the communication means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the synchronization control means synchronizes an effect waiting for a customer by the effect means with another gaming machine.

(5) When power is restored after a power failure occurs and all the devices are turned off, the “waiting for customer A” as a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41 is triggered by the power failure recovery command. The display is started, but when the RAM clear is performed by one gaming machine, other effects are determined based on the fact that the effect control apparatus 300 receives the “power-on command” from the gaming control apparatus 100 of the gaming machine. The “waiting for customer timing adjustment command” is sent to the gaming machine via inter-sub-communication, and the “waiting for customer timing adjustment command” is received from other gaming machines, and the waiting for customer demonstration effect is synchronized from the beginning of the symbol display (waiting for customer A). Since the start control is performed, even if the RAM is cleared by one gaming machine, it is possible to synchronize the demonstration of waiting for all the customers.
Therefore, there is no difference between the display contents of the display device and the display device other than the gaming machine in which the RAM is cleared, and it is possible to prevent the player from grasping that the RAM clear table. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying the table on which the RAM has been initialized, and it is possible to eliminate adverse effects on the business of the game store. In particular, the effect can be effectively exhibited for a pachislot machine whose settings have been changed.
In addition, the demonstration display of only one of the gaming machines for which the RAM has been cleared is not different from other gaming machines, and it is possible to achieve the uniformity of the island waiting for the player, and the appearance of the presentation is improved. The problem that the production control is troublesome can be solved.

Furthermore, to clear the RAM, it is necessary to turn on the RAM clear switch 504 for initializing the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 101. However, since this operation is performed manually, It is difficult to clear the RAM at the same time (at the same timing). In addition, for example, it is not possible to perform RAM clear at the same time using simultaneous transmission by inter-sub-communication. Therefore, the RAM clear is performed for each unit, but in this embodiment, even if the RAM clear is performed by one gaming machine, the demonstration of the waiting for all the customers is synchronized by inter-sub-communication. Can do.
In addition, since it is only necessary to synchronize the demonstration of waiting for all the customers in inter-sub-communication for one RAM clear, each unit can also reduce transmission / reception processing and reduce communication efficiency due to congestion. Can be planned.
It should be noted that when the production control device 300 receives a “customer waiting demo command” from the game control device 100 of one gaming machine as described in (1) above, Since it is unlikely that all of the units will be synchronized at the same time, the “customer wait timing adjustment command” will be sent to other gaming machines via sub-sub-communication to synchronize the customer wait demonstration effect). The table can reduce transmission / reception processing and reduce communication efficiency due to congestion.
In addition, since the inter-sub-communication is performed only when necessary, as in the case of synchronizing all the customer waiting demonstration effects with respect to one RAM clear, a decrease in communication efficiency can be suppressed.
The reason is as follows.
Inter-sub-communication is performed by the production control device of each unit, but the production control device requires only “one-to-one” communication with the main board (game control device). However, when performing inter-sub communication, from the viewpoint of the effect control device, the relationship is “one-to-many”. That is, since inter-sub-communication is performed between the effect control device of its own gaming machine and the effect control devices of many other gaming machines, the relationship is “one-to-many”. Therefore, if frequent transmission is frequently performed in the inter-sub-communication, the communication efficiency is lowered, and the burden on the CPU of the presentation control device is increased. Furthermore, this problem increases as the number of installed gaming machines increases.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the inter-sub-communication is performed only when necessary, such as synchronizing the demonstration of the waiting for all the customers with respect to one RAM clear, it is possible to suppress a decrease in communication efficiency. And the burden on the CPU of the production control device can be reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
When a command related to the effect of waiting for a customer at power-on is received from the game control device, information for synchronizing the effect of waiting for the customer by the effecting means is simultaneously transmitted to the other gaming machines via the communication means. A featured gaming machine.

(6) When a power failure occurs and the power supply of all the units is turned off, when the power supply is restored, for example, a waiting command for each customer is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, and the production control of all the units is performed. Upon receiving the customer waiting command, the device 300 starts “customer waiting A” simultaneously as a customer waiting demonstration effect. However, when the power failure is restored, the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is transmitted to other gaming machines through inter-sub communication. Do not send.
In other words, at the time of activation, only when the RAM is cleared, the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is transmitted to other gaming machines through inter-sub-communication, and the other gaming machines that have received the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” Since the waiting demonstration effect is controlled to start synchronously from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A), the synchronization of the demonstration of waiting for all the customers is synchronized with the fact that the RAM is cleared by one gaming machine. Can take.
Therefore, since the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” is transmitted to the other gaming machines only when the RAM is cleared, not the power failure recovery, the control is simple.
In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for communication congestion to occur by not sending the “customer waiting timing adjustment command” to other gaming machines when the power failure is restored. Furthermore, the burden on the CPU of the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 is reduced, and there is an effect that efficient control can be performed.
In particular, since there are a large number of gaming machines installed in large stores, it is difficult if communication congestion occurs, but in this embodiment, such adverse effects can be suppressed.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
A gaming machine characterized by not transmitting information that synchronizes an effect of waiting for a customer by the effecting means to another game machine via the communication means when the power is restored.

Next, details of the display of the initial screen, which is a characteristic part of the present invention, and operational effects will be described.
Let's start with the background.
The effect control device 300 (sub-board) executes the effect control including the display effect of the display device 41 based on the command from the game control device 100 (main substrate) as described above. Further, since the start-up of the sub-board is generally slow at the time of startup, the main board is configured to wait for a specified time, for example, so as not to send a command immediately. The display effect of the display device 41 is realized by image processing by the VDP 312 using the data of the CGROM 322. For this reason, when the power failure is restored or the power is turned on, a command is transmitted from the main board to the sub board, and the CPU 311 of the sub board instructs the VDP 312 to perform drawing using the data of the CGROM 322, and displays a customer waiting demonstration effect and the like. It takes a considerable amount of time to actually start.
As a result, for example, when there is a time when nothing is displayed on the display device 41 when recovering from a power failure, the player is awakened, or the player or the store clerk of the game store erroneously determines that an abnormality has occurred. There is a problem. There is also a problem that even if an abnormality occurs in the peripheral circuit of the CPU or the like, it is impossible to immediately determine whether the display is delayed due to such an abnormality or whether the display is delayed due to the slow start-up. .

Therefore, in this embodiment, the screen information for the initial screen is stored in the PROM 321 (program storage unit), and when the production control device 300 is activated by supplying power to the production control device 300, the CPU 311 (arithmetic processing unit) The initial screen is immediately displayed on the display device 41 (display means) using the screen information without waiting for a command from the control device 100.
That is, in the above-described main process (FIG. 94), the initial screen is set by setting the screen information in step D16a (startup screen display process; details are shown in FIG. 159) before the loop process (steps D17 to D32). Is drawn to the VDP 312. As already described in the explanation of the flowchart of FIG. 159, the display control of the initial screen does not use the CGROM data, and only the function of the VDP 312 (in this example, the function of sprite drawing or triangle drawing). Use to display the initial screen. For this reason, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when power is supplied to the production control device 300, the initial screen (a start-up screen or an NG screen described later) is first displayed on the display device 41 first, and then an abnormality is detected. When a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 in the absence of a game, the display on the display device 41 is switched to a display corresponding to the command.

Specifically, when there is no problem such as abnormality of the peripheral circuit at the time of startup and the determination result of step D1301 in FIG. 159 is negative (that is, when step D1303 is executed), for example, FIG. ) Is displayed. The start-up screen 1 shown in FIG. 168 (a) is a screen in which a white character “power on” is displayed in the center of a black background. With such an activation screen, the store clerk or player of the game store can immediately know that the gaming machine is normally activated when the power is turned on or when the power is restored.
Here, the white character “powering on” is displayed by triangle drawing displayed by triangle drawing and sprite drawing, as shown by the character “power” shown on the right side of FIG. 168 (a). And a plurality of rectangular images to be combined. The black background image is a rectangular image (rectangular sprite) displayed by sprite drawing.

On the other hand, when there is a malfunction such as an abnormality in the peripheral circuit at the time of startup and the determination result of step D1301 in FIG. 159 becomes affirmative (that is, when step D1302 is executed), for example, FIG. An NG screen (also referred to as an error screen) as shown is displayed. In the error screen shown in FIG. 168 (b), a large character “NG03” is displayed in the center, and the color of the background (indicated by the slanted line) of this character is a complementary color (opposite color) to the character color. It is what. For example, if the character color “NG03” is green, the background is red, and if the character color is blue, the background is yellow. There are other combinations of complementary colors, and you can use any of them, but if you use complementary colors for text and background, it looks better and displays Becomes easier to see.
Of the character display of “NG03”, “03” is a number representing the type of error (abnormality), and for example, a store clerk at a game store can know the content of the abnormality. In step D1302 of FIG. 159 described above, the one corresponding to the error type determined to occur in the immediately preceding step D1301 is selected from the plurality of NG screen control parameter tables set in advance for each error type. Thus, this number corresponds to the type of error.

  Note that the startup screen displayed when there is no abnormality in the peripheral circuit is not limited to the startup screen 1, and a startup screen 2 made up of a so-called color bar, for example, as shown in FIG. 168 (c) is displayed. May be. Since the color cannot be shown, in FIG. 168 (c), the color of each part of the color bar is shown by characters in correspondence with the corresponding part and the lead line except for the monotone (white, black, or gray) part. ing. In addition, the hatched portion at the top of the image of the startup screen 2 in FIG. 168 (c) is actually displayed in a state of being filled with red, green, and blue (the three primary colors) from the left. Even with such an activation screen 2, it is possible to notify that the gaming machine has been activated normally.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when power is supplied to the production control device 300, an initial screen (a start-up screen or an NG screen) is displayed. Even if there is no command from the game control device 100, this initial screen is displayed when the production control device 300 including the CPU 311 is activated, and thereafter, when a command is received from the game control device 100 without any abnormality, Displays the screen corresponding to the command. In addition, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 checks whether there is a defect in the peripheral circuits (parts) in the effect control device. If it is normal, the start screen is displayed as an initial screen. Display the screen. A control program and screen information for displaying initial screens (startup screen and NG screen) are stored in a control ROM (PROM 321) which is a program storage means. The image data of the initial screen is not stored in the CGROM (image ROM 322) which is an image storage unit. After receiving the command from the game control apparatus 100, display is performed using the image data of CGROM. As described above, for example, the start-up screen displays a black screen with white letters in the center as “power-on”, and the NG screen displays a red screen with green letters in the center as “NG □□”. □□ of “NG □□” is a number such as “07” and indicates the type of error. Examples of errors include, for example, that the CGROM is not properly connected, or that the CGROM data is damaged.

  According to the initial screen display function of the present embodiment described above, the following effects can be obtained. That is, at least until the command is transmitted from the main board to the sub board and the CPU 311 of the sub board instructs the VDP 312 to perform drawing using the data of the CGROM 322, the screen (the above initial screen) ) Can be displayed, so even if it is in the stage of preparation for startup, it does not appear to rise slowly, so the above-mentioned problem is solved. That is, for example, when an initial screen is displayed immediately after recovery from a power failure, the time during which nothing is displayed on the display device 41 is remarkably shortened. Problems such as misjudgment of occurrence are resolved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Also, even if the CGROM is not mounted on the board, the CGROM data is damaged, or even if the CGROM terminal is not in normal contact, a certain screen can be displayed, and the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 start up normally. It can be confirmed. After that, if the screen is not displayed normally, it can be seen that a defect has occurred in connection with CGROM.
Furthermore, as described below, it becomes possible to identify and infer the contents of defects. That is, for example, it can be specified which side is the cause of the liquid crystal (display device 41) or the substrate (production control device 300). Further, it can be specified which side of the CGROM 322 or the VDP 312 has the cause. Specifically, although the initial screen is displayed, if the initial screen is an error screen, or if the initial screen does not switch to the normal customer waiting demo screen, etc., the display device 41 has a problem. It is possible to identify and infer the cause of the failure, such that the production control device 300 has a failure but the VDP 312 has no problem but the CGROM 322 may have a failure. become able to.

Next, a second embodiment having another feature regarding inter-sub-communication will be described with reference to FIG.
The second embodiment is an example in which a fraud notification synchronization command is transmitted to another gaming machine.
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining an operation when performing fraud notification.
In FIG. 167, when the gaming machines A to F are installed on the island, the gaming machines A, B, and F are waiting for customers, the gaming machines C and D are operating (games), and the symbols are changing. Suppose that it was a big hit during operation (game).
In this case, the gaming machine A waiting for the customer is in a state where the symbol after the end of symbol variation is displayed as it is, which corresponds to the demonstration of waiting for the customer on the symbol display (waiting for customer A). The gaming machines B and F are in a state where a customer waiting demonstration is displayed on the display device 41, which corresponds to a customer waiting demonstration effect in a movie display (customer waiting B).
The gaming machine C is changing symbols and the symbols are scrolling, the gaming machine D is changing symbols and the symbols are scrolling, and the gaming machine E is a big hit, and a big hit effect is performed.

Then, at the timing (K), when a fraud occurs in the gaming machine D that is changing the symbol (for example, fraud by a magnet), an “illicit notification command” is sent from the gaming control device 100 of the gaming machine D to the effect control device 300. Send to. Receiving the “illegal notification command”, the effect control device 300 of the gaming machine D simultaneously transmits the “illegal notification synchronization command” to the other effect control devices of the gaming machines by inter-sub-communication.
Note that the gaming machine D displays a message “illegal table” on the screen of the display device 41 under the control of the production control device 300 based on the “injustice notification command” to notify that there was an injustice (timing ( Stage K)).

In other game machines, when receiving the “illegal notification synchronization command”, it operates as follows depending on the situation of each machine. This operation timing is defined as (L).
・ Amusement machines A, B, F waiting for customers
The other gaming machines A, B, and F that have received the “illegal notification synchronization command” perform fraud notification during the customer waiting demonstration performance. For example, the fraud notification is performed by outputting a sound effect “Peep!” From the speakers 12a and 12b.
In this case, since the gaming machine A is in the middle of the customer waiting demonstration effect of the symbol display (customer waiting A), the fraud notification is performed in parallel with the demonstration effect of the symbol display (customer waiting A).
On the other hand, since the gaming machines B and F are in the middle of the customer waiting demonstration production of the movie display (customer waiting B), illegal notification is performed in parallel with the demonstration presentation of the movie display (customer waiting B).

・ Game machine C changing design
In the other gaming machines C that have received the “illegal notification synchronization command”, the illegal notification is performed during the time while the symbols are changing. For example, the fraud notification is performed by outputting a sound effect “Peep!” From the speakers 12a and 12b.
Therefore, even if the symbol is changing, a player who is playing with another gaming machine D can know that the fraud has occurred on any platform on the island.
・ Gaming machine D with fraud
At the timing (L) stage, in the game machine D where the fraud has occurred, a message “Magnet fraud is occurring” is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 as a fraud notification, and a sound effect “Peep! Output from the speakers 12a and 12b. At this time, the sound effect “Peep!” Is notified at a high volume. In addition, fraudulent notification by intense blinking of LEDs (for example, decoration LED 301) is also performed. Such a fraud notification may be a display, a sound effect, or an LED alone, but if all the combinations are combined, a warning effect against fraud is further enhanced.
Therefore, in the gaming machine D in which the fraud has occurred, the fraud is notified by a combination of the message, the sound effect, and the LED, so that it is possible to warn to stop the fraud quickly.

・ Machine E with a big hit
In the other gaming machines E that have received the “illegal notification synchronization command” during the performance of the big hit, the illegal announcement is made during the performance of the big hit game while continuing. For example, the fraud notification is performed by outputting a sound effect “Peep!” From the speakers 12a and 12b.
Therefore, even during a big hit, a player who is playing with another gaming machine E can know that a fraud has occurred on any platform on the island.

  As described above, in all other gaming machines, when receiving the “illegal notification synchronization command”, the gaming machines A, B, D, and F that are not particularly in operation are in parallel with the demonstration for waiting for customers depending on the situation of each unit. Unauthorized notification is performed, and the gaming machines C and E that are in operation are also notified in parallel during the operation game. Therefore, since the fraud notification is performed in synchronization with all the other units based on the reception of the “illegal notification synchronization command”, the fraud can be dealt with illegally and effectively.

The second embodiment has the following effects.
(1) When a fraud occurs in one gaming machine, the gaming machine transmits a fraud notification command from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 that receives the “illegal notification command” By sending the “illegal notification synchronization command” to other gaming machines all at once by inter-sub-communication, it is possible to perform fraud notification in synchronization with all other devices based on the reception of the “illegal notification synchronization command”. .
Therefore, a gaming machine in which fraud has occurred can be warned to stop the fraud quickly. In addition, in other gaming machines, it is possible to quickly know that a fraud has occurred on some platform.
Among the above-described configurations, the inventive concept of the gaming machine is expressed as follows.
The production control device
A gaming machine characterized in that when a command related to fraud is received from a game control device, information for synchronizing the effect of fraud notification by the effecting means is simultaneously transmitted to other gaming machines via a communication means.
Of the above configuration, the inventive concept of other gaming machines is expressed as follows.
The production control device
When a command related to fraud is received from another gaming machine via the communication means,
A gaming machine characterized in that an effect of fraud notification by the effecting means is synchronized with another gaming machine by a synchronization control means.

(2) In other gaming machines, since all of the machines perform the fraud notification in synchronism based on the reception of the “fraud report synchronization command”, even if the fraud notification sound of each unit is relatively small, it is effective. Unauthorized notification can be performed. That is, if the fraud notification sound is notified in a timely manner (synchronized), the fraud notification can be effectively performed even if the fraud notification sound of each unit is small.
In addition, since the fraud notification is performed in synchronization with all the units, the effect of the fraud notification can be further enhanced.

In each of the above embodiments, the customer waiting demonstration effects are synchronized by using the inter-sub-communication, but the present invention is not limited to this, and effects other than the customer waiting demonstration effects may be synchronized.
In addition, in the case of fraud notification, in the second embodiment, all the vehicles are notified all at once (that is, regardless of the gaming state). However, this is not a limitation, and for example, other gaming machines are hitting big and have high expectations. If it is a time when it is not desired to be disturbed much, such as during reach fluctuations, it may be configured not to report fraud to those stands.
In addition, when other gaming machines are in a big hit or a reach change with high expectation, it may be configured to reduce the fraud notification sound compared to the gaming machines during the demonstration of waiting for customers.
In addition, in other gaming machines that have received the “illegal notification synchronization command”, it is possible to make a fraud notification sound different from the gaming state at that time to distinguish it from the sound effect of the gaming state itself. However, for example, if there are a plurality of speakers, the number of speakers that generate fraud alert sounds may be less than the number of speakers that generate sounds corresponding to the gaming state. Or you may make it the structure which generates the sound corresponding to a gaming state with a lower large speaker (for example, for low sound emphasis), and generate | occur | produces an unauthorized notification sound with an upper speaker (for high sound emphasis).

Next, the scope of application of the present invention will be described.
(1) The gaming machine is not limited to the example as in the embodiment as long as the gaming machine is provided with a display device as an effect means and can be applied to, for example, an enclosed ball game machine, a slot machine, and the like. For example, the present invention can also be applied to a so-called pachislot machine (rotating slot machine game machine) that uses a coin (or medal) to play a game.
(2) In addition, the display device is not limited to a display device using liquid crystal, for example, an organic EL, a cathode ray tube, a dot LED, a 7-segment LED, a device using a material that bends such as electronic paper, and the like. Any device can be used as long as it is capable of directing.

(3) Further, the electrical connection between the game board 20 and the game frame (front frame 4) to which the game board 20 is attached is, for example, a connection portion (drawer connector having a configuration as shown in FIGS. It is desirable to be realized by the one used). Hereinafter, a specific example of this connecting portion will be described.
FIG. 169 and FIG. 170 show a specific example of a connecting portion that realizes an electrical connection between the game control device 100 attached to the game board 20 and the payout control device 200 attached to the game frame (front frame 4). . Here, reference numeral 190 in the figure indicates a game board side substrate, and reference numeral 250 indicates a frame side substrate. FIG. 169 is a diagram mainly showing a front surface of the concave drawer connector 191 attached to the game board side substrate 190 and a front surface of the convex drawer connector 251 attached to the frame side substrate 250. FIG. 170 is a top view showing a state in which the concave drawer connector 191 and the convex drawer connector 251 are attached to the substrates 190 and 250 and face each other. Etc. (internal structures that are not actually visible and should be illustrated with half lines) are also shown with solid lines.
The game board side board 190 is a board that is attached to the game board 20, and as shown in FIG. 190a (for example, a hole through which a shaft portion of a fastener such as a screw is inserted) is formed. On the other hand, the frame-side board 250 is a board that is attached to the game frame, and as shown in FIG. 169, attachment holes 250a (for example, , A hole through which a shaft portion of a fastener such as a screw is inserted.

  As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the concave drawer connector 191 is disposed in the thickness direction of the game board side board 190 at the position inside the game board side board 190 (position inside the two mounting holes 190 a). It is provided in a state of penetrating the game board side substrate 190 (in FIG. 169, a direction orthogonal to the plane of the drawing, and in FIG. 170, a vertical direction parallel to the plane of the drawing). The concave drawer connector 191 includes a concave substrate portion 192 and a concave fitting portion 193 that protrudes forward (downward in FIG. 170) from the front surface of the concave substrate portion 192 (with a connection electrode on the inner surface). And a concave rear end portion 194 protruding rearward (upward in FIG. 170) from the rear surface of the concave substrate portion 192. The concave side drawer connector 191 has a concave side board part 192 joined to the front surface of the game board side board 190, a concave side fitting part 193 protruding from the game board side board 190 to the frame side board 250 side, The end 194 is attached in a state of penetrating the game board side substrate 190 and projecting backward. Note that an opening (not shown) through which the concave rear end portion 194 passes is formed in the game board side substrate 190, and between the inner peripheral surface of this opening and the outer peripheral surface of the concave rear end portion 194. A play (gap) is provided.

  In this case, the concave drawer connector 191 is attached to the game board side substrate 190 by two fasteners 195. That is, as shown in FIG. 170, the both ends of the concave-side substrate portion 192 (positions on the outer side in the left-right direction with respect to the concave-side fitting portion 193) are inserted in the front-rear direction through the shaft portion (not shown) of the fastener 195. A retaining hole 192a is formed, and a mounting hole 190b in the front-rear direction for inserting the distal end side of the shaft portion of the fastener 195 is formed at a position corresponding to the retaining hole 192a of the game board side substrate 190. Then, the shaft portion of the fastener 195 is inserted into the retaining hole 192a from the front surface of the concave board portion 192 and further inserted into the attachment hole 190b, whereby the concave drawer connector 191 is attached to the game board side substrate 190. ing. However, a predetermined play (gap) is provided between the shaft portion of the fastener 195 and the fastening hole 192a. For this reason, even in the mounted state, this play allows the concave drawer connector 191 to move to some extent in the surface direction of the game board side board 190 (up and down, left and right directions in FIG. 169) with respect to the game board side board 190. Yes. Moreover, guide holes 196 in the front-rear direction are formed at the left and right ends of the concave-side fitting portion 193 of the concave-side drawer connector 191, respectively. As shown in FIG. 170, a plurality of wirings 197 extend backward from the concave rear end 194 of the concave drawer connector 191. Each wiring 197 is a wiring that connects a predetermined terminal (not shown) of a circuit board (main board) constituting the game control device 100 and a predetermined terminal (not shown) in the concave drawer connector 191.

  On the other hand, at a position inside the frame side substrate 250 (a position inside the two mounting holes 250a), the convex drawer connector 251 is in a thickness direction of the frame side substrate 250 (in a direction orthogonal to the paper surface in FIG. 169). Yes, in FIG. 170, it is provided in a state of penetrating the frame side substrate 250 in the vertical direction parallel to the paper surface. The convex drawer connector 251 has a convex substrate portion 252 and a convex fitting portion 253 that protrudes forward (upward in FIG. 170) from the front surface of the convex substrate portion 252 (with a connection electrode on the surface). And a convex rear end portion 254 projecting rearward (downward in FIG. 170) from the rear surface of the convex substrate portion 252. The convex drawer connector 251 has a convex side board portion 252 joined to the front surface of the frame side board 250, a convex side fitting portion 253 protruding from the frame side board 250 toward the game board side board 190, and a convex side rear end. The part 254 penetrates the frame side substrate 250 and is attached in a state protruding rearward. Note that an opening (not shown) through which the convex rear end 254 passes is formed in the frame side substrate 250, and there is play between the inner peripheral surface of this opening and the outer peripheral surface of the convex rear end 254. (Gap) is provided.

  In this case, the convex drawer connector 251 is attached to the frame side substrate 250 by two fasteners 255. That is, as shown in FIG. 170, the both ends of the convex substrate portion 252 (positions on the outer side in the left-right direction with respect to the convex fitting portion 253) are inserted in the front-rear direction through the shaft portion (not shown) of the fastener 255. A fastening hole 252a is formed, and a mounting hole 250b in the front-rear direction for inserting the distal end side of the shaft portion of the fastener 255 is formed at a position corresponding to the fastening hole 252a of the frame side substrate 250. The shaft portion of the fastener 255 is inserted into the retaining hole 252a from the front surface of the convex substrate portion 252 and further inserted into the attachment hole 250b, whereby the convex drawer connector 251 is attached to the frame side substrate 250. Yes. However, a predetermined play (gap) is provided between the shaft portion of the fastener 255 and the retaining hole 252a. For this reason, even in the attached state, this play allows the convex drawer connector 251 to move to some extent in the surface direction of the frame side substrate 250 (up and down, left and right directions in FIG. 169) with respect to the frame side substrate 250. In addition, guide pins 256 (tips) that protrude forward from the front surface of the convex substrate portion 252 are positioned at the left and right sides of the convex fitting portion 253 in the convex drawer connector 251 (positions corresponding to the guide holes 196, respectively). Are each formed with a tapered pin. Each guide pin 256 can be inserted and fitted into each guide hole 196. As shown in FIG. 170, a plurality of wires 257 extend backward from the convex rear end 254 of the convex drawer connector 251. Each wiring 257 is a wiring that connects a predetermined terminal of the circuit board constituting the payout control device 200 and a predetermined terminal (not shown) in the convex drawer connector 251.

  The concave drawer connector 191 and the convex drawer connector 251 described above form a pair, and these constitute a so-called drawer connector. With such a drawer connector, the connection work (the convex side fitting part 253 and the concave side fitting part 193) can be performed even from one side to be connected, for example, in a slightly inclined state (or in a slightly misaligned state) with respect to the other. Can be easily performed). In this case, for example, when the game board 20 is attached to the game frame (front frame 4), the game board side board 190 and the frame side board 250 are arranged to face each other as shown in FIG. The convex fitting portion 253 fits into the concave fitting portion 193 of the concave drawer connector 191, and each electrode on the inner surface of the concave fitting portion 193 (each electrode to which the above-described wirings 197 are electrically connected). ) And the electrodes on the surface of the convex fitting portion 253 (each electrode to which the above-described wirings 257 are electrically connected) are in contact with each other, whereby the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 The electrical connection is easily and accurately realized. At this time, since the tip of the guide pin 256 has a tapered shape, the guide pin 256 easily fits into the guide hole 196 even if there is a slight inclination or misalignment. And the fitting of the convex side fitting part 253 is guided smoothly. The contact structure between each electrode on the inner surface of the concave fitting portion 193 and each electrode on the surface of the convex fitting portion 253 is a sandwiched two-point contact structure in which contact is made on both upper and lower surfaces of the convex fitting portion 253. And secure contact is ensured. Further, as described above, by providing play in the retaining holes 192a, the retaining holes 252a, etc., the concave drawer connector 191 and the convex drawer connector 251 can move to some extent in the surface direction of each substrate. Therefore, the positional deviation at the time of the connection work and the positional deviation after the connection work are absorbed, and the connection work can be easily performed, and the connection state is favorably maintained after the connection. In addition, by a reverse operation to the above connection work, a detachment work for removing the connection (work for separating the convex fitting part 253 and the concave fitting part 193 from each other) can be easily performed.

That is, with the configuration of the connecting portion described above, the concave side fitting portion 193 of the concave side drawer connector 191 and the convex side fitting portion 253 of the convex side drawer connector 251 are directly opposed to each other without inclination. Even if it is not, and it is not in a state of being opposed to each other accurately without any positional deviation, it can be connected even from a state where there is a slight inclination and positional deviation, so that the connection work is facilitated. Further, even after the connection work, even if the relative position between the boards (that is, the relative position between the game board side and the frame side) moves slightly in the above-described plane direction, this movement is absorbed by the above-mentioned play, so The contact state of the electrode in the side fitting part 193 and the convex side fitting part 253 is maintained favorably. In addition, it is possible to easily remove the connection.
Moreover, the following effects are also acquired by the structure of the connection part demonstrated above. That is, by providing the concave drawer connector 191 on the game board side substrate 190, for example, when inspection is performed only with the game board, the exposed fitting part has a concave side fitting part 193 having an electrode on the inner surface. Therefore, there is also an effect that troubles such as an electrical short due to contact of the conductive foreign matter with the electrode hardly occur.

Note that the configuration of the connection unit described above is not limited to the electrical connection between the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200, and a device other than the payout control device 200 and the game control device 100 (or game control). The present invention may be applied to electrical connection with a game board side device other than the device 100.
In addition, the electrical connection between the game board 20 and the game frame (front frame 4) has been described above. However, the same effect can be obtained by applying a configuration including the same drawer connector to other electrical connection portions. It can also be obtained. For example, an electrical connection between an electric element (such as an electrical component or a control device) provided in the machine frame 2 and an electric element provided in the front frame 4 or the glass frame 5 that is opened and closed with respect to the machine frame 2, or The electrical connection between the electrical element provided on the front frame 4 and the electrical element provided on the glass frame 5 opened / closed with respect to the front frame 4 is performed by a connection portion having the same configuration as in FIGS. 169 and 170. In this case, it is also possible to automatically connect and disconnect the concave and convex sides of the drawer connector with relative movement during opening and closing.

Next, a modified example of the present invention will be described.
The present invention may be modified as follows.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, the communication between gaming machines is wireless communication, but wired communication may be used.
(2) In the above embodiment, the initial screen is made different depending on whether or not there is an abnormality in the peripheral circuit. However, without determining whether or not there is an abnormality in the peripheral circuit in the display control of the initial screen, regardless of the presence or absence of this abnormality. It is good also as a structure which displays the same kind of initial screen. Even in this case, it is possible to solve the above-described problem caused by a state in which nothing is displayed for a long time.

(3) In addition, the initial screen is not limited to information notifying the activation state, the type of error, and the like, for example, information indicating the model of the gaming machine, an outline image of the main character for production, and the like are displayed. You may make it do. However, since it is necessary to display immediately, it is desirable that the time required for the control processing for displaying is extremely short.
(4) The above-described embodiment is an example in which the operations of the video, audio, decoration, and accessory are controlled by a single effect control board. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control is performed by a plurality of effect control boards. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of CPUs are mounted on the same substrate and sharing control is performed.

Next, other inventive concepts extracted from the embodiments and the modified examples will be described.
"Invention concept A1"
In the first embodiment, when a variation pattern command and a symbol command that are paired are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, when the effect control device 300 receives the variation pattern command sent first, the memory related to the effect is stored. If the area is set to the default value and a symbol command to be sent later is missed, the command to be paired is not established, so the effect control device 300 uses the default value of the storage area related to the effect to display a special figure (decorative special figure). ) Will be performed.
Therefore, even if a symbol command sent later is missed, special symbol variation is performed at the same timing as the usual game game by performing the special symbol variation based on the default value. No distrust.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
Based on a command transmitted from the game control device, an effect control device that produces an effect of a variable display game in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed on a display device and stopped,
With
The game control device transmits a command to the effect control device based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening to execute the variable display game, and the stop mode of the variable display game becomes the specific display mode. In a gaming machine that gives a privilege,
The production control device
A default value setting means for setting a storage area related to the production to a default value based on reception of a command sent first among a plurality of commands;
When a command sent later is received among a plurality of commands, a production is performed based on the plurality of commands to be paired,
Production control means for producing an effect based on the default value set by the default value setting means if reception of a command sent later is missed,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

"Invention concept A2"
In the first embodiment, when a symbol designation command to be sent later is received, it is determined that the command to be paired has been established, and the default value stored in the storage area related to the effect (the symbol stop state with the off symbol) Is rewritten to information corresponding to a regular command (designation command).
Then, in the effect control device 300, the effect of the symbol variation display control is performed based on the establishment of a plurality of commands (a variation pattern command sent first and a symbol designation command sent later). In this case, the symbol designation command to be sent later is rewritten from the default value to become a regular command (design symbol command), and the symbol effect is executed based on each command in the set.
Therefore, an effect based on a regular command is performed, and the game proceeds normally.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
Rewriting means for rewriting the default value stored in the storage area related to the production into information corresponding to the regular command based on the reception of the command as a set sent from the game control device,
The game machine characterized in that the effect control means performs a change display effect of a symbol based on a command sent in advance and information rewritten by the rewriting means.

"Invention concept A3"
In the first embodiment, even when a symbol command to be sent later is missed, the symbol stop state in the off symbol is set as a default value in the storage area related to the effect when the command received earlier is received. The special figure is changed based on the default value.
Therefore, since the default value is set to a value such as a symbol stop state with an off symbol, even if a symbol command is missed, a special symbol effect can be performed without contradicting the game result.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The default value setting means is
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the default value is set to information such that a symbol stopped state with an off symbol.

"Invention concept A4"
In Example 1, when a variation pattern command and a symbol command are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, first, when the effect control device 300 receives the variation pattern command sent first, the storage area related to the effect Is set as the default value in the symbol stop state with the off symbol, and then, when a symbol designation command sent later is missed, the special symbol variation is performed based on the default value (the symbol stop state in the off symbol).
Therefore, even if the symbol command is missed, the special symbol variation is performed based on the default value, so that it can be stopped at the off symbol without contradicting the game result.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The command transmitted from the game control device is composed of a first command and a second command that exert an effect in a set,
The first command is sent first, and the second command is sent later,
Each of these commands is a screen change command and a result mode command.
The default value setting means, based on the reception of the first command, sets information for performing an effect with a symbol as a default value in a storage area related to the effect.

"Invention concept A5"
In the first embodiment, when a symbol designation command to be sent later is received, it is determined that the command to be paired has been established, and the default value stored in the storage area related to the effect (the symbol stop state with the off symbol) Is rewritten to information corresponding to a regular command (designation command).
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Rewriting means is
A gaming machine characterized in that when a command sent later is received, it is determined that a command to be paired has been established, and the default value is rewritten to information corresponding to a regular command.

"Invention concept A6"
In the first embodiment, a command sent first (first command) among a plurality of commands in any case, regardless of the case of an off symbol change (stop off) or a big hit symbol change (stop at a big hit). At the time of reception, the default value is set in the storage area related to the effect.
Therefore, it is possible to avoid troubles such as displaying a big hit symbol even though it is off.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The default value setting means is
A game in which a default value is set in a storage area related to an effect based on reception of the first command regardless of the type of command corresponding to the effect of symbol variation or the specific display mode. Machine.

"Invention concept A7"
In the first embodiment, when the variation pattern command and the symbol command are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, first, when the effect control device 300 receives the previously transmitted variation pattern command, the memory regarding the effect is stored. When the area is set to a default value (for example, the symbol stopped state with the off symbol), and when a symbol designation command sent later is received, it is determined that the command to be paired has been established, and the storage area related to the production Is replaced with information corresponding to the regular command (designation command).
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The default value setting means is
Based on the reception of the first command of the first command and the second command that exerts an effect in the set, the default is stored in the storage area related to the effect that stores information for the effect whose contents are determined by the first command and the second command A gaming machine characterized by setting a value.

"Invention concept A8"
In the first embodiment, when the variation pattern command and the symbol command are sequentially transmitted from the technique control device 100 to the effect control device 300, the effect control device 300 uses the special command based on the plurality of commands that are transmitted. The production control is performed. In this case, a symbol command to be sent later is rewritten from a default value to become a regular command (symbol designation command), and symbol effect is executed based on each command in the set.
However, if a symbol command to be sent later is missed, the special value is rendered using (adopting) the default value.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control means of the production control device is
Based on the reception of a command sent later among a plurality of commands, the design of the variation display of the symbol is performed based on the plurality of commands to be paired,
A gaming machine characterized in that, if reception of a command sent later is missed, an effect of changing the display of symbols is performed based on the default value set by the default value setting means.

"Invention concept A9"
As a modification of the first embodiment, when the command sent earlier is received, the production control device 300 sets a default command as a default value in the command storage area of the RAM 311a of the main control microcomputer 311. When a subsequent regular command comes (when received), the default value may be overwritten and rewritten with the command (received command), and the presentation may be performed based on the command sent earlier and the rewritten command.
This inventive concept is expressed as follows.
The default value setting means of the production control device is
Based on the reception of the command sent first among the commands in pairs, the command storage area is set to the default value,
The rewriting means rewrites the default value stored in the command storage area to a regular command based on the reception of the command sent later,
The game machine characterized in that the effect control means produces an effect based on the command sent earlier and the command rewritten by the rewriting means.

"Invention concept B1"
In the first embodiment, a variation pattern command and a symbol command that are paired are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the effect control is performed based on the variation pattern command. In such a case, assuming that the following modification is performed, the inventive concept B1 is derived.
That is, it is determined whether or not the time from the end of the previous symbol variation to the reception of the current variation pattern command is within a specified time (for example, 1 second) when the effect control device 300 receives the variation pattern command sent first. And, if it is determined that the time from the end of the previous symbol variation to the reception of the current variation pattern command is within the specified time, even if reception of the symbol command sent later is missed, a process of starting symbol variation is performed, If it is determined that the time from the end of the previous symbol variation to the reception of the current variation pattern command exceeds the specified time, a configuration in which the symbol variation is not started may be performed.
According to the concept of the present invention, it is possible to perform a special drawing effect that gives the player as little stress as possible.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
Based on a command transmitted from the game control device, an effect control device that produces an effect of a variable display game in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed on a display device and stopped,
With
The game control device transmits a command to the effect control device based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening to execute the variable display game, and the stop mode of the variable display game becomes the specific display mode. In a gaming machine that gives a privilege,
The production control device
A determination means for determining whether the time from the end of the previous symbol change to the reception of the current command is within a specified time based on reception of a command sent first among a plurality of commands;
When it is determined by the determination means that the time from the end of the previous symbol variation to the reception of the current command is within the specified time, even if reception of a command sent later is missed, processing to start symbol variation is performed,
When it is determined that the time from the end of the previous symbol variation to the reception of the current command exceeds the specified time, an effect control means for controlling to perform a process that does not start the symbol variation;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

"Invention concept B2"
In invention concept B1, since the pattern stop result mode (out-going or big hit) is judged from the variation pattern command, and basically there is only one type of stop symbol command, the variation pattern command can be received even if the symbol command is missed. If it does, it is set as the structure which can start a symbol fluctuation | variation.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The command transmitted from the game control device is composed of a first command and a second command that exert an effect in pairs,
The first command is sent first, and the second command is sent later,
Each of these commands is a screen change command and a result mode command.
The effect control means, based on the reception of the first command, determines a stop mode of the variable display game based on the first command, and determines the symbol of the change so as to become the determined stop mode. Machine.

"Invention concept B3"
In invention concept B1, when the symbol stop result mode (out of the game or big hit) is determined from the variation pattern command and it is determined that the symbol stop result mode is out of the range, the time from the end of the previous symbol variation to the reception of the current variation pattern command is specified. If it is determined that it is within the time, even if the reception of the symbol command sent later is missed, the symbol variation is started as a continuous variation. If it is determined that the time until the fluctuation pattern command is received is within the specified time, even if the reception of the symbol command to be sent later is missed, it will be forced into a non-probable variation (normal symbol) after starting the variation. The design is determined.
With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the uncomfortable feeling of the game and to give the player as little stress as possible regardless of whether the game is out of play or big hit.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control means determines the stop mode of the variable display game based on the reception of the previous command.
When the hit display mode as the specific display mode is set, the control is performed such that the change is started and the stop mode becomes a normal hit pattern.

"Invention concept B4"
In the inventive concept B1, when it is determined that the symbol stop result mode is a big hit from the variation pattern command, it is configured to forcibly stop at a non-probable variation symbol (for example, “444”).
With this configuration, it is possible to avoid a trouble that the probability variation symbol does not change even though the probability variation symbol is stopped by the big hit start effect.
After that, when the fanfare command and the symbol command are received by the effect control device 300 as the commands related to the next effect, the actual jackpot symbol designated by the symbol command is displayed based on the reception of the symbol command. Thus, the configuration is such that a big hit effect is performed.
With this configuration, when a big hit occurs, whether it is a normal symbol or a probable variation, a big hit effect can be performed without a sense of incongruity of the game.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect control means determines the stop mode of the variable display game based on the reception of the previous command, and when the hit display mode is the specific display mode, starts the change,
A gaming machine that performs control to stop and display a symbol variation at an actual winning symbol designated by a command received after the symbol variation starts.

"Invention concept B5"
In invention concept B1, when judging the symbol stop result mode (displacement or big hit) from the variation pattern command, if it is determined that the variation pattern is for the probability variation symbol only, the effect of forcibly stopping at the non-probability variation symbol is passed. Without starting, it is set as the structure which starts the continuous fluctuation | variation of a symbol and determines a symbol in the stop mode used as a probable variation symbol.
With this configuration, it is possible to make the game progress easy to understand and without a sense of incongruity.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control means determines the stop mode of the variable display game based on the reception of the previous command, and when the hit display mode is accompanied by the probability change as the specific display mode, starts the change, and the stop mode is A game machine characterized by performing control that becomes a winning symbol with probability fluctuation

"Invention concept B6"
In the inventive concept B1, the pending number check is added to the continuous fluctuation determination.
That is, when the fluctuation pattern command is received, the number of hold is checked, and when the number of special figure hold is “0”, the current fluctuation pattern command is determined to be an invalid command (illegal determination), and the previous stop command If the special figure hold number associated with the start winning is “1” before receiving “”, the control is performed to determine that the reception of the current variation pattern command is valid.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the start of symbol variation based on an illegal variation pattern command by performing the hold number check when the variation pattern command is received.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game control device
A start winning storage means for storing a start winning number based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning opening within a predetermined range;
The production control device
When receiving information related to the start winning memory sent from the game control device, it is provided with a start winning memory determining means for determining whether or not there is a start winning memory based on the reception of a command sent in advance.
The production control means includes
A gaming machine, characterized by adding a determination result of the start winning memory determining means to determine whether or not to start changing the symbol.

"Invention concept B7"
In invention concept B1, when the condition of continuous fluctuation is satisfied and the current fluctuation is out of sync, the fluctuation starts without waiting for the next symbol command reception (after 4 ms) at the same time as the fluctuation pattern command is received. The various settings are started.
With this configuration, it is possible to omit the process of checking the consistency of the command when the off symbol changes. Therefore, there is an advantage that time can be taken for setting the effect data and the processing time of the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300 can be given a margin.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control means of the production control device is
If it is determined by the determining means that the time from the end of the previous symbol variation to the reception of the current command is within the specified time, the setting for starting the variation of the symbol is immediately performed without waiting for the reception of a command sent later. A gaming machine characterized by performing a starting process.

"Invention concept C1"
In the first embodiment, a gaming machine including a game control device 100 that controls the progress of a game, and an effect control device 300 that controls the effect means based on a command transmitted from the game control device 100 and performs an effect. In (Pachinko machine 1), each of the parent module and the child module performs type determination as to whether or not the value of the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is within a predetermined range for each type of command. It is a necessary condition to execute the process for controlling the rendering means according to the command that the type determination result at is within a predetermined range.
For this reason, commands can be first limited by the above-described type determination (range check) to reduce useless data and programs, so that a command analysis processing program (including various data necessary for processing) can be efficiently created. .
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine comprising a game control device that controls the progress of a game, and an effect control device that controls the effect means based on a command transmitted from the game control device,
The analysis processing of the command executed by the presentation control device that has received the command, a parent module that is a routine that supervises the analysis processing, and a child module that is a routine that is called and executed from the parent module, Configure
Whether the value of the command is within a predetermined range for each type of the command is executed in each of the parent module and the child module,
A gaming machine characterized in that the type determination result in each module falls within the predetermined range as a condition for executing a process for controlling the effect means according to the command.

"Invention concept C2"
In the first embodiment, the range to be checked by the parent module is narrower, and is limited to a narrow range before branching. Therefore, there is an advantage that the corresponding processing can be easily subdivided.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the parent module has a narrower predetermined range as a reference for the type determination than the child module.

"Invention concept C3"
In the first embodiment, when it is determined that the MODE is not within the predetermined range in Steps D93 and D99 of the type determination and all the determination results are NO, ExMode is not set and the process returns through Step D147. The command is not adopted (that is, invalidated), and as a result, the command is discarded.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
If the type determination result is out of the predetermined range, the command is discarded or invalidated.

"Invention concept I1"
In Example 1, when there is a command reception interrupt that occurs when a command is transmitted from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 executes a reception process (command reception interrupt process) for receiving the command. The analysis process of the command received in the reception process (reception command analysis process) is executed in a predetermined cycle separately from the reception process, and whether or not the value of the received command is within a predetermined range is normal Sex determination is performed at least in the reception process (step D54, etc.). For this reason, it is possible to reduce the burden of the analysis processing and to efficiently receive and analyze the command.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine comprising a game control device that controls the progress of a game, and an effect control device that controls the effect means based on a command transmitted from the game control device,
The production control device
When there is a command reception interrupt that occurs when the command is transmitted from the game control device, a reception process for receiving the command is executed, and an analysis process for the command received in the reception process is performed. It is configured to execute at a predetermined cycle separately from processing,
A gaming machine, wherein normality determination as to whether or not the value of the command is within a predetermined range is executed in the reception process.

“Invention Concept I2”
In the first embodiment, if the normality determination result is not within the predetermined range, the processing for controlling the rendering means according to the command is not executed, thereby preventing malfunction.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine characterized in that the normality determination result is within the predetermined range as a condition for executing a process for controlling the effect means according to the command.

"Invention concept I3"
In the first embodiment, in the effect control device 300, the command value is determined by the command reception processing (command reception interrupt processing) transmitted from the game control device 100 and the command analysis processing (reception command analysis processing). The normality determination as to whether or not it is within a predetermined range is executed (steps D54, D93, D172, etc.).
For this reason, it is possible to realize an effect such that the burden of determining the normality of the command is appropriately shared between the reception process and the analysis process, and the speed of the entire process can be increased while avoiding the missed command.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine, wherein the normality determination is executed in the reception process and the analysis process, respectively.

"Invention concept I4"
In the first embodiment, it is assumed that the predetermined range as a reference for determining the normality is wider in the reception process than in the analysis process, so that one reception process is terminated earlier and a command is missed. The effect such as avoiding is surely realized.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the reception process is wider than the analysis process for the predetermined range serving as a reference for determining the normality.

“Invention Concept I5”
In the first embodiment, the predetermined range that is a criterion for the normality determination is the entire set of values that the command can take in the reception process (step D54), and the received command corresponds to the analysis process. As a configuration that is a set of values that can be taken by the normal command of the type (step D93, etc.), the effect of, for example, ending the reception process once and ensuring that the command is not missed is realized. doing.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The predetermined range serving as a criterion for the normality determination is the entire set of values that can be taken by the command in the reception process, and the normal command of the type to which the received command corresponds is taken in the analysis process. A gaming machine that is a set of obtained values.

“Invention Concept I6”
In Example 1, in the command reception interrupt process in the production control device 300, when it is determined in step D54 (step D61) that the received MODE is not within the predetermined range and the determination result is NO, the received command is used as the command. Since the process of step D56 stored in the buffer is not executed and the process returns through step D55, the command is not adopted (that is, invalidated), and as a result, the command is discarded. If it is determined in steps D93, D99, etc. in the received command analysis process that the MODE is not within the predetermined range and the determination results are all NO, ExMode is not set and the process returns via step D147. It is not adopted (ie, invalidated), and as a result, the command is discarded.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
When the normality determination result is out of the predetermined range, the command is discarded or invalidated.

“Invention Concept L1”
In the first embodiment, as already described in the description of the control process of the effect control device 300 (description of the flowchart), steps D703 to 705, step D725, etc. in the notice information update determination process (FIG. 132) by the effect control device 300 By the processing, the following control (delay control for delaying the start of the production operation) can be executed. That is, when it is desired to reflect the notice effect from the reference time, the notice display start delay timer (delay timer) is set, and the notice effect is started when the notice display start delay timer expires. When the delay timer is not set (when it is 0), the performance is performed according to the reference time. Thereby, the effect that the start time of production can be finely adjusted is obtained. For example, the timing at which the production is performed, such as the first stage of the step-up notice, is basically determined for each model. This is to prevent the interest from deteriorating because it cannot be predicted at the timing of being scattered every time. However, even in the same SU1 production, the type of character that appears by distribution is changed and the reliability is changed to enhance the fun of the game. There are many cases, and in such a case, according to the notice display start delay timer, the start time of the effect can be finely adjusted, and the timing of the end of the effect can be adjusted.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control device for controlling the effect operation of the effect means,
The production control device
When there is the effect operation to be executed for a predetermined basic timing, a delay timer is set for the effect operation, and the effect operation is performed at a timing delayed from the basic timing by the set value of the delay timer. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be started.

“Invention Concept L2”
In the first embodiment, the basic timing can be configured to exist separately for each effect operation by setting the symbol variation table and the notice control table used in the control process of the effect control device 300. In this case, the delay time by the delay timer may be relatively short, and the period during which the control process for the effect operation is performed even though the effect operation (display of the image for the notice effect, etc.) is not actually performed. It can be made relatively short.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A gaming machine having a configuration in which the basic timing is present separately for each of the presentation operations for a plurality of the presentation operations.

“Invention Concept L3”
In the first embodiment, the basic timing is made the same for a plurality of performance operations by setting the symbol variation table and the notice control table used in the control process of the performance control device 300, and each control of each performance operation is performed from the same basic timing. It is possible to adopt a configuration for starting processing. In this case, it is no longer necessary to always manage the timing of occurrence of the notice linked to the progress of the design fluctuation, the program structure can be simplified, and the development efficiency can be improved. This is because, for example, it is possible to create a program or the like with a simple concept of starting all notices at the start of fluctuation and starting the production operation from the time-up. In addition, even when changing the specification of the timing of occurrence of the notice, it is only necessary to change the delay timer value, and the troublesome work of reviewing the contents of the symbol variation table and making it consistent with the symbol movement becomes unnecessary. It is.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
For a plurality of the production operations, there are a plurality of the production operations having the same basic timing.
The gaming machine is configured such that the presentation control device starts each control process of the plurality of presentation operations from the same basic timing.

"Invention concept L4"
The first embodiment has a configuration in which a special display decoration design variable display game is produced on the screen 41a of the display device 41. The display operation of the production image (for example, a preview image) on the screen 41a in the variable display game is performed. On the other hand, the delay control can be executed.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Having a display device as the rendering means,
The production control device is configured to produce a variation display game in which a symbol is variably displayed on the screen of the display device and stopped.
The game machine characterized in that the effect operation includes an effect of displaying an effect image on the screen in the variable display game.

"Invention concept L5"
In the first embodiment, the basic timing includes at least the start point of the variation display of the decorative pattern of the special drawing.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the basic timing includes at least a start point of the symbol variation display.

“Invention concept M1”
In the first embodiment, the effect control device 300 (display control device) uses absolute coordinate data for designating the display position of the specific image (current symbol) on the screen 41a, and the related image (next symbol) which is at least different from the specific image. Relative coordinate data (difference data) for specifying the relative position of the enlarged current symbol and the enlarged next symbol with respect to the specific image is stored in the PROM 321 (storage means). A display control function for setting a display position based on the coordinate data and calculating and setting the display position from the corresponding relative coordinate data and the absolute coordinate data (steps D836, D817, D850) in the related image display control ( Display control means). That is, in this embodiment, the display position of another character is obtained based on the display position data of a certain character (a certain character designates the display position in absolute coordinates, and the difference data from that position is used to calculate the other character's display position. Calculate the position).
For this reason, only the coordinate table of the reference specific image (in this case, the current symbol) can be used to control the movement of the next symbol, the enlarged symbol (the enlarged current symbol and the next symbol), and the like. As a result, since the same movement can be realized for all symbols by using only difference data (relative coordinate data) with a small amount of data, display control can be realized efficiently and data that needs to be stored in the PROM 321 (storage means). The amount can be significantly reduced, and the amount of work when changing specifications can be greatly reduced, so the development efficiency can be improved. Needless to say, the specific image and the related image are not limited to special symbols, and may be, for example, an image of a notice character.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine comprising an effect display device and a display control device that performs display control for displaying an effect image on the screen of the display device,
The display control device includes:
Absolute coordinate data for designating the display position of the specific image for presentation on the screen, and relative coordinate data for designating a relative position of the related image that is at least different from the specific image with respect to the specific image are stored. Storage means;
In the display control of the specific image, the display position of the specific image is set based on the absolute coordinate data corresponding to the specific image, and in the display control of the related image, the relative coordinate data corresponding to the related image. And a display control means for calculating and setting the display position of the related image from the absolute coordinate data.

"Invention concept M2"
In Example 1, the display control device (production control device 300) stores the absolute coordinate data for designating the display position as a coordinate table in which one or more absolute coordinate data are set in time series. Display control of images such as symbols is performed based on the coordinate table, and the coordinate table is provided separately for each coordinate axis. That is, in this case, the absolute coordinate data (X coordinate data) in the X axis direction (left and right direction) is stored as data in the X coordinate table, and the absolute coordinate data (Y coordinate data) in the Y axis direction (vertical direction) is The data is stored as data in the Y coordinate table, and the X coordinate table and the Y coordinate table are provided separately and used separately.
Therefore, the table can be picked up and used in combination with the required movement, and the amount of data can be further reduced. This is because, for example, an integrated coordinate table including both X-coordinate and Y-coordinate data can be used. In this case, for example, even if the X-coordinate data is exactly the same, the table differs if the Y-coordinate data is different. This means that the number of tables becomes enormous. On the other hand, if the coordinate table is different between the X coordinate and the Y coordinate as in this embodiment, if the X coordinate data is the same, the same X coordinate table may be used even if the Y coordinate data is different. it can. Further, even if the X coordinate data is different, a common Y coordinate table can be used as long as the Y coordinate data is the same. For this reason, by sharing (reusing) such coordinate tables, the number of coordinate tables can be further reduced, and the data amount can be further reduced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The absolute coordinate data is stored in the storage means as a coordinate table in which one or more absolute coordinate data are set in time series, and the coordinate table is provided separately for each coordinate axis. Gaming machine.

"Invention concept M3"
In the first embodiment, the current symbol is used as a specific image, and coordinate data such as the next symbol is relatively calculated from the coordinate data of the current symbol. In addition to or in place of this, variable display is performed. A mode in which any one of the symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) at a plurality of display positions is used as the specific image of the present invention and the coordinate data of other symbols is relatively calculated. For example, the middle symbol may be a specific image, and the coordinate data of the left symbol and the right symbol (related image) may be calculated from the coordinate data of the middle symbol.
In this mode, for example, the coordinate table of absolute coordinate data is stored only for the middle symbol, and only the relative coordinate data for the middle symbol is stored for the left symbol and the right symbol, so the data amount is further reduced. it can.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display control device is configured to produce a variation display game in which symbols are variably displayed and stopped at a plurality of display positions on the screen,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific image is a symbol of a specific display position of the plurality of display positions, and the related image is a symbol of another display position of the plurality of display positions. .

"Invention concept M4"
In the invention concept M3, for example, the aspect in which the middle symbol is used as the specific image has been described. However, since the middle symbol is a symbol that performs more variable display than the left symbol or the right symbol in a reach action or the like, When the specific image for controlling the movement in the coordinate table of the coordinate data is in the form of the middle symbol, there is an effect that the display control becomes more efficient. In other words, a so-called reach action effect may be performed in the display effect of the decorative symbol variation display game. This reach action is a fluctuating display effect in which the apparent symbol stop timings at the decorative symbol display positions (for example, left, middle, and right) are different. For example, as a general reach action, the left and right symbols may stop first (it may be an apparent stop such as slightly vibrating. The same applies hereinafter), and then only the middle symbol slowly fluctuates and then the last A display such as stopping at is displayed. In this case, the symbol that stops last is the symbol (specific image) of the specific display position, the absolute coordinate data is stored for the symbol that stops last, and the symbol whose stop order is not the last is the symbol of the other display position ( Relative coordinate data is stored for symbols that are not in the last stop order. In the display control of the symbol that stops last, the display position is set based on the absolute coordinate data corresponding to the symbol that stops last. In the display control of the symbol whose stop order is not the last, the stop order is not the last. The display position may be calculated and set from the relative coordinate data corresponding to the design and the absolute coordinate data. In this case, since the symbol to be stopped last has a variety of movements compared to other symbols (the symbol whose stop order is not the last), the configuration controlled by the absolute coordinate data is more efficient. The symbol that stops last may be a left symbol or a right symbol that is limited to a middle symbol. In addition, the first embodiment has a three-reel configuration in which the display position of the decorative symbol is three columns on the left and right, but may be an aspect in which the display position of the decorative symbol is in a plurality of rows above and below (for example, scrolling in the horizontal direction). The above aspect can also be applied to a two-reel configuration or a configuration with four or more reels. In any case, the position of the symbol to be finally stopped is not limited to a specific position (for example, the central position), and may be any position.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display control device can execute a reach action effect with different apparent symbol stop times at the plurality of display positions as an effect of the variable display game,
The symbol of the specific display position is a symbol that stops last in the case of the reach action effect, and the symbol of the other display position is a symbol that is not in the last stop order in the case of the reach action effect. Machine.

"Invention concept M5"
In Example 1, the specific image is a symbol at a specific display position (current symbol) in the scroll direction of the decorative display of the special symbol, and the related image is a symbol at another display position in the scroll direction. (Next symbol).
This is particularly advantageous when there are a large number of symbols for displaying the scrolled state, such as the current symbol, the next symbol, or even the previous symbol. If a coordinate table consisting of absolute coordinate data is set and stored for all of these symbols, a considerably large storage capacity is required. However, as in this embodiment, only absolute coordinates for only one symbol (current symbol) are required. This is because a data coordinate table is set, and after that, only a very small amount of relative coordinate data (a value such as the difference DY described above) needs to be set.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The display control device is configured to produce a variable display game that stops by performing a variable display that displays a plurality of symbols in the scroll direction on the screen,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific image is a symbol of a specific display position in the scroll direction, and the related image is a symbol of another display position in the scroll direction.

"Invention concept M6"
In the first embodiment, the calculation using the relative coordinate data is not performed for the reference image (for example, the current symbol), but the reference absolute value is not used for all related images (for example, the current symbol and the next symbol). The display position may be set by always performing an operation of adding the relative coordinate data to the coordinate data (reference coordinate data). For example, in step D803 in FIG. 137, the coordinate table for obtaining the data of the X coordinate and the Y coordinate is not regarded as specifying the display position of the current symbol, and the reference coordinates specifying the reference display position of the current symbol and the next symbol. Think of it as a table of data. Then, for the current symbol to be displayed at the reference display position in this case, for example, a calculation for adding 0 as relative coordinate data to each coordinate data of X coordinate and Y coordinate (data acquired from the coordinate table) is performed in step D803. It is good also as an aspect performed immediately after. In this case, the calculation for adding the relative coordinate data to the reference absolute coordinate data (reference coordinate data) is always performed immediately after step D803 for the current symbol and in step D836 for the next symbol. Here, “addition” substantially includes subtraction. This is because if the relative coordinate data is a negative value, the subtraction is substantially performed by the addition operation. Further, the reference coordinate data and the relative coordinate data are not necessarily stored in the form of a table. The above also applies to images other than symbols (such as an image of a notice character).
In the above-described aspect, there is no effect that the calculation using relative coordinate data and the one that does not perform the calculation occur, so that the processing can be shared. In addition, the operation of changing the display position of the reference image (for example, the current symbol) in the above-described first embodiment is also only required to change the relative coordinate data (for example, from 0 to a non-zero plus or minus value). Therefore, there is an advantage that the operation of changing the display position for all related images becomes easy.
The above aspect is described as an inventive concept as follows.
In a gaming machine comprising an effect display device and a display control device that performs display control for displaying an effect image on the screen of the display device,
The display control device includes:
Relative coordinate data for storing a common reference coordinate data for specifying a reference display position on the screen for a plurality of related images, and for specifying an actual display position by adding to the reference coordinate data Storage means for storing at least each image having a different display position;
In the display control of the plurality of related images, display control means for setting an actual display position by executing a calculation for adding the relative coordinate data corresponding to the image to be displayed to the reference coordinate data. And a gaming machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the “related images” are not limited to images at a plurality of display positions in the scroll direction (the current symbol, the next symbol, etc.), and as described above, a plurality of symbols (at a plurality of display positions at which variable display is performed) For example, it may be a left symbol, a middle symbol, or a right symbol), or may be a plurality of images (at least images having different display positions) of a notice character.

"Invention concept R1"
In the first embodiment, the command buffer is a ring buffer. If it is a ring buffer, it becomes possible to overwrite the command buffer area for which command data has been used (in this example, copying to the command storage area in step D74) even if command data remains. The reception process from input to storage in the command buffer is accelerated. Moreover, it is not necessary to clear or shift the command data during or after the reading process for command data analysis (in this example, copying to the command storage area) (however, the command erasure condition is satisfied) Processing is faster).
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine comprising a game control device that controls the progress of a game, and an effect control device that controls the effect means based on a command transmitted from the game control device,
The effect control device has a command buffer for storing the received command, and the command buffer is a ring buffer.

“Invention concept γ1”
In the first embodiment, screen information for an initial screen is stored in the PROM 321 (program storage unit), and when the production control device 300 is activated when power is supplied to the production control device 300, the CPU 311 (arithmetic processing unit) The initial screen is immediately displayed on the display device 41 (display means) using the information. Thereby, the player or the store clerk can immediately know that the gaming machine is activated when the power failure is restored or the power is turned on. And since the time when nothing is displayed on the display device 41 at the time of activation is remarkably reduced, problems such as the player being awakened or the player or the store clerk erroneously determining that it is abnormal are solved.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a control device capable of producing an effect by controlling the display means,
The controller is
Arithmetic processing means, and program storage means for storing a program connected to the arithmetic processing means and executed by the arithmetic processing means,
Screen information for an initial screen is stored in the program storage means,
When the control device is activated when power is supplied to the control device, the arithmetic processing means is configured to display an initial screen on the display means using the screen information.

“Invention concept γ2”
In the first embodiment, screen information for an initial screen is stored in the PROM 321 (program storage unit), and when the production control device 300 is activated by supplying power to the production control device 300, the CPU 311 (arithmetic processing unit) controls the game control. Without waiting for a command from the device 100, the screen information is used to immediately display the initial screen on the display device 41 (display means), and then the command from the game control device 100 without any defects in the peripheral circuits. Is received, the display control corresponding to the command is executed using the data of the CGROM 322 (image storage means) connected to the VDP 312 (image processing means). As a result, the time when nothing is displayed on the display device 41 at the time of start-up is significantly reduced, and the problem that the player awakens or the player or the store clerk erroneously determines that it is abnormal, An effect by a simple image display (for example, a customer waiting demonstration effect) is realized.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine comprising a game control device for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
An arithmetic processing means, an image processing means for performing image processing for display on the display means under the control of the arithmetic processing means, and a program for storing a program connected to the arithmetic processing means and executed by the arithmetic processing means Storage means, and image storage means connected to the image processing means for storing still image or moving image data,
Screen information for an initial screen is stored in the program storage means,
When power is supplied to the effect control device and the effect control device is activated, the arithmetic processing means displays an initial screen on the display means using the screen information, and then receives the command, the image storage means A game machine capable of executing a display corresponding to the command received by the display means using the data stored in the display.

“Invention concept γ3”
In the first embodiment, in the display control of the initial screen, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the peripheral circuit, and the initial screen is changed depending on whether the peripheral circuit is abnormal. As a result, the player or the store clerk can immediately know that the gaming machine is activated when the power is restored or the power is turned on, and can also know immediately whether there is an abnormality (or even the type of abnormality). .
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The arithmetic processing means includes:
In the control process for displaying the initial screen on the display means, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the peripheral circuit, the initial screen to be displayed is changed according to the determination result, and if it is determined that there is an abnormality, the initial screen is A gaming machine having a configuration for displaying an image including information for notifying occurrence of an abnormality.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
4 Front frame 5 Glass frame 12a, 12b Speaker (Directing means)
20 Game board 25 1st start prize opening 26 2nd start prize opening 2 (ordinary electric equipment: ordinary power)
27 Variable prize-winning equipment (special variable prize-winning equipment)
32 Universal map starting gate 35 Collective display device 41 Display device (special drawing display device) (display means, production means)
42 Panel decoration device (direction means)
43 Frame decoration device (directing means)
44 board production device (production means)
45 Frame production device (production means)
54 card unit connection board 55 external information terminal board 100 game control device (main board)
101 gaming microcomputer 101A CPU
101B ROM
101C RAM
120 First Start Port Switch 121 Second Start Port Switch 122 Gate Switch 123 Winner Port Switch 124 Count Switch 125 Magnetic Sensor Switch 126 Vibration Sensor Switch 140 Management Device 200 Discharge Control Device 201 Discharge Microcontroller 211 Glass Frame Opening Detection Switch 212 Front Frame Opening detection switch 213 Overflow switch 214 Radio wave detection sensor 215 Dispensing ball detection switch 216 Shooting ball break switch 300 Production control device (sub-board) (communication means, synchronization control means, control device)
311 Main control microcomputer (1st CPU) (arithmetic processing means)
311a RAM
321 PROM (program storage means)
322 Image ROM (image storage means)
360 Wireless module (communication means)
371 Setting switch 500 Power supply 551 Card unit

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine comprising: a game control device that manages the progress of a game; and a display control device that can produce an effect by controlling display means based on a command from the game control device.
The display control device includes:
Arithmetic processing means; program storage means connected to the arithmetic processing means for storing a program executed by the arithmetic processing means; and image data storage means for storing screen information for display on the display means. Have
Screen information for displaying the initial screen is not stored in the image data storage means, but is stored in the program storage means,
When power is supplied to the display control device and the display control device is activated, screen information for displaying the initial screen stored in the program storage means is used without waiting for a command from the game control device. Display the initial screen on the display means,
When receiving a command from the game control device, the game machine is configured to start display corresponding to the command using screen information stored in the image data storage means.

Images